Materials science Books

Book SynopsisA must-have for materials engineers, chemists, physicists, and geologists, this is one of the first coffee-table books in the field of glass science. Containing over fifty beautiful micrographs, the book reflects 35 years of original research by a highly regarded authority in the field. It contains 50 slides culled from tens of thousands of images on glass crystal nucleation, growth, and crystallization. The images represent glass crystallization mechanisms, including internal, surface, homogeneous, heterogeneous, and eutectic, crystal nucleation and growth.Table of ContentsForeword vii Introduction: 36 Years of Research and Discoveries about Glass Crystallization xi Glass Myth Shattered (Science Now, May 16, 1998) xix Acknowledgments xxi Letter from S. D. Stookey – The Inventor of Glass-ceramics xxii Crystals in Glass – A Celebration of Science and Art 1 Internal Nucleation in Glasses 7 Surface Nucleation on Glasses 45 Viscous Sintering with Concurrent Crystallization 71 Eutectic Crystallization 79 Cracks and Bubbles in Glass-ceramics 93 Reviews of “Crystals in Glass: A Hidden Beauty” 105 About the Author 109

Read more less

Book SynopsisWritten and peer reviewed by experts from around the globe, Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Technology provides up-to-date coverage of traditional topics of continuing interest to professionals, researchers, educators, and students, including polymeric materials, polymerization reactions, processing and finishing, properties, and morphology. Also available online, the 15 volumes of the fourth edition include over four hundred new and revised stand-alone articles and are organized alphabetically. Topics covered include new classes of materials such as Self-Healing Polymers, imaging and analytical techniques, new methods of controlled polymer architecture, and important applications.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume of Inorganic Syntheses spans the preparations of wide range of important inorganic, organometallic and solid-state compounds. The volume is divided into 6 chapters. The first chapter contains the syntheses of some key early transition metal halide clusters and the very useful mononuclear molybdenum(III) synthon, MoCl3(THF)3. Chapter 2 covers the synthesis of a number of cyclopentadienyl compounds, including a novel route to sodium and potassium cyclopentadienide, MC5H5. Chapter 3 details synthetic procedures for a range of metal-metal bonded compounds, including several with metal-metal multiple bonds. Chapter 4 contains procedures for a range of early and late transition metal compounds, each a useful synthon for further synthetic elaboration. Chapter 5 deals with the synthesis of a number of main group compounds and ligands, while Chapter 6 covers teaching laboratory experiments.Table of ContentsPreface v Dedication vii Notice to Contributors and Checkers xv Toxic Substances and Laboratory Hazards xvii Chapter One TRANSITION METAL HALIDE COMPOUNDS 1 1. Octahedral Hexatantalum Halide Clusters 1 A. Tetradecachlorohexatantalum Octahydrate 3 B. Tetradecabromohexatantalum Octahydrate 4 C. Tetrakis(benzyltributylammonium) Octadecachlorohexatantalate 5 2. Octahedral Hexamolybdenum Halide Clusters 8 A. Tetradecachlorohexamolybdate Hexahydrate (Chloromolybdic Acid) 10 B. Hexamolybdenum Dodecachloride 12 3. Ether Complexes of Molybdenum(III) and Molybdenum(IV) Chlorides 15 A. Tetrachlorobis(diethyl ether)molybdenum(IV) 16 B. Trichlorotris(tetrahydrofuran)molybdenum(III) 17 4. Octahedral Hexatungsten Halide Clusters 19 A. Bis(hydroxonium) Tetradecachlorohexatungstate Heptahydrate (Chlorotungstic Acid) 21 B. Hexatungsten Dodecachloride 22 5. Trinuclear Tungsten Halide Clusters 24 A. Tritungsten Decachloride 26 B. Trisodium Tridecachlorotritungstate 27 C. Tris(benzyltributylammonium) Tridecachlorotritungstate 28 6. Crystalline and Amorphous Forms of Tungsten Tetrachloride 30 A. Crystalline Tungsten Tetrachloride by Solid-State Reduction 32 B. Amorphous Tungsten Tetrachloride by Solution-Phase Reduction 33 Chapter Two CYCLOPENTADIENYL COMPOUNDS 35 7. Sodium and Potassium Cyclopentadienide 35 A. Sodium Cyclopentadienide 36 B. Potassium Cyclopentadienide 37 8. (Pentafluorophenyl)cyclopentadiene and its Sodium Salt 38 A. (Pentafluorophenyl)cyclopentadiene 39 B. Sodium (Pentafluorophenyl)cyclopentadienide 41 9. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl) Complexes of Scandium 42 A. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)chloroscandium 43 B. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)methylscandium 44 C. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)phenylscandium 45 D. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)(o-tolyl)scandium 46 10. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl) Complexes of Titanium, Zirconium, and Hafnium 47 A. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichlorotitanium(IV) 47 B. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichlorozirconium(IV) 49 C. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichlorohafnium(IV)50 11. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl) Complexes of Niobium and Tantalum 52 A. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichlorotantalum(IV) 53 B. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichloroniobium(IV) 55 12. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl) Complexes of Molybdenum 58 A. Bis(pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dichloromolybdenum(IV) 59 B. Bis(pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)dihydridomolybdenum(IV) 61 13. (η5-Cyclopentadienyl)tricarbonylmanganese(I) Complexes 62 A. (η5-Cyclopentadienyl)tricarbonylmanganese(I) 63 B. (η5-Pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)tricarbonylmanganese(I) 63 14. 1,10-Diaminoferrocene 65 A. 1,10-Dilithioferrocene N,N,N0,N0-Tetramethylethylenediamine 66 B. 1,10-Dibromoferrocene 67 C. One-Pot Preparation of 1,10-Dibromoferrocene from Ferrocene 68 D. 1,10-Diaminoferrocene 69 E. 1,10-Diaminoferrocenium Hexafluorophosphate 70 F. 1,10-Diaminoferrocenium Triflate 71 15. Mono(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl) Complexes of Osmium 72 A. Bromoosmic Acid 74 B. Bis(η5-pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)tetrabromodiosmium(III) 75 C. (η5-Pentamethylcyclopentadienyl)(1,5-cyclooctadiene)-bromoosmium(II) 76 Chapter Three COMPOUNDS WITH METAL–METAL BONDS 78 16. Tetra(acetato)dimolybdenum(II) 78 17. Supramolecular Arrays Based on Dimolybdenum Building Blocks 81 A. Tetrakis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)dimolybdenum(II) 84 B. Tris(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)di(chloro)-dimolybdenum(II,III) 86 C. cis-Bis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)tetrakis(acetonitrile)-dimolybdenum(II) Bis(tetrafluoroborate) 87 D. (μ2-Succinato)bis[tris(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-dimolybdenum(II)] 88 E. (μ2-η2,η2-Molybdato)bis[tris(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-dimolybdenum(II)] 89 F. (μ2-N,N0-Diphenylterephthaloyldiamidato)bis[tris(N,N0-di-panisylformamidinato) dimolybdenum(II)] 90 G. Molecular Propeller: (μ3-Trimesate)tris[tris(N,N0-di-panisylformamidinato) dimolybdenum(II)] 91 H. Molecular Loop: closo-Bis(μ2-malonato)bis[bis(N,N0-di-panisylformamidinato) dimolybdenum(II)] 92 I. Molecular Triangle: closo-Tris(μ2-eq,eq-1,4-cyclohexanedicarboxylato) tris[bis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-dimolybdenum(II)]92 J. Molecular Square: closo-Tetrakis(μ2-oxalato)tetrakis[bis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)dimolybdenum(II)] 93 K. Molecular Cage: closo-Tetrakis(μ3-trimesate)hexakis[bis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)dimolybdenum(II)] 94 18. Dimolybdenum and Ditungsten Hexa(alkoxides) 95 A. Hexa(tert-butoxy)dimolybdenum(III) 96 B. Hexakis(2-trifluoromethyl-2-propoxy)dimolybdenum(III) 97 C. Sodium Heptachloropentakis(tetrahydrofuran)ditungstate(III) 98 D. Hexa(tert-butoxy)ditungsten(III) 99 E. Hexakis(2-trifluoromethyl-2-propoxy)ditungsten(III) 100 19. Linear Trichromium, Tricobalt, Trinickel, and Tricopper Complexes of 2,20-Dipyridylamide 102 A. Dichlorotetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)trichromium(II) 103 B. Dichlorotetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)tricobalt(II) 104 C. Dichlorotetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)trinickel(II) 105 D. Dichlorotetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)tricopper(II) 106 E. Bis(acetonitrile)tetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)trichromium(II) Bis(hexafluorophosphate) 107 F. Bis(acetonitrile)tetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)tricobalt(II) Bis(hexafluorophosphate) 108 G. Bis(acetonitrile)tetrakis(2,20-dipyridylamido)trinickel(II) Bis(hexafluorophosphate) 108 20. Bis(tetrabutylammonium) Octachloroditechnetate(III) 110 A. Tetrabutylammonium Pertechnetate(VII) 111 B. Tetrabutylammonium Oxotetrachlorotechnetate(V) 112 C. Bis(tetrabutylammonium) Octachloroditechnetate(III) 112 21. Diruthenium Formamidinato Complexes 114 A. Chlorotris(acetato)(N,N0-di-2,6-xylylformamidinato)-diruthenium(II,III) 115 B. trans-Chlorobis(acetato)bis(N,N0-di-2,6-xylylformamidinato)-diruthenium(II,III) 117 C. cis-Chlorobis(acetato)bis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-diruthenium(II,III) 118 D. Chloro(acetato)tris(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-diruthenium(II,III) 119 E. Chlorotetrakis(N,N0-di-p-anisylformamidinato)-diruthenium(II,III) 120 22. Heptacarbonyl(disulfido)dimanganese(I) 122 23. Di(carbido)tetracosa(carbonyl)decaruthenate(2–) Salts 124 A. Calcium Di(carbido)tetracosa(carbonyl)decaruthenate(2–) 124 B. Bis[bis(triphenylphosphoranylidene)ammonium] Di(carbido)tetracosa(carbonyl)decaruthenate(2–) 125 Chapter Four GENERAL TRANSITION METAL COMPOUNDS 127 24. Bis(1,2-bis(dimethylphosphano)ethane)tricarbonyltitanium(0) and Hexacarbonyltitanate(2–) 127 A. Bis(1,2-bis(dimethylphosphano)ethane)-tricarbonyltitanium(0) 129 B. Bis[18-crown-6)(acetonitrile)potassium] Hexacarbonyltitanate(2–) 131 25. Tungsten Benzylidyne Complexes 134 A. Trichloro(1,2-dimethoxyethane)benzylidynetungsten(VI) 135 B. Chloro Bis[1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane]-benzylidynetungsten(IV) 136 26. Tungsten Oxytetrachloride and (Acetonitrile)tetrachlorotungsten Imido Complexes 138 A. Tungsten Oxytetrachloride 139 B. (Acetonitrile)tetrachloro(phenylimido)tungsten(VI) 140 C. (Acetonitrile)tetrachloro(2-propylimido)tungsten(VI) 141 D. (Acetonitrile)tetrachloro(2-propenylimido)tungsten(VI) 142 27. Tungsten Oxytetrachloride and Several Tungstate Salts 143 A. Tungsten Oxytetrachloride 144 B. Bis(tetrabutylammonium) Hexapolytungstate 145 C. Di(cetylpyridinium) Peroxoditungstate 146 D. Bis(tetrabutylammonium) Phenylphosphonatodiperoxotungstate 147 28. Bromotricarbonyldi(pyridine)manganese(I) 148 29. Bis(tetraethylammonium) fac-Tribromotricarbonylrhenate(I) and -Technetate(I) 149 A. Bis(tetraethylammonium) fac-Tribromotricarbonylrhenate(I) 151 B. Bis(tetraethylammonium) fac-Trichlorotricarbonyltechnetate(I) 152 30. Methyl(oxo)rhenium(V) Complexes with Chelating Ligands 155 A. Methyl(oxo)(1,2-ethanedithiolato)rhenium(V) Dimer 156 B. Methyl(oxo)bis(2-oxyquinoline)rhenium(V) 157 C. Methyl(oxo)(2,20-thiodiacetato)(triphenylphosphine)-rhenium(V) 158 31. Hexahydridoferrate(II) Salts 160 A. Tetrakis[bromobis(tetrahydrofuran)magnesium] Hexahydridoferrate(II) 161 B. Tetrakis[2-methyl-2-propoxomagnesium] Hexahydridoferrate(II) 163 32. Tris(allyl)iridium and -Rhodium 165 A. Allyllithium 166 B. mer-Trichlorotris(tetrahydrothiophene)iridium(III) 166 C. mer-Trichlorotris(tetrahydrothiophene)rhodium(III) 167 D. Tris(allyl)iridium(III) 168 E. Tris(allyl)rhodium(III) 170 33. Trinuclear Palladium(II) Acetate 171 Chapter Five MAIN GROUP COMPOUNDS AND LIGANDS 174 34. Monocarbaborane Anions with 10 or 12 Vertices 174 A. Tetraethylammonium arachno-6-Carba-decaboranate(14) 176 B. Tetraethylammonium closo-2-Carba-decaboranate(10) 177 C. Tetraethylammonium closo-1-Carba-decaboranate(10) 178 D. Tetraethylammonium closo-1-Carba-dodecaboranate(12) 179 E. Tetraethylammonium nido-6-Phenyl-6-carbadecaboranate(12) 180 F. Tetraethylammonium closo-2-Phenyl-2-carbadecaboranate(10) 181 G. Tetraethylammonium closo-1-Phenyl-1-carbadecaboranate(10) 182 H. Tetraethylammonium closo-1-Phenyl-1-carbadodecaboranate(12) 183 35. Tetrakis(5-tert-butyl-2-hydroxyphenyl)ethene 186 A. 5,50-Di-tert-butyl-2,20-dimethoxybenzophenone 187 B. Titanium Trichloride 1,2-Dimethoxyethane (1:1.5) 189 C. Tetrakis(5-tert-butyl-2-methoxyphenyl)ethene 189 D. Tetrakis(5-tert-butyl-2-hydroxyphenyl)ethene 192 36. Electrochemical Synthesis of Tetraethylammonium Tetrathiooxalate 195 37. Mid-Infrared Emitting Lead Selenide Nanocrystal Quantum Dots 198 A. Lead Selenide NQDs Emitting at 2.5 μm (0.50 eV) 199 B. Lead Selenide NQDs Emitting at 2.8 μm (0.44 eV) 200 C. Lead Selenide NQDs Emitting at 3.3 μm (0.38 eV) 201 D. Lead Selenide NQDs Emitting at 3.5 μm (0.35 eV) 201 Chapter Six TEACHING LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS 203 38. Tetra(acetato)dichromium(II) Dihydrate 203 39. Keggin Structure Polyoxometalates 210 A. Tri(ammonium) 12-Molybdophosphate 211 B. 12-Tungstosilicic Acid 212 C. 12-Tungstophosphoric Acid 214 D. 12-Molybdophosphoric Acid 215 40. Quadruply Metal–Metal Bonded Complexes of Rhenium(III) 217 A. Tetrabutylammonium Perrhenate(VII) 218 B. Bis(tetrabutylammonium) Octachlorodirhenate(III) 219 C. Tetra(acetato)dichlorodirhenium(III) 221 41. Bis[bis(triphenylphosphoranylidene)ammonium] Undecacarbonyltriferrate(2

Read more less

Book SynopsisContains collection of papers from the below symposia held during the 10th Pacific Rim Conference on Ceramic and Glass Technology (PacRim10), June 2-7, 2013, in Coronado, California 2012: Novel, Green, and Strategic Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Polymer Derived Ceramics and Composites Advanced Powder Processing and Manufacturing Technologies Synthesis and Processing of Materials Using Electric Fields/Currents Table of ContentsPreface ix NOVEL, GREEN, AND STRATEGIC PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Optimized Shaping Process for Transparent Spinel Ceramic 3 Alfred Kaiser, Thomas Hutzler, Andreas Krell, and Robert Kremer Thermal Diffusion Coatings for Wear-Resistant Components for Oil and Gas Industry 13 E. Medvedovski, F.A. Chinski, and J. Stewart POLYMER DERIVED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES Polymer-Derived Ceramics for Development of Ultra-High Temperature Composites 33 C. J. Leslie, H. J. Kim, H. Chen, K. M. Walker, E. E. Boakye, C. Chen, C. M. Carney, M. K. Cinibulk, and M.-Y. Chen Siliconboronoxycarbide (SIBOC) Foam from Methyl Borosiloxane 47 Sreejith Krishnan, Tobias Fey, and Peter Greil Synthesis of a Porous SiC Material from Poiycarbosilane by Direct Foaming and Radiation Curing 61 Akira Idesaki, Masaki Sugimoto, and Masahito Yoshikawa Fabrication of SiOC/C Coatings on Stainless Steel using Poly(Phenyl Carbosilane) and their Anti-Corrosion Properties 71 Yoon Joo Lee, Jong II Kim, Soo Ryong Kim, Woo Teck Kwon, Dong-Geun Shin, and Yonghee Kim Photo Luminescent Properties of Polymer Derived Ceramics at Near Stoichiometric Si02-xSiC-y(H) Compositions 79 Masaki Narisawa and Akihiro Iwase, Seiji Watase and Kimihiro Matsukawa, and Taketoshi Kawai Synthesis of Hierarchical Porous SiCO Monoliths from Preceramic Polymer Impregnated with Porous Templates 85 Xuehua Yan, Jianmei Pan, Xiaonong Cheng, Chenghua Zhang, and Guifang Xu ADVANCED POWDER PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGIES Solid Reaction Mechanism of Li2C03 and FePOyC Powder 95 Takashi Hashizume, Atsushi Saiki, and Kiyoshi Terayama Development of New Synthesis Route of Lanthanum Germanate Oxyapatite from Homogeneous Aqueous Solution 103 Shouta Kitajima, Kiyoshi Kobayashi, Toru Higuchi, and Yoshio Sakka Magnetic Orientation of Bismuth Nano-Particles in a Transparent Medium 109 Naoyuki Kitamura, Kohki Takahashi, Iwao Mogi, Satoshi Awaji, and Kazuo Watanabe Control of Dispersion and Agglomeration of CNTS for their Networking—Mechanical and Electrical Properties of CNT/Alumina Composites 117 Mitsuaki Matsuoka, Junichi Tatami, and Toru Wakihara Synthesis and Microstructure Development in Yttria-Magnesia Ceramics for Infrared Transparency 121 J. A. Miller and I. E. Reimanis Fabrication of Flake-Like Boehmite/Ceria or Zinc Oxide Composites for UV Shield Coating 131 Seizo Obata, Susumu Kawai, Michiyuki Yoshida, Osamu Sakurada, and Kenji Kido Thermal Degradation Control Study of Carbon Fiber/Polyamide 6 Composite using Hexagonal Boron Nitride Powder 141 Daisuke Shimamoto, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta Sol-Gel Auto-Combustion Synthesis of Co-Doped ZnO Diluted Magnetic Semiconductor Nanopowders 149 Chuanbin Wang, Xuan Zhou, Fei Chen, Qiang Shen, and Lianmeng Zhang SYNTHESIS AND PROCESSING OF MATERIALS USING ELECTRIC FIELDS/CURRENTS Advanced Usage of SPS Technology for Producing Innovative Materials 159 Foad Naimi, Ludivine Minier, Cedric Morin, Sophie Le Gallet, and Frederic Bernard Fabrication of Transparent MgAI204 Spinel by Optimizing Loading Schedule during Spark-Plasma-Sintering 173 Koji Morita, Byung-Nam Kim, Hidehiro Yoshida, Yoshio Sakka, and Keijiro Hiraga Properties of WCCo/Diamond Composites Produced by PPS Method Intended for Drill Bits for Machining of Building Stones 181 Marcin Rosinski, Joanna Wachowicz, Tomasz Plocinski, Tomasz Truszkowski, and Andrzej Michalski Surface Morphology of YSZ Thin Films Deposited from a Precursor Solution under the Electrical Fields 193 Atsushi Saiki, Kento Hamada, and Takashi Hashizume Author Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis series provides inorganic chemists and materials scientists with a forum for critical, authoritative evaluations of advances in every area of the discipline. Volume 58 continues to report recent advances with a significant, up-to-date selection of contributions by internationally-recognized researchers.Table of ContentsChapter 1 Tris(dithiolene) Chemistry: A Golden Jubilee 1Stephen Sproules Chapter 2 How to Find an HNO Needle in a (Bio)-Chemical Haystack 145Fabio Doctorovich, Damian E. Bikiel, Juan Pellegrino, Sebastián A. Suárez, and Marcelo A. Martí Chapter 3 Photoactive Metal Nitrosyl and Carbonyl Complexes Derived from Designed Auxiliary Ligands: An Emerging Class of Photochemotherapeutics 185Brandon J. Heilman, Margarita A. Gonzalez, and Pradip K. Mascharak Chapter 4 Metal–Metal Bond-Containing Complexes as Catalysts for C-H Functionalization 225Katherine P. Kornecki, John F. Berry, David C. Powers, and Tobias Ritter Chapter 5 Activation of Small Molecules by Molecular Uranium Complexes 303Henry S. La Pierre and Karsten Meyer Chapter 6 Reactive Transition Metal Nitride Complexes 417Jeremy M. Smith Subject Index 471 Cumulative Index 495

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 10 - Developments in Strategic Materials and Computational Design IV A collection of 25 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the Geopolymers and Chemically Bonded Ceramics (Focused Session 1); Thermal Management Materials andTechnologies (Focused Sessoin 2); and Materials for Extreme Environments: Ultrahigh Temperature Ceramics and Nano-laminated Ternary Carbides and Nitrides (MAX Phases) (Symposium 12).Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi GEOPOLYMERS AND CHEMICALLY BONDED CERAMICS Importance of Metakaolin Impurities for Geopolymer Based Synthesis 3 A. Autef, E. Joussein, G. Gasgnier, and S. Rossignol Mechanical Strength Development of Geopolymer Binder and the Effect of Quartz Content 13 C. H. Riischer, A. Schulz, M. H. Gougazeh, and A. Ritzmann The Role of Si02 and Al203 on the Properties of Geopolymers with and without Calcium 25 P. De Silva, S. Hanjitsuwan, and P. Chindaprasirt Synthesis of Thermostable Geopolymer-Type Material from Waste Glass 37 Qin Li, Zengqing Sun, Dejing Tao, Hao Cui, and Jianping Zhai The Effect of Curing Conditions on Compression Strength and Porosity of Metakaolin-Based Geopolymers 49 Bing Cai, Torbjorn Mellgren, Susanne Bredenberg, and Hakan Engqvist Chemically Bonded Phosphate Ceramics Subject to Temperatures Up to 1000° C 57 H. A. Colorado, C. Hiel, and J. M. Yang Mechanical Properties of Geopolymer Composite Reinforced by Organic or Inorganic Additives 67 E. Prud'homme, P. Michaud, S. Rossignol, and E. Joussein Evaluation of Geopolymer Concretes at Elevated Temperature 79 Kunal Kupwade-Patil, Md. Sufian Badar, Milap Dhakal, and Erez N. Allouche Basic Research on Geopolymer Gels for Production of Green Binders and Hydrogen Storage 97 C. H. Ruscher, L. Schomborg, A. Schulz, and J. C. Buhl Mechanical Characteristics of Cotton Fibre Reinforced Geopolymer Composites 115 T. Alomayri and I.M. Low Green Composite: Sodium-Based Geopolymer Reinforced with Chemically Extracted Com Husk Fibers 123 Sean S. Musil, P. F. Keane, and W. M. Kriven Optimization and Characterization of Geopolymer Mortars using Response Surface Methodology 135 Milap Dhakal, Kunal Kupwade-Patil, Erez N. Allouche, Charles Conner, la Baume Johnson, and Kyungmin Ham Evaluation of Graphitic Foam in Thermal Energy Storage Applications 151 Peter G. Stansberry and Edwin Pancost THERMAL MANAGEMENT MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES Q-State Monte Carlo Simulations of Anisotropic Grain Growth in Single Phase Materials 159 J. B. Allen, C. F. Comwell, B. D. Devine, and C. R. Welch VIRTUAL MATERIALS (COMPUTATIONAL) DESIGN AND CERAMIC GENOME Numerical Calculations of Dynamic Behavior of a Rotating Ceramic Composite with a Self-Healing Fluid 173 Louiza Benazzouk, Eric Arquis, Nathalie Bertrand, Cedric Descamps, and Marc Valat Explicit Modeling of Crack Initiation and Propagation in the Microstructure of a Ceramic Material Generated with Voronoi Tessellation 185 S. Falco, N. A. Yahya, R. I. Todd, and N. Petrinic Kinetic Monte Carlo Simulation of Cation Diffusion in Low-K Ceramics 197 Brian Good Effective Thermoelastic Properties of C/C Composites Calculated using 3D Unit Cell Presentation of the Microstructure 213 Galyna Stasiuk, Romana Piat, Vinit V. Deshpande, and Puneet Mahajan Inelastic Design of MMCS with Lamellar Microstructure 221 Yuriy Sinchuk and Romana Piat Multi-Scale Modeling of Textile Reinforced Ceramic Composites 233 J. Vorel, S. Urbanova, E. Grippon, I. Jandejsek, M. Marsalkova, M. Sejnoha Numerical Estimation of the Infiltrability of Woven CMC Preforms 247 G. L. Vignoles, W. Ros, and C. Germain Multiscale Extraction of Morphological Features in Woven CMCs 253 C. Chapoullie, C. Germain, J-P. Da Costa, G. L. Vignoles, and M. Cataldi MATERIALS FOR EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS: ULTRAHIGH TEMPERATURE CERAMICS AND NANOLAMINATED TERNARY CARBIDES AND NITRIDES Influence of Precursors Stoichiometry on SHS Synthesis of Ti2AIC Powders 265 L. Chlubny, J. Lis, and M.M. Bucko XRD and TG-DSC Analysis of the Silicon Carbide-Palladium Reaction 273 M. Gentile, P.Xiao, and T. Abram Modelling Damage and Failure in Structural Ceramics at Ultra-High Temperatures 283 M. Pettina, F. Biglari, D. D. Jayaseelan, L. J. Vandeperre, P. Brown, A. Heaton, and K. Nikbin Influence of Precursor Zirconium Carbide Powders on the Properties of the Spark Plasma Sintered Ceramic Composite Materials 297 Nikolai Voltsihhin, Irina Hussainova, Simo-Pekka Hannula, and Mart Viljus SECOND ANNUAL GLOBAL YOUNG INVESTIGATOR FORUM Dielectric and Piezoelectric Properties of Sr and La CO-Doped PZT Ceramics 311 Volkan Kalem and Muharrem Timucin Author Index 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 2 - Mechanical Properties and Performance of Engineering Ceramics and Composites VIIIA collection of 21 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 1 -Mechanical Behavior and Performance of Ceramics and Composites.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi CHARACTERIZATION AND MODELING OF CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES Acoustic Emission and Electrical Resistivity Monitoring of SiC/SiC Composite Cyclic Behavior 3 Christopher R. Baker and Gregory N. Morscher Characterization of SiC/SiCN Ceramic Matrix Composites with Monazite Fiber Coating 11 Enrico Klatt, Klemens Kelm, Martin FrieG, Dietmar Koch, and Heinz Voggenreiter Fiber, Porosity and Weave Effects on Properties of Ceramic Matrix Composites 23 G. Ojard, J. Cuneo, I. Smyth, E. Prevost, Y. Gowayed, U. Santhosh, and A. Calomino Weave and Fiber Volume Effects on Durability of Ceramic Matrix Composites 33 G. Ojard, E. Prevost, U. Santhosh, R. Naik, and D. C. Jarmon Cooling Performance Tests of a CMC Nozzle with Annular Sector Cascade Rig 45 Kozo Nita, Yoji Okita, and Chiyuki Nakamata Study on Strength Prediction Model for Unidirectional Composites 57 Hongjian Zhang, Weidong Wen, Haitao Cui, Hui Yuan, and Jianfeng Xiao PROCESSING AND PROPERTIES OF FIBERS AND CERAMICS The Effect of the Addition of Ceria Stabilized Zirconia on the Creep of Mullite 69 D. Glymond, M. Vick, M.-J. Pan, F. Giuliani, and L. J. Vandeperre Microstructural Evolution of CVD Amorphous B-C Ceramics Heat Treated: Experimental Characterization and Atomistic Simulation 79 Camille Pallier, Georges Chollon, Patrick Weisbecker, Jean-Marc Leyssale, and F. Teyssandier Densification of SiC with AIN-Nd203 Sintering Additives 89 Laner Wu, Yong Jiang, Wenzhou Sun, Yuhong Chen, and Zhenkun Huang Solid-Solution of Nitrogen-Containing Rare Earth Aluminates R2AI03N (R=Nd and Sm) 95 Yong Jiang, Laner Wu, and Zhengkun Huang Microstructure and Properties of Reaction Bonded Metal Modified Ceramics 101 S. M. Salamone, M. K. Aghajanian, S. E. Horner, and J. Q. Zheng Investigation into the Effect of Common Ceramic Core Additives on the Crystallisation and Sintering of Amorphous Silica 111 Ben Taylor, Stewart T. Welch, and Stuart Blackburn Different Fibers Exposed to Temperatures Up to 1000° C 123 Henry A. Colorado, Clem Hiel, and Jenn-Ming Yang Heat Diffusivity Measurements on Ceramic Foams and Fibers with a Laser Spot and an IR Camera 137 G. L. Vignoles, C. Lorrette, G. Bresson, and R. Backov Towards a Multiscale Model of Thermally-Induced Microcracking in Porous Ceramics 145 Ray S. Fertig, III and Seth Nickerson Investigation on Reliability of High Alumina Refractories 155 Wenjie Yuan, Qingyou Zhu, Jun Li, Chengji Deng, and Hongxi Zhu Evaluation of Subcritical Crack Growth in Low Temperature Co-Fired Ceramics 161 Raul Bermejo, Peter Supancic, Clemens Krautgasser, and Robert Danzer Multilayer Ceramic Composite Armor Design and Impact Tests 173 Faruk Elaldi Compression Failure Analysis of Graphite Foam Core Based Sandwich Composite Constructions 179 Hooman Hosseini, Seyyed Reza Ghaffarian, Mohammad Teymouri, and Ali Reza Moeini Tribological Profile of Binderless Niobium Carbide 189 Mathias Woydt and Hardy Mohrbacher Tribological Properties of Alumina/Zirconia Composites with and without h-BN Phases 195 Liang Xue and Gary L. Doll Author Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 3 - Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Materials for Extreme Environments IIIA collection of 12 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the Advanced Ceramic Coatings and Systems and Next Generation Technologies for Innovative Surface Coatingssymposia.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix Progress in EBC Development for Silicon-Based, Non-Oxide Ceramics 1C.A. Lewinsohn, H. Anderson, J. Johnston, and Dongming Zhu Fabrication of Slurry Based Y-Si-AI-0 Environmental Barrier Coating on the Porous Si3N4 Ceramics 9Yinchao Liu, Chao Wang, Xuefen Lu, Hongjie Wang Creep and Environmental Durability of Environmental Barrier Coatings and Ceramic Matrix Composites under Imposed Thermal Gradient Conditions 19Matthew Appleby, Gregory N. Morscher, and Dongming Zhu Dynamic Oblique Angle Deposition of Nanostructures for Energy Applications 31G.-C. Wang, I. Bhat, and T.-M. Lu Photoinduced Hydrophilicity and Photocatalytic Properties of Nb205 Thin Films 47Raquel Fiz, Linus Appel, and Sanjay Mathur Hard Nanocomposite Coatings: Thermal Stability, Protection of Substrate against Oxidation, Toughness and Resistance to Cracking 55J. Musil Preparation of Epitaxially Grown Cr-Si-N Thin Films by Pulsed Laser Deposition 67T. Endo, K. Suzuki, A. Sato, T. Suzuki, T. Nakayama, H. Suematsu, and K. Niihara Influence of Oxygen Content on the Hardness and Electrical Resistivity of Cr(N,0) Thin Films 77Aoi Sato, Toshiyuki Endo, Kazuma Suzuki, Tsuneo Suzuki, Tadachika Nakayama, Hisayuki Suematsu, and Koichi Niihara Nanocomposite MO-CU-N Coatings Deposited by Reactive Magnetron Sputtering Process with a Single Alloying Target 89Duck Hyeong Jung, Caroline Sunyong Lee, and Kyoung II Moon Customized Coating Systems for Products with Added Value from Development to High Volume Production 97T. Hosenfeldt, Y. Musayev, and Edgar Schulz A Study on the Improvement of the Service Life of Shaft-Bushing Tribo-Systems by Plasma Sulfur Nitrocarburing Process 105Kyoung II Moon, Hyun Jun Park, Hyoung Jun Kim, Jin Uk Kim, and Cheol Wong Byun Microstructural Characterisation of Porous Ti02 Ceramic Coatings Fabricated by Plasma Electrolytic Oxidation of Ti 117Po-Jen Chu, Aleksey Yerokhin, Allan Matthews, and Ju-Liang He Author Index 129

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 9 - Ceramic Materials for Energy Applications III A collection of 15 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposia 6 - Advanced Materials and Technologies for Rechargeable Energy Storage; Symposium 13 - Advanced Ceramics and Composites for Sustainable Nuclear Energy and Fusion Energy; Focused Session 4 - Advanced Processing for Photonics and Energy; and the Engineering Summit of the Americas session.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix ENGINEERING SUMMIT OF THE AMERICAS New Materials for Energy and Biomedical Applications 3 Alejandra Hortencia Miranda Gonzalez, Claudio Machado Junior, Bruna Andressa Bregadiolli, Natalia Coelho de Farias, Paulo Henrique Perlatti D'Alpino, and Carlos Frederico de Oliveira Graeff Ceramic Gas-Separation Membranes for Advanced Energy Applications 15 C. A. Lewinsohn, J. Chen, D. M. Taylor, P. A. Armstrong, L.L. Anderson, and M. F. Carolan ADVANCED MATERIALS AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ENERGY GENERATION AND RECHARGEABLE ENERGY STORAGE Li-Ion Conducting Solid Electrolytes 27 A. Rost, J. Schilm, M. Kusnezoff, and A. Michaelis Sodium Iron Phosphate Na2FeP207 Glass-Ceramics for Sodium Ion Battery 33 Tsuyoshi Honma, Takuya Togashi, Noriko Ito, and Takayuki Komatsu Heterogeneous Manganese Oxide-Encased Carbon Nanocomposite Fibers for High Performance Pseudocapacitors 41 Qiang Li, Karen Lozano, Yinong Lü, and Yuanbing Mao The Effect of Geometric Factors on Sodium Conduction: A Comparison of Beta- and Beta"-Alumina 57 Emma Kennedy and Dunbar P. Birnie III ADVANCED CERAMIC MATERIALS AND PROCESSING FOR PHOTONICS AND ENERGY Effect of Porosity on the Efficiency of DSSC Produced by using Nano-Size Ti02 Powders 67 N. Bilgin, J. Park, and A. Ozturk Evaluation of Compression Characteristics for Composite- Antenna-Structures 79 Jinyul Kim, Dongseob Kim, Dongsik Shin, Weesang Park, and Woonbong Hwang Design and Fabrication of Smart-Skin Structures with a Spiral 87 Antenna Dongseob Kim, Jinyul Kim, and Woonbong Hwang ADVANCED CERAMICS AND COMPOSITES FOR SUSTAINABLE NUCLEAR ENERGY AND FUSION ENERGY Comparison of Probabilistic Failure Analysis for Hybrid Wound Composite Ceramic Assembly Tested by Various Methods 95 James G. Hemrick and Edgar Lara-Curzio Strength-Formulation Correlations in Magnesium Phosphate Cements for Nuclear Waste Encapsulation 107 W. Montague, M. Hayes, and L. J. Vandeperre Test Methods for Hoop Tensile Strength of Ceramic Composite Tubes for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Applications 119 Michael G. Jenkins and Jonathan A. Salem Test Methods for Flexural Strength of Ceramic Composite Tubes for Small Modular Reactor Applications 131 Michael G. Jenkins and Thomas L. Nguyen Effects of Size and Geometry on the Equibiaxial Flexural Test of Fine Grained Nuclear Graphite 141 Chunghao Shih, Yutai Katoh, and Takagi Takashi High Temperature Steam Corrosion of Cladding for Nuclear Applications: Experimental 149 Kevin M. McHugh, John E. Gamier, Sergey Rashkeev, Michael V. Glazoff, George W. Griffith, and Shannon M. Bragg-Sitton Author Index 161

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 7 - Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology VII A collection of 15 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the 7th International Symposium on Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology (Symposium 7) and Nanomaterials for Sensing Applications symposia (Focused Session 3).Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY Sol-Gel Approach to the Calcium Phosphate Nanocomposites 3Aldona Beganskiene, Zivile Stankeviciute, Milda Malakauskaite, Irma Bogdanoviciene, Valdek Mikli, Kaia Tonsuaadu, and Aivaras Kareiva Reinforcement Mechanisms in Alumina Toughened Zirconia Nanocomposites with Different Stabilizing Agents 15Sergio Rivera, Luis A. Diaz, Adolfo Fernandez, Ramon Torrecillas, and Jose S. Moya Synthesis and Characterization of Nanostructured Copper Oxide 23David Dodoo-Arhin, Matteo Leoni, and Paolo Scardi X-Ray Diffraction Study on the In-Situ Crystallization Kinetics in Electrospun PVP/Ti02 Nanofibers 35H. Albetran, A. Alsafwan, H. Haroosh, Y. Dong, and I. M. Low Metal-Catalyzed Growth of ZnO Nanowires 51Werner Mader, Heike Simon, Tobias Krekeler, and Gunnar Schaan Graphene-SnO2 Nanocomposites for Lithium-Ion Battery Anodes 67R. Muller and S. Mathur Cobalt-Manganese Spinel Oxides as Visible-Light-Driven Water Oxidation Catalysts 75Hongfei Liu, and Greta R. Patzke Eclipse Transparent Electrode and Applications 87Hulya Demiryont, Kenneth C. Shannon III, and Matthew Bratcher Plasma Enhanced CVD of Transparent and Conductive Tin Oxide Thin Films 99Trilok Singh, Thomas Fischer, Jai Singh, Sanjeev Kumar Gurram, and Sanjay Mathur Chemically Bonded Phosphate Ceramics Reinforced with Carbon Nanotubes 107James Wade, Jingjing Liu, and Houzheng Wu Hardness of Alumina/Silicon Carbide Nanocomposites at Various Silicon Carbide Volume Percentages 119James Wade and Houzheng Wu NANOMATERIALS FOR SENSING APPLICATIONS Self-Sustained NO2 GAS Sensor Operating at Room Temperatures Based on Solar Light activated p-NiO/n-Si Diode 133Alaa Eldin Gad and Sanjay Mathur Synthesis, Structural Studies of Some Lanthanide Complexes of the Mesogenic Schiff-Base, N,N"-di-(4'-Octadecyloxybenzoate)Salicylidene-I", 3"-Diamino-2"-Propanol 139Sanyucta Kumari Development of Single-, Few- and Multiple-Nanowire Gas-Sensor Two-Terminal Devices on Ceramic Substrates and Characterization by Impedance Spectroscopy 149Bonex Mwakikunga, Trilok Singh, Irina Giebelhaus, Thomas Fischer, Ashish Lepcha, Alaa Eldin Gad, Guido Faglia, and Sanjay Mathur Synthesis and Dispersion of Silica Nanowires for Biosensing Applications 157Praveen Kumar Sekhar and Kumar Subramaniyam Author Index 165

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 4 - Advances in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells IX A collection of 13 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 3 - 10th International Symposium on Solid Oxide Fuel Cells: Materials, Science, and Technology.Table of ContentsPreface vi i Introduction ix Development of a Portable Propane Driven 300 W SOFC-System 1 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Christian Szepanski SOFC-System for Highly Efficient Power Generation from Biogas 11 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Jana Oelze Development of Solid Oxide Fuel Cell Stack Modules for High Efficiency Power Generation 23 Hossein Ghezel-Ayagh The Development of Plasma Sprayed Metal-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cells at Institute of Nuclear Energy Research 31 Chun-Liang Chang, Chang-Sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Sheng-Hui Nien, Chin-Ming Chuang, Shih-Wei Cheng, and Szu-Han Wu Development and Application of SOFC-MEA Technology at INER 41 Maw-Chwain Lee, Tai-Nan Lin, and Ruey-yi Lee Aqueous Processing Routes for New SOFC Materials 67 Maarten C Verbraeken, Mark Cassidy, and John T.S. Irvine Modification of Sintering Behavior of Ni Based Anode Material by Doping for Metal Supported-SOFC 77 Pradnyesh Satardekar, Dario Montinaro, and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Nickel Pattern Anodes for Studying SOFC Electrochemistry 89 H. C Patel, V. Venkataraman, and P. V. Aravind Assessment of Ba-^COo.9-yFeyNbo.103.5 for High Temperature Electrochemical Devices 95 Zhibin Yang, Tenglong Zhu, Shidong Song, Minfang Han, and Fanglin Chen Ionic Conductivity in Mullite and Mullite Type Compounds 103 C. H. Rüscher and F. Kiesel Protective Oxide Coatings for the High Temperature Protection of Metallic SOFC Components 115 Neil J. Kidner, Sergio Ibanez, Kellie Chenault, Kari Smith, and Matthew M. Seabaugh Viscous Sealing Glass Development for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 123 Cheol Woon Kim, Jen Hsien Hsu, Casey Townsend, Joe Szabo, Ray Crouch, Rob Baird, and Richard K. Brow Propane Driven Hot Gas Ejector for Anode Off Gas Recycling in a SOFC-System 133 Andreas Lindermeir, Ralph-Uwe Dietrich, and Christoph Immisch Author Index 143

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 6 - Advances in Bioceramics and Porous Ceramics VI A collection of 13 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in Symposium 5 - Next Generation Bioceramics and Biocomposites and Symposium 9 - Porous Ceramics: Novel Developments and Applications.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix BIOCERAMICS Ceramics for Human Health Challenges 3Larry L. Hench and Mike Fenn Apatite Coatings: Ion Substitution and Biological Properties 27Wei Xia, Carl Lindahl, Anders Palmquist, and Hakan Engqvist Production of Potassium Titanate Whisker Reinforced Dental Composites 35Derya Kapusuz, Jongee Park, and Abdullah Ozturk Tribological Behavior of Friction Couple: Metal/Ceramic (Used for Head of Total Hip Replacement) 45M. Fellah, M. Labaiz, 0. Assala, and A. lost Hydrothermal Conversion of Calcite Foam to Carbonate Apatite 59N. X. T. Tram, M. Maruta, K. Tsuru, S. Matsuya, and K. Ishikawa Bioactive Ceramic Implants Composed of Hollow Hydroxyapatite Micro-Spheres for Bone Regeneration 67M. N. Rahaman, H. Fu, W. Xiao, and Y. Liu Maturation of Brushite (CaHP04-2H20) and In Situ Crystallization of Brushite Micro-Granules 77Matthew A. Miller, Matthew R. Kendall, Manoj K. Jain, Preston R. Larson, Andrew S. Madden, and A. Cuneyt Tas Biomimetic Calcium Phosphate Synthesis by using Calcium Metal 93A. Cuneyt Tas Surface Modification of Sol-Gel-Derived 45S5 BioglassR for Incorporation in Polylactic Acid (PLA) 107Ehsan Rezabeigi, Paula M. Wood-Adams, and Robin A. L. Drew POROUS CERAMICS Dead-End Silicon Carbide Micro-Filters for Liquid Filtration 115Ronald Neufert, Malte Moeller, and Abhaya K. Bakshi Effects of Fe203 on Properties of Novel Heat Insulation Materials Synthesized by Molten Salt Method 127Chengji Deng, Jun Ding, Wenjie Yuan, Jun Li, and Hongxi Zhu Development of Alkali-Resistant Porous Glass Based on (69-x)Si02-25B203-6Na20-xZrSi04 System 133M. Hasanuzzaman and A. G. Olabi Use of Cellular Ceramic-Supported SrO as a Catalyst for the Synthesis of Biodiesel 145F. B. Bassetti, A. A. Morandim, and F. S. Ortega Author Index 157

Read more less

Book SynopsisCeramic Engineering and Science Proceedings Volume 34, Issue 8 - Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials VII A collection of 20 papers from The American Ceramic Society''s 37th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 27-February 1, 2013. This issue includes papers presented in the 7th International Symposium on Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials and Systems (Symposium 8).Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi Creation of Surface Geometric Structures by Thermal Micro-Lines Patterning Techniques 1Soshu Kirihara, Satoko Tasaki, and Yusuke Itakura Magnetoelectric Properties of La-Modified BiFe03 Thin Films on Strontium Ruthenate (SrRu03) Buffered Layer 9Regina C. Deus, Cesar R. Foschini, Jose A. Varela, Elson Longo, and Alexandre Z. Simoes Properties of Pb(Zr,Ti)03/CoFe204/Pb(Zr,Ti)03 Layered Thin Films Prepared Via Chemical Solution Deposition 23Yoshikatsu Kawabata, Makoto Moriya, Wataru Sakamoto, and Toshinobu Yogo Intelligent Processes Enable New Products in the Field of Non-Oxide Ceramics 31Jens Eichler Fabricating Successful Ceramic Components using Development Carrier Systems 37Tom Standring, Bhupa Prajapati, Alex Cendrowicz, Paul Wilson, and Stuart Blackburn Optimized Shaping Process for Transparent Spinel Ceramic 49Alfred Kaiser, Thomas Hutzler, Andreas Krell, and Robert Kremer Combustion Synthesis (SHS) of Complex Ceramic Materials 57Jerzy Lis Wear and Reactivity Studies of Melt Infiltrated Ceramic Matrix Composite 69D. C. Jarmon and G. C. Ojard Fabrication and Properties of High Thermal Conductivity Silicon Nitride 79You Zhou, Hideki Hyuga, Tatsuki Ohji, and Kiyoshi Hirao Porous Silicon Carbide Derived from Polymer Blend 89Ken'ichiro Kita and Naoki Kondo Processing and Properties of Zirconia Toughened WC-Based Cermets 97I. Hussainova, N. Voltsihhin, M. E. Cura, and S-P. Hannula Mechanism of the Carbothermal Synthesis of MgAI204-SiC Refractory Composite Powders by Forsterite, Alumina and Carbon Black 105Hongxi Zhu, Hongjuan Duan, Wenjie Yuan, and Chengji Deng Joining of Alumina by Polycarbosilane and Siloxane Including Phenyl Groups 111Ken'ichiro Kita and Naoki Kondo Microwave Joining of Alumina using a Liquid Phase Sintered Alumina Insert* 123Naoki Kondo, Mikinori Hotta, Hideki Hyuga, Kiyoshi Hirao, and Hideki Kita Joining of Silicon Nitride Long Pipes without Insert Material by Local Heating Technique 129Mikinori Hotta, Naoki Kondo, Hideki Kita, and Tatsuki Ohji Interfacial Characterization of Diffusion-Bonded Monolithic and Fiber-Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics 133H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, and M. Singh Round Robin on Indentation Fracture Resistance of Silicon Carbide for Small Ceramic Products 143Hiroyuki Miyazaki, Yu-ichi Yoshizawa, and Kouichi Yasuda Numerical Analysis of Microstructural Fracture Behavior in Nano Composites under HVEM 151Hisashi Serizawa, Tamaki Shibayama, and Hidekazu Murakawa

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis series provides inorganic chemists and materials scientists with a forum for critical, authoritative evaluations of advances in every area of the discipline. Volume 59 continues to report recent advances with a significant, up-to-date selection of contributions by internationally-recognized researchers. The chapters of this volume are devoted to the following topics: Iron Catalysis in Synthetic Chemistry A New Paradigm for Photodynamic Therapy Drug Design: Multifunctional, Supramolecular DNA Photomodification Agents Featuring Ru(II)/Os(II) Light Absorbers Coupled to Pt(II) or Rh(III) Bioactive Sites Selective Binding of Zn2+ Complexes to Non-Canonical Thymine or Uracil in DNA or RNA. Progress Toward the Electrocatalytic Production of Liquid Fuels from Carbon Dioxide Monomeric Dinitrosyl Iron Complexes: Synthesis and Reactivity Interactions of Nitrosoalkanes/arenes, Nitrosamines, Nitrosothiols, and Alkyl Nitrites with Metals AminoTable of ContentsChapter 1 Iron Catalysis in Synthetic Chemistry 1 SUJOY RANA, ATANU MODAK, SOHAM MAITY, TUHIN PATRA, AND DEBABRATA MAITI Chapter 2 A New Paradigm for Photodynamic Therapy Drug Design: Multifunctional, Supramolecular DNA Photomodification Agents Featuring Ru(II)/Os(II) Light Absorbers Coupled to Pt(II) or Rh(III) Bioactive Sites 189 JESSICA D. KNOLL AND KAREN J. BREWER Chapter 3 Selective Binding of Zn2‡ Complexes to Non-Canonical Thymine or Uracil in DNA or RNA 245 KEVIN E. SITERS, STEPHANIE A. SANDER, AND JANET R. MORROW Chapter 4 Progress Toward the Electrocatalytic Production of Liquid Fuels from Carbon Dioxide 299 JOEL ROSENTHAL Chapter 5 Monomeric Dinitrosyl Iron Complexes: Synthesis and Reactivity 339 CAMLY T. TRAN, KELSEY M. SKODJE, AND EUNSUK KIM Chapter 6 Interactions of Nitrosoalkanes/arenes, Nitrosamines, Nitrosothiols, and Alkyl Nitrites with Metals 381 NAN XU AND GEORGE B. RICHTER-ADDO Chapter 7 Aminopyridine Iron and Manganese Complexes as Molecular Catalysts for Challenging Oxidative Transformations 447 ZOEL CODOLA, JULIO LLORET-FILLOL, AND MIQUEL COSTAS Subject Index 533 Cumulative Index 561

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes techniques of synthesis and self-assembly of macromolecules for developing new materials and improving functionality of existing ones. Because self-assembly emulates how nature creates complex systems, they likely have the best chance at succeeding in real-world biomedical applications. Employs synthetic chemistry, physical chemistry, and materials science principles and techniques Emphasizes self-assembly in solutions (particularly, aqueous solutions) and at solid-liquid interfaces Describes polymer assembly driven by multitude interactions, including solvophobic, electrostatic, and obligatory co-assembly Illustrates assembly of bio-hybrid macromolecules and applications in biomedical engineeringTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xiii 1 A Supramolecular Approach to Macromolecular Self-Assembly: Cyclodextrin Host/Guest Complexes 1Bernhard V. K. J. Schmidt and Christopher Barner-Kowollik 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 Synthetic Approaches to Host/Guest Functionalized Building Blocks, 3 1.2.1 CD Functionalization, 3 1.2.2 Suitable Guest Groups, 5 1.3 Supramolecular CD Self-Assemblies, 7 1.3.1 Linear Polymers, 7 1.3.2 Branched Polymers, 12 1.3.3 Cyclic Polymer Architectures, 17 1.4 Higher Order Assemblies of CD-Based Polymer Architectures Toward Nanostructures, 17 1.4.1 Micelles/Core-Shell Particles, 17 1.4.2 Vesicles, 19 1.4.3 Nanotubes and Fibers, 20 1.4.4 Nanoparticles and Hybrid Materials, 21 1.4.5 Planar Surface Modification, 22 1.5 Applications, 23 1.6 Conclusion and Outlook, 26 References, 26 2 Polymerization-Induced Self-Assembly: The Contribution of Controlled Radical Polymerization to The Formation of Self-Stabilized Polymer Particles of Various Morphologies 33Muriel Lansalot, Jutta Rieger, and Franck D’Agosto 2.1 Introduction, 33 2.2 Preliminary Comments Underlying Controlled Radical Polymerization, 36 2.2.1 Introduction, 36 2.2.2 Major Methods Based on a Reversible Termination Mechanism, 37 2.2.3 Major Methods Based on a Reversible Transfer Mechanism, 39 2.3 Pisa Via CRP Based on Reversible Termination, 40 2.3.1 PISA Using NMP, 40 2.3.2 Using ATRP, 46 2.4 Pisa Via CRP Based on Reversible Transfer, 48 2.4.1 Using RAFT in Emulsion Polymerization, 48 2.4.2 Using RAFT in Dispersion Polymerization, 61 2.4.3 Using TERP, 70 2.5 Concluding Remarks, 71 Acknowledgments, 73 Abbreviations, 73 References, 75 3 Amphiphilic Gradient Copolymers: Synthesis and Self-Assembly in Aqueous Solution 83Elise Deniau-Lejeune, Olga Borisova, Petr Št¡epánek, Laurent Billon, and Oleg Borisov 3.1 Introduction, 83 3.2 Synthetic Strategies for The Preparation of Gradient Copolymers, 86 3.2.1 Preparation of Gradient Copolymers by Controlled Radical Copolymerization, 87 3.2.2 Preparation of Block-Gradient Copolymers Using Controlled Radical Polymerization, 106 3.3 Self-Assembly, 110 3.3.1 Gradient Copolymers, 110 3.3.2 Diblock-Gradient Copolymers, 111 3.3.3 Triblock-Gradient Copolymers, 113 3.4 Conclusion and Outlook, 114 Abbreviations, 115 References, 117 4 Electrostatically Assembled Complex Macromolecular Architectures Based on Star-Like Polyionic Species 125Dmitry V. Pergushov and Felix A. Plamper 4.1 Introduction, 125 4.2 Core-Corona Co-Assemblies of Homopolyelectrolyte Stars Complexed with Linear Polyions, 127 4.3 Core-Shell-Corona Co-Assemblies of Star-Like Micelles of Ionic Amphiphilic Diblock Copolymers Complexed with Linear Polyions, 130 4.4 Vesicular Co-Assemblies of Bis-Hydrophilic Miktoarm Stars Complexed with Linear Polyions, 133 4.5 Conclusions, 137 Acknowledgment, 137 References, 137 5 Solution Properties of Associating Polymers 141Olga Philippova 5.1 Introduction, 141 5.2 Structures of Associating Polyelectrolytes, 142 5.3 Associating Polyelectrolytes in Dilute Solutions, 142 5.3.1 Intramolecular Association, 145 5.3.2 Intermolecular Association, 147 5.4 Associating Polyelectrolytes in Semidilute Solutions, 151 5.5 Conclusions, 155 References, 155 6 Macromolecular Decoration of Nanoparticles for Guiding Self-Assembly in 2D and 3D 159Christian Kuttner, Munish Chanana, Matthias Karg, and Andreas Fery 6.1 Introduction, 159 6.2 Guiding Assembly by Decoration with Artificial Macromolecules, 160 6.2.1 Decoration of Nanoparticles, 161 6.2.2 Distance Control in 2D and 3D, 166 6.2.3 Breaking the Symmetry, 171 6.3 Guiding Assembly by Decoration with Biomacromolecules, 173 6.3.1 DNA-Assisted Assembly, 173 6.3.2 Protein-Assisted Assembly, 177 6.4 Application of Assemblies, 181 6.5 Conclusions and Outlook, 183 References, 184 7 Self-Assembly of Biohybrid Polymers 193Dawid Kedracki, Jancy Nixon Abraham, Enora Prado, and Corinne Nardin 7.1 Introduction, 193 7.1.1 Amphiphiles, 194 7.1.2 Packing Parameter and Interfacial Tension, 195 7.1.3 Interaction Forces in Self-Assembly, 196 7.2 Self-Assembly of Biohybrid Polymers, 198 7.2.1 Polymer-DNA Hybrids, 198 7.2.2 Polypeptide Block Copolymers, 204 7.2.3 Block Copolypeptides, 205 7.3 Self-Assembly Driven Nucleation Polymerization, 207 7.3.1 Polymer-DNA Hybrids, 209 7.3.2 Polymer-Peptide Hybrids, 209 7.3.3 DNA-Peptide Hybrids, 212 7.4 Self-Assembly Driven by Electrostatic Interactions, 213 7.4.1 DNA/Polymer Bio-IPECs, 216 7.4.2 DNA/Copolymer Bio-IPECs, 216 7.5 Conclusion, 218 References, 219 8 Biomedical Application of Block Copolymers 231Martin Hrubý, Sergey K. Filippov, and Petr Št¡epánek 8.1 Introduction, 231 8.2 Diblock and Triblock Copolymers, 234 8.3 Graft and Statistical Copolymers, 240 8.4 Concluding Remarks, 245 Acknowledgment, 245 References, 245 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced, recent developments in biochips and medical imaging Biochips and Medical Imaging is designed as a professional resource, covering recent biochip and medical imaging developments. Within the text, the authors encourage uniting aspects of engineering, biology, and medicine to facilitate advancements in the field of molecular diagnostics and imaging. Biochips are microchips for efficiently screening biological analytes. This book aims at presenting information on the state-of-the-art and emerging biosensors, biochips, and imaging devices of the body's systems, including the endocrine, circulatory, and immune systems. Medical diagnostics includes biochips (in-vitro diagnostics) and medical and molecular imaging (in-vivo imaging). Biochips and Medical Imaging explores the role of in-vitro and in-vivo diagnostics. It enables an instructor to share in-depth examples of the use of biochips in diagnosing cancer and cardiovascular diseases. Provides real-life knowledge on biochipTable of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi 1 Cell Biology 1 1.1 Cell Biology Introduction 1 1.2 Cell Structure 1 1.3 Cell Membrane 2 1.4 Proteins 2 1.5 Cytoplasm and Organelles 3 1.6 Nucleus 6 1.7 Nucleic Acids (DNA and RNA) 8 1.8 Central Dogma and Recent Revisions 10 1.9 Mutations 14 1.10 Cell Cycle 14 1.11 Additional Information 17 2 Biological Lab Techniques 27 2.1 Overview 27 2.2 Beer Lambert's Law 27 2.3 DNA Lab Techniques 28 2.4 Additional Information 38 3 Human Physiology 47 3.1 Overview 47 3.2 Nervous System 47 3.3 Circulatory System 68 3.4 Endocrine System 74 3.5 Lymphatic System 83 3.6 Immune System 85 4 Cancer 103 4.1 Epidemiology (Statistics) 103 4.2 What Causes Cancer 104 4.3 Oncogenesis (Cancer Development) 106 4.4 The Six Hallmarks of Cancer 109 4.5 Conclusion 118 5 Cardiovascular Diseases (CVDs) 123 5.1 Epidemiology and Introduction 123 5.2 Types of CVD 125 5.3 Diagnosis of CVDs 130 5.4 Treatment of CVDs 135 5.5 Conclusion 138 6 DNA Chips and Sequencing 143 6.1 Introduction to DNA Chips and PCR 143 6.2 Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) 143 6.3 DNA and RNA Chip Technology 147 6.4 DNA Sequencing 155 6.5 Conclusion 156 6.6 Additional Information 156 7 Next-Generation Sequencing and FET-Based Biochips 161 7.1 Introduction to Next-Generation Sequencing 161 7.2 Optical-Based Methods 162 7.3 Electronic-Based Methods 165 7.4 Conclusion 172 8 Protein Assays and Chips 179 8.1 Introduction 179 8.2 ELISA 179 8.3 Protein Arrays 183 8.4 Conclusion 190 8.5 Additional Information 190 9 Label-Free Affinity-Based Biosensors 197 9.1 Introduction 197 9.2 Surface Plasmon Resonance (SPR) Sensor 197 9.3 Nanowire Field-Effect (FET) Sensors 203 9.4 Cantilever Sensors 204 9.5 Electrochemical Sensors 205 9.6 Multiplex Detection of Polymicrobial UTI (Urinary Tract Infection) 207 9.7 Conclusion 211 10 Magneto-Nanosensor Biochips 215 10.1 Magnetism Overview 215 10.2 GMR Magneto-Nanosensor Biochips 216 10.3 Point-of-Care Testing 223 10.4 Non-GMR Magnetic Nanobiosensors 228 10.5 Conclusion 231 11 Microfluidic Chips for Capturing Circulating Tumor Cells 235 11.1 Circulating Tumor Cells 235 11.2 Identifying CTC and WBC by 3-Color Staining 235 11.3 Fluorescence-Activated Cell Sorting (FACS) 236 11.4 Magnetically Activated Cell Sorting (MACS) 237 11.5 Magnetic Separation Devices 238 11.6 CTC Enrichment By Size Filtering 243 11.7 CTC-CHIP (HARVARD UNIVERSITY) 243 11.8 Clinical Utility From CTCs 245 11.9 Conclusion 247 12 Molecular Diagnostics 251 12.1 Molecular Diagnostics (Dx) 251 12.2 Molecular Diagnostics for Cancer 251 12.3 Important Concepts in Diagnostics 254 12.4 Conclusion 261 12.5 Additional Information 261 13 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 271 13.1 Medical Imaging -- Categorization 271 13.2 Overview For Imaging Section 271 13.3 MRI: Past, Present, and Future 273 13.4 Physics of MRI Overview 274 13.5 Physics of MRI 274 13.6 Image Acquisition in MRI 279 13.7 MRI Contrast Agents 282 13.8 Conclusion 287 14 Radionuclide Imaging 295 14.1 Radioactivity 295 14.2 Basics of Positron Emission Tomography (PET) 299 14.3 Single-Photon Emission Computer Tomography (SPECT) 303 14.4 Contrast and Imaging Agents 306 14.5 Conclusion 312 15 Fluorescence and Raman Imaging 317 15.1 Introduction to Optical Imaging 317 15.2 Photon/Tissue Interaction 317 15.3 Fluorescence Imaging 320 15.4 Raman Imaging 328 15.5 Fluorescence Imaging vs. Raman Imaging 331 15.6 Conclusion 332 16 Optical Coherence Tomography 337 16.1 Introduction 337 16.2 Applications of OCT 346 16.3 Contrast Enhancement 351 16.4 Conclusion 359 17 Photoacoustic Imaging 363 17.1 Photoacoustic Effect 363 17.2 The Thermal and Stress Confinements 364 17.3 Photoacoustic Imaging 365 17.4 Contrast Agents 367 17.5 Conclusion 373 18 Imaging Controls and Concepts 377 18.1 Controls 377 18.2 Imaging Concepts 382 18.3 Clinical Translation 386 18.4 Conclusion 390 Problems 390 References 394 Further Reading 394 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisHighlighting dynamic developments in polymer synthesis, this book focuses on the chemical techniques to synthesize and characterize biomedically relevant polymers and macromolecules. Aids researchers developing polymers and materials for biomedical applications Describes biopolymers from a synthetic perspective, which other similar books do not do Covers areas that include: cationically-charged macromolecules, pseudo-peptides, polydrugs and prodrugs, controlled radical polymerization, self-assembly, polycondensates, and polymers for surface modificationTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Part I. Pseudo-Peptides, Polyamino acids and Polyoxazolines 1 Chapter 1 - Characterization of Polypeptides and Polypeptoides­ –Methods and Challenges 3David Huesmann and Matthias Barz Chapter 2- Poly(2-Oxazoline): The structurally Diverse Biocompatibilizing Polymer 31Rodolphe Obeid Chapter 3- Poly(2-oxazoline) Polymers – synthesis, characterization and Applications in Development of Therapeutics 51Randall W. Moreadith and Tacey X. Viegas Chapter 4- Polypeptoid Polymers: Synthesis, Characterization and Properties 77Brandon A. Chan, Sunting Xuan, Ang Li, Jessica M. Simpson and Donghui Zhang Part II - Advanced Polycondensates 121 Chapter 5 - Polyanhydrides: Synthesis and Characterization 123Rohan Ghadi, Eameema Muntimadugu Wahid Khan and Abraham J. Domb Chapter 6 - New Routes to Tailor-Made Polyesters 149Kazuki Fukushima and Tomoko Fujiwara Chapter 7 - Polyphosphoesters: An old biopolymer in a new light 191Kristin N. Bauer, Hisaschi T.C. Tee, Evandro M. Alexandrino and Frederik R. Wurm Part III. Cationically Charged Macromolecules 243 Chapter 8 - Design and Synthesis of Amphiphilic Vinyl Copolymers with Antimicrobial Activity 245Leanna L. Foster, Masato Mizutani, Yukari Oda, Edmund F. Palermo and Kenichi Kuroda Chapter 9 - Enhanced Polyethylenimine-Based Delivery of Nucleic Acids 273Jeff Sparks, Tooba Anwer and Khursheed Anwer Chapter 10 - Cationic graft copolymers for DNA engineering 297Atsushi Maruyama and Naohiko Shimada Part IV. Biorelated polymers by Controlled Radical Polymerization 313 Chapter 11 - Synthesis of (Bio)degradable Polymers by Controlled/“Living” Radical Polymerization 315Shannon R. Woodruff and Nicolay V. Tsarevsky Part V. Polydrugs and Polyprodrugs 355 Chapter 12 - Polymerized drugs – a novel approach to controlled release systems 357B. Demirdirek, J. J. Faig, R. Guliyev and K.E.Uhrich Chapter 13 - Structural design and synthesis of polymer prodrugs 391Petr Chytil, Libor Kostka and Tomáš Etrych Part VI. Biocompatibilization of Surfaces 421 Chapter 14 - Polymeric ultrathin films for surface modifications 423Henning Menzel Chapter 15 - Surface Functionalization of Biomaterials by Poly(2-oxazoline)s 457Giulia Morgese and Edmondo M. Benetti Chapter 16 - Biorelated polymer brushes by surface initiated reversible deactivation radical polymerization 487Rueben Pfukwa, Lebohang Hlalele and Bert Klumperman Part VII. Self-assembled Structures and Formulations 525 Chapter 17 - Synthesis of amphiphilic invertible polymers for biomedical applications 527A.M. Kohut, I.O. Hevus, S.A. Voronov and A.S. Voronov Chapter 18 - Bioadhesive Polymers for Drug Delivery 559Eenko Larrañeta and Ryan F. Donnelly INDEX

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe subject of advanced materials in catalysisbrings together recent advancements in materials synthesis and technologies to the design of novel and smart catalysts used in the field of catalysis.Table of ContentsPreface xvPart I: Nanocatalysts - Architecture and Design 11 Environmental Applications of Multifunctional Nanocomposite Catalytic Materials: Issues with Catalyst Combinations 3James A. Sullivan, Orla Keane, Petrica Dulgheru and Niamh O’Callaghan 1.1 Introduction 31.2 Proposed Solutions to the Lean-Burn NOx emission Problems 91.3 Multifunctional Materials to Combine NH3-SCR and NSR Cycles 171.4 Particulate Matter, Formation, Composition and Dangers 191.5 Use of Multifunctional Materials to Combust C(s) and Trap NOx 221.6 Multifunctional Materials in Selective Catalytic Oxidation 231.7 Proposed Tandem Catalysts for “Green” Selective Epoxidation 281.8 Conclusions 29Acknowledgements 30References 302 Chemical Transformation of Molecular Precursor into Well-Defined Nanostructural Functional Framework via Soft Chemical Approach 37Taimur Athar2.1 Introduction 382.2 The Chemistry of Metal Alkoxides 412.3 The Chemistry of Nanomaterials 472.4 Preparation of Monometallic Alkoxides and Its Conversion into Corresponding Metal Oxides 522.5 Techniques used to Characterization of Precursor and Inorganic Material 542.6 Conclusion 60Acknowledgement 60References 613 Graphenes in Heterogeneous Catalysis 69Josep Albero and Hermenegildo Garcia 3.1 Introduction 693.2 Carbocatalysis 893.3 G Materials as Carbocatalysts 923.4 G as Support of Metal NPs 1043.5 Summary and Future Prospects 115References 1164 Gold Nanoparticles-Graphene Composites Material: Synthesis, Characterization and Catalytic Application 121Najrul Hussain, Gitashree Darabdhara and Manash R. Das 4.1 Introduction 1224.2 Synthesis of Au NPs-rGO Composites and Its Characterization 1244.3 Catalytic Application of Au NPs-rGO Composites 1364.4 Future Prospects 138Acknowledgements 138References 139Part II: Organic and Inorganic Catalytic Transformations 1435 Hydrogen Generation from Chemical Hydrides 145Mehmet Sankir, Levent Semiz, Ramis B. Serin, Nurdan D. Sankir and Derek Baker 5.1 Introduction: Overview of Hydrogen 1465.2 Hydrogen Generation 1485.3 Type of Catalysts and Catalyst Morphologies 1595.4 Kinetics and Models 1775.5 Hydrogen Generation for PEMFCs 1835.6 Conclusions 186Acknowledgements 187References 1876 Ring-Opening Polymerization of Lactide 193Alekha Kumar Sutar, Tungabidya Maharana, Anita Routaray and Nibedita Nath 6.1 Introduction 1946.2 Aluminum Metal 1956.3 Importance of Polylactic Acid 1966.4 Ring-Opening Polymerization (ROP) 1976.5 Application of Different Catalytic System in ROP of Lactide 1976.6 Concluding Remarks 220Acknowledgments 221References 2217 Catalytic Performance of Metal Alkoxides 225Mahdi Mirzaee, Mahmood Norouzi, Adonis Amoli and Azam Ashrafian 7.1 Introduction 2257.2 Metal Alkoxides 2267.3 Polymerization Reactions Catalyzed by Metal Alkoxides 2277.4 Reduction Reactions Catalyzed by Metal Alkoxides 2507.5 Oxidation Reactions Catalyzed by Metal Alkoxides 2567.6 Other Miscellaneous Metal Alkoxide Catalysis Reactions 2597.7 Conclusion 266Acknowledgment 267References 2678 Cycloaddition of CO2 and Epoxides over Reusable Solid Catalysts 271Luis F. Bobadilla, Sergio Lima and Atsushi Urakawa8.1 Introduction: CO2 as Raw Material 2718.2 Properties and Applications of Cyclic Carbonates 2738.3 Synthesis of Cyclic Carbonates from the Cycloaddition Reaction of CO2 with Epoxides 2758.4 Concluding Remarks and Future Perspectives 306References 307Part III: Functional Catalysis: Fundamentals and Applications 3139 Catalytic Metal-/Bio-composites for Fine Chemicals Derived from Biomass Production 315Madalina Tudorache, Simona M. Coman and Vasile I. Parvulescu8.1 Introduction 3168.2 Metal Composites with Catalytic Activity in Biomass Conversion 3178.3 Catalytic Biocomposites with Heterogeneous Design 3288.4 Conclusions 345References 34510 Homoleptic Metal Carbonyls in Organic Transformation 353Badri Nath Jha, Abhinav Raghuvanshi and Pradeep Mathur10.1 Introduction 35310.2 Cycloaddition 35410.3 Carbonylation 35810.4 Silylation 36310.5 Amidation of Adamantane and Diamantane 36610.6 Reduction of N,N-Dimethylthioformamide 36710.7 Reductive N-Alkylation of Primary Amides with Carbonyl Compounds 36810.8 Synthesis of N-Fused Tricyclic Indoles 36910.9 Cyclopropanation of Alkenes 369Conclusion 378References 37811 Zeolites: Smart Materials for Novel, Efficient, and Versatile Catalysis 385Mayank Pratap Singh, Garima Singh Baghel, Salam J. J. Titinchi and Hanna S. Abbo11.1 Introduction 38511.2 Structures and Properties 38811.3 Synthesis of Zeolites 39311.4 Application of Zeolites in Catalysis 39511.5 Medical Applications of Zeolites 40411.6 Conclusions 406References 40612 Optimizing Zeolitic Catalysis for Environmental Remediation 41112.1 Introduction 41312.2 Structure of Zeolites 41712.3 Categorization and Characterization of Zeolites 41912.4 Properties of Zeolites and Their Effects 42112.5 Effects of Chemical Modification 43412.6 Summary 436References 436

Read more less

Book SynopsisSmart materials are used to develop more cost-effective and high-performance water treatment systems as well as instant and continuous ways to monitor water quality. Smart materials in water research have been extensively utilized for the treatment, remediation, and pollution prevention. Smart materials can maintain the long term water quality, availability and viability of water resource. Thus, water via smart materials can be reused, recycled, desalinized and also it can detect the biological and chemical contamination whether the source is from municipal, industrial or man-made waste. The 15 state-of-the-art review chapters contained in this book cover the recent advancements in the area of waste water, as well as the prospects about the future research and development of smart materials for the waste water applications in the municipal, industrial and manmade waste areas. Treatment techniques (nanofiltration, ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, adsorption and nano-reactive membranTable of ContentsPreface xv Part 1 Carbon Nanomaterials 1 1 Easy and Large-Scale Synthesis of Carbon Nanotube-Based Adsorbents for the Removal of Arsenic and Organic Pollutants from Aqueous Solutions 3 Fei Yu and Jie Ma 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Removal of Arsenic from Aqueous Solution 5 1.3 Removal of Organic Pollutants from Aqueous Solution 22 1.4 Summary and Outlook 39 Acknowledgment 40 References 40 2 Potentialities of Graphene-Based Nanomaterials for Wastewater Treatment 47 Ana L. Cukierman, Emiliano Platero, María E. Fernandez, and Pablo R. Bonelli 2.1 Introduction 48 2.2 Graphene Synthesis Routes 49 2.3 Adsorption of Water Pollutants onto Graphene-Based Materials 52 2.4 Comparison of the Adsorption Performance of Graphene-Based Nanomaterials 72 2.5 Regeneration and Reutilization of the Graphene-Based Adsorbents 73 2.6 Conclusion 77 Acknowledgements 78 Nomenclature 78 References 79 3 Photocatalytic Activity of Nanocarbon-TiO2 Composites with Gold Nanoparticles for the Degradation of Water Pollutants 87 L.M. Pastrana-Martínez, S.A.C. Carabineiro, J.L. Figueiredo, J.L. Faria, A.M.T. Silva, and J.G. Buijnsters 3.1 Introduction 88 3.2 Experimental 90 3.3 Results and Discussion 93 3.4 Conclusions 101 Acknowledgements 102 References 102 4 Carbon Nanomaterials for Chromium (VI) Removal from Aqueous Solution 109 Pavel Kopel, Vedran Milosavljevic, Dorota Wawrzak, Amitava Moulick, Marketa Vaculovicova, Rene Kizek, and Vojtech Adam 4.1 Introduction 110 4.2 Carbon Nanomaterials for Heavy Metal Removal 111 4.3 Latest Progress in Nanocarbon Materials for Cr(VI) Treatment 113 4.4 Summary 121 Acknowledgement 121 References 121 5 Nano-Carbons from Pollutant Soot: A Cleaner Approach toward Clean Environment 127 Kumud Malika Tripathi, Nidhi Rani Gupta, and Sumit Kumar Sonkar 5.1 Introduction 127 5.2 Separation of Nano-carbon from Pollutant BC 131 5.3 Functionalization of Nano-Carbons Isolated from Pollutant BC 135 5.4 Nano-Carbons from Pollutant Soot for Wastewater Treatment 141 5.5 Conclusion 145 Acknowledgments 146 References 146 6 First-Principles Computational Design of Graphene for Gas Detection 155 Yoshitaka Fujimoto 6.1 Introduction 155 6.2 Computational Methodology 157 6.3 Nitrogen Doping and Nitrogen Vacancy Complexes in Graphene 158 6.4 Molecular Gas Adsorptions 166 6.5 Summary 174 Acknowledgments 174 References 175 Part 2 Synthetic Nanomaterials 179 7 Advanced Material for Pharmaceutical Removal from Wastewater 181 Parisa Amouzgar, May Yuan Wong, Bahman Amini Horri, and Babak Salamatinia 7.1 Introduction 182 7.2 Advanced Materials in the Removal of Pharmaceuticals from Wastewater 185 7.3 Activated Carbon (AC) 185 7.4 Modified Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 186 7.5 Modified Polysaccharide Matrices 188 7.6 Metal Organic Framework (MOF) 190 7.7 Reactive Composites 191 7.8 TiO2-Coated Adsorbents 192 7.9 Adsorption by Zeolite and Polymer Composites 192 7.10 Adsorption by Clay 193 7.11 Conventional Technologies for the Removal of PPCPs in WWTP 200 7.12 Membrane Filtration 201 7.13 Ozonation and Advanced Oxidation Process (AOP) 201 7.14 Electro-oxidation 202 7.15 Adsorption by Coagulation and Sedimentation 202 7.16 Conclusion 203 References 203 8 Flocculation Performances of Polymers and Nanomaterials for the Treatment of Industrial Wastewaters 213 E. Fosso-Kankeu, F. Waanders, A.F. Mulaba-Bafubiandi, and A.K. Mishra 8.1 General Introduction 214 8.2 Conventional Treatment of Water with Inorganic Coagulants 214 8.3 Development of Polymer-Based Coagulants and Mechanisms of Turbidity Removal 219 8.4 Synthesis of Nanomaterials-Based Flocculants and Utilisation in the Removal of Pollutants 223 8.5 Conclusion 227 References 228 9 Polymeric Nanospheres for Organic Waste Removal 237 Ambika and Pradeep Pratap Singh 9.1 Introduction 237 9.2 Method of Preparation of Nanospheres 239 9.3 Applications of Different Type of Nanospheres in Water Purification 241 9.4 Future Aspects 248 9.5 Conclusions 248 Acknowledgment 249 References 249 10 A Perspective of the Application of Magnetic Nanocomposites and Nanogels as Heavy Metal Sorbents for Water Purification 257 Hilda Elizabeth Reynel-Avila, Didilia Ileana Mendoza-Castillo, and Adrián Bonilla-Petriciolet 10.1 Introduction 258 10.2 Description of Magnetic Nanoparticles and Nanogels 259 10.3 Routes for the Synthesis of Magnetic Nanoparticles and Nanogels 260 10.4 Heavy Metal Removal from Aqueous Solutions Using Magnetic Nanomaterials and Nanogels 266 10.5 Desorption, Regeneration, and Final Disposal 278 10.6 Conclusions and Future Perspective 279 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 11 Role of Core–Shell Nanocomposites in Heavy Metal Removal 289 Sheenam Thatai, Parul Khurana, and Dinesh Kumar 11.1 Introduction 289 11.1.1 Types of Materials 291 11.2 Core and Shell Material: Synthesis and Properties 292 11.3 Nanocomposites Material: Synthesis and Properties 295 11.4 Nanocomposite Materials for Water Decontamination Application 297 11.5 Stability of Metal Nanoparticles and Nanocomposites Material 299 Acknowledgements 302 References 303 Part 3 Biopolymeric Nanomaterials 311 12 Adsorption of Metallic Ions Cd2+, Pb2+, and Cr3+ from Water Samples Using Brazil Nut Shell as a Low-Cost Biosorbent 313 Juliana Casarin, Aff onso Celso Gonçalves Jr, Gustavo Ferreira Coelho, Marcela Zanetti Corazza, Fernanda Midori de Oliveira, César Ricardo Teixeira Tarley, Adilson Pinheiro, Matheus Meier, and Douglas Cardoso Dragunski 12.1 Introduction 314 12.2 Materials and Methods 314 12.3 Results and Discussion 318 12.4 Conclusion 330 Acknowledgments 330 References 331 13 Cellulose: A Smart Material for Water Purification 335 Bharti Arora, Eun Ha Choi, Masaharu Shiratani, and Pankaj Attri 13.1 Introduction 336 13.2 Cellulose: Smart Material for Water Treatment 337 13.3 Conclusion 343 References 343 14 Treatment of Reactive Dyes from Water and Wastewater through Chitosan and its Derivatives 347 Mohammadtaghi Vakili, Mohd Rafatullah, Zahra Gholami and Hossein Farraji 14.1 Introduction 348 14.2 Dyes 349 14.3 Reactive Dyes 350 14.4 Dye Treatment Methods 351 14.5 Adsorption 352 14.6 Adsorbents for Dye Removal 352 14.7 Chitosan 354 14.8 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 368 Acknowledgement 369 References 369 15 Natural Algal-Based Processes as Smart Approach for Wastewater Treatment 379 D. Annie Jasmine, K.B. Malarmathi, S.C.G. Kiruba Daniel, and S. Malathi 15.1 Introduction 380 15.2 Algal Species Used in Wastewater Treatment 382 15.3 Factors Affecting the Growth of Algae 385 15.4 Microalgae and Wastewater Treatment 388 15.5 Case Study of Algal Approach in the Treatment of Municipal Wastewater 390 15.6 Biofuel from Algae Treated Wastewater 391 15.7 Conclusions 394 Acknowledgment 395 References 395 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first textbook to provide in-depth treatment of electroceramics with emphasis on applications in microelectronics, magneto-electronics, spintronics, energy storage and harvesting, sensors and detectors, magnetics, and in electro-optics and acousto-optics Electroceramics is a class of ceramic materials used primarily for their electrical properties. This book covers the important topics relevant to this growing field and places great emphasis on devices and applications. It provides sufficient background in theory and mathematics so that readers can gain insight into phenomena that are unique to electroceramics. Each chapter has its own brief introduction with an explanation of how the said content impacts technology. Multiple examples are provided to reinforce the content as well as numerous end-of-chapter problems for students to solve and learn. The book also includes suggestions for advanced study and key words relevant to each chapter. Fundamentals ofTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the CompanionWebsite xvii 1 Nature and Types of Solid Materials 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Defining Properties of Solids 1 1.2.1 Electrical Conductance (G) 1 1.2.2 Bandgap, Eg 2 1.2.3 Permeability, 𝜀 3 1.3 Fundamental Nature of Electrical Conductivity 4 1.4 Temperature Dependence of Electrical Conductivity 4 1.4.1 Case of Metals 5 1.4.2 Case of Semiconductors 5 1.4.3 Frequency Spectrum of Permittivity (or Dielectric Constant) 6 1.5 Essential Elements of Quantum Mechanics 7 1.5.1 Planck’ Radiation Law 7 1.5.2 Photoelectric Effect 8 1.5.3 Bohr’sTheory of Hydrogen Atom 10 1.5.4 Matter–Wave Duality: de Broglie Hypothesis 11 1.5.5 Schrödinger’sWave Equation 12 1.5.6 Heisneberg’s Uncertainty Principle 13 1.6 Quantum Numbers 13 1.7 Pauli Exclusion Principle 14 1.8 Periodic Table of Elements 15 1.9 Some Important Concepts of Solid-State Physics 18 1.9.1 Ceramic Superconductivity 18 1.9.2 Superconductivity and Technology 19 1.10 Signature Properties of Superconductors 19 1.10.1 Thermal Behavior of Resistivity of a Superconductor 20 1.10.2 Magnetic Nature of Superconductivity: Meissner–Ochsenfeld Effect 20 1.10.3 Josephson Effect 22 1.11 Fermi–Dirac Distribution Function 24 1.12 Band Structure of Solids 27 Glossary 29 Problems 30 References 31 Further Reading 31 2 Processing of Electroceramics 33 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Basic Concepts of Equilibrium Phase Diagram 33 2.2.1 Gibbs’ Phase Rule 34 2.2.2 Triple Point and Interfaces 34 2.2.3 Binary Phase Diagrams 35 2.2.3.1 Totally Miscible Systems 35 2.2.3.2 Systems with Limited Solubility in Solid Phase 37 2.3 Methods of Ceramic Processing 38 2.3.1 Room Temperature Uniaxial Pressing (RTUP) 38 2.3.2 Other Methods for Powder Compaction and Densification 41 2.3.2.1 Hot Isostatic Pressing (HIP) 41 2.3.2.2 Cold Isostatic Pressing (CIP) 41 2.3.2.3 Low Temperature Sintering (LTP) 42 2.3.3 Nanoceramics 42 2.3.4 Thin Film Ceramics 42 2.3.5 Methods for Film Growth 43 2.3.5.1 Solgel Method 43 2.3.5.2 Pulsed Laser Deposition (PLD) Method 44 2.3.5.3 Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE) Method 46 2.3.5.4 RF Magnetron Sputtering Method 47 2.3.5.5 Liquid Phase Epitaxy (LPE) Method 49 2.3.6 Single Crystal Growth Methods for Ceramics 49 2.3.6.1 High Temperature Solution Growth (HTSG) Method or Flux Growth Method 50 2.3.6.2 Czochralski Growth Method 51 2.3.6.3 Top Seeded Solution Growth (TSSG) Method 52 2.3.6.4 Hydrothermal Growth 53 2.3.6.5 Some Other Methods of Crystal Growth 53 Glossary 54 Problems 55 References 55 3 Methods for Materials Characterization 57 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Methods for Surface and Structural Characterization 57 3.2.1 Optical Microscopes 58 3.2.2 X-ray Diffraction Analysis (XRD) 60 3.2.2.1 XRD Diffractometer: Intensity vs. 2𝜃 Plot 60 3.2.2.2 Laue X-ray Diffraction Method 61 3.2.3 Electron Microscopes 63 3.2.3.1 Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) 64 3.2.3.2 Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) 65 3.2.3.3 Scanning Transmission Electron Microscope (STEM) 65 3.2.3.4 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 66 3.2.4 Force Microscopy 68 3.2.4.1 Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) 68 3.2.4.2 Magnetic Force Microscope (MFM) 69 3.2.4.3 Piezoelectric Force Microscope (PFM) 69 Glossary 70 Problems 71 References 71 4 Binding Forces in Solids and Essential Elements of Crystallography 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Binding Forces in Solids 73 4.2.1 Ionic Bonding 74 4.2.2 Covalent Bonding 74 4.2.3 Metallic Bonding 74 4.2.4 Van der Waals Bonding 75 4.2.5 Polar-molecule-induced Dipole Bonds 75 4.2.6 Permanent Dipole Bonding 75 4.3 Structure–Property Relationship 75 4.4 Basic Crystal Structures 77 4.4.1 Bravais Lattice 78 4.4.2 Miller Indices for Planes and Directions 79 4.4.2.1 Rule for Indexing a Crystal Direction 80 4.5 Reciprocal Lattice 81 4.6 Relationship between d* and Miller Indices for Selected Crystal Systems 81 4.7 Typical Examples of Crystal Structures 82 4.7.1 Sodium Chloride, NaCl 82 4.7.2 Perovskite Calcium Titanate 82 4.7.3 Diamond Structure 83 4.7.4 Zinc Blende (Also Wurtzite) 84 4.8 Origin of Voids and Atomic Packing Factor (apf) 84 4.8.1 apf for a Primitive Cubic Structure (P) 85 4.9 Hexagonal and Cubic Close-packed Structures 85 4.10 Predictive Nature of Crystal Structure 86 4.11 Hypothetical Models of Centrosymmetric and Noncentrosymmetric Crystals 87 4.12 Symmetry Elements 88 4.13 Classification of Dielectric Materials: Polar and Nonpolar Groups 89 4.14 Space Groups 90 Glossary 91 Problems 92 References 93 Further Reading 93 5 Dominant Forces and Effects in Electroceramics 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Agent–Property Relationship 95 5.3 Electric Field (E), Mechanical Stress (X), and Temperature (T) Diagram: Heckmann Diagram 96 5.3.1 Piezoelectric Zone 97 5.3.2 Pyroelectric Zone 97 5.3.3 Thermoelastic Zone 98 5.4 Electric Field, Mechanical Stress, and Magnetic Field Diagram 99 5.5 Multiferroics Phenomena and Materials 101 5.6 Magnetoelectric (ME) Effect and Associated Issues 103 5.6.1 Basic Formulations Governing the ME Effect 103 5.6.2 Composite ME Materials 104 5.6.3 ME Integrated Structures 104 5.6.4 Experimental Determination 104 5.7 Applications of Multiferroics 105 5.7.1 Ferroelectric and Ferromagnetic Coupled Memory 105 5.7.2 Multiferroic Tunnel Junctions (MTJ) 106 5.8 Magnetostriction and Electrostriction 106 5.8.1 Magnetostriction 106 5.8.2 Electrostriction 107 5.9 Piezoelectricity 108 5.9.1 Crystallographic Considerations for Piezoelectricity 108 5.9.2 Mathematical Representation of Piezoelectric Effects 109 5.9.3 Constitutive Equations for Piezoelectricity 110 5.10 Experimental Determination of Piezoelectric Coefficients 111 5.10.1 Charge Coefficient, d 111 5.10.2 Stress Coefficient, e 112 5.10.3 Piezoelectric Devices and Applications 113 5.10.3.1 Piezoelectric Transducers 114 5.10.3.2 Generation of Sound and an AC Signal 114 5.10.3.3 Surface AcousticWave (SAW) Device 115 5.10.3.4 Piezoelectric Acoustic Amplifier 116 5.10.3.5 Piezoelectric Frequency Oscillator 116 5.10.4 MEMS Actuator 116 Glossary 118 Problems 119 References 120 6 Coupled Nonlinear Effects in Electroceramics 121 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Historical Perspective 123 6.3 Signature Properties of Ferroelectric Materials 123 6.3.1 Hysteresis Loop: Its Nature and Technical Importance 124 6.3.2 Temperature Dependence of Ferroelectric Parameters 125 6.3.3 Temperature Dependence of Dielectric Constant 125 6.3.4 Ferroelectric Domains 126 6.3.5 Electrets 126 6.3.6 Relaxor Ferroelectrics 126 6.4 Perovskite and Tungsten Bronze Structures 127 6.4.1 Perovskite Structure 127 6.4.2 Tungsten Bronze Structure 130 6.5 Landau–Ginsberg–Devonshire Mean Field Theory of Ferroelectricity 130 6.6 Experimental Determination of Ferroelectric Parameters 134 6.6.1 Poling of Samples for Experiments 134 6.6.2 Polarization vs. Electric Field 135 6.6.3 CapacitanceMeasurement and C–V Plot 136 6.6.4 Ferroelectric Domains (Experimental Determination) 137 6.7 Recent Applications of Ferroelectric Materials 138 6.8 Antiferroelectricity 139 6.9 Pyroelectricity 143 6.9.1 Historical Perspective 143 6.9.2 Pyroelectric Effect 143 6.9.3 Experimental Determination of Pyroelectric Coefficient 145 6.9.4 Applications of Pyroelectricity 146 6.10 Pyro-optic Effect 147 Glossary 148 Problems 150 References 150 Further Reading 151 7 Elements of a Semiconductor 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Nature of Electrical Conduction in Semiconductors 153 7.3 Energy Bands in Semiconductors 155 7.4 Origin of Holes and n- and p-Type Conduction 156 7.5 Important Concepts of Semiconductor Materials 158 7.5.1 Mobility, 𝜇 158 7.5.2 Direct and Indirect Bandgap, Eg 159 7.5.3 Effective Mass, m* 160 7.5.4 Density of States and Fermi Energy 161 7.6 Experimental Determination of Semiconductor Properties 162 7.6.1 Determination of Resistivity, 𝜌 162 7.6.2 Four-Point Probe (van der Pauw) Method 163 7.6.3 Two-Point Probe Method 163 7.6.4 Determination of Bandgap, Eg 164 7.6.5 Determination of N- and P-Type Nature: Seebeck Effect 164 7.6.6 Determination of Direct and Indirect Bandgap, Eg 166 7.6.7 Determination of Mobility, 𝜇 166 7.6.7.1 Haynes–Shockley Method 167 7.6.7.2 Hall Effect 168 Glossary 170 Problems 170 References 171 Further Reading 171 8 Electroceramic Semiconductor Devices 173 8.1 Introduction 173 8.2 Metal–Semiconductor Contacts and the Schottky Diode 174 8.2.1 Metal–Metal Contact 174 8.2.2 Metal Semiconductor Contact 175 8.2.3 Schottky Diode 176 8.2.4 Determination of Contact Potential and DepletionWidth 178 8.2.5 Oxide Semiconductor Materials andTheir Properties 179 8.2.6 In Search of UV-blue LED 181 8.2.7 Determination of I–V Characteristics of a LED 182 8.2.8 Thin-film Transistor (TFT) 183 8.3 Varistor Diodes 184 8.3.1 Metal Oxide Varistors 185 8.4 Theoretical Considerations for Varistors 186 8.4.1 Equivalent Circuit of a Varistor 186 8.4.2 Idealized Model of Varistor Microstructure 186 8.4.3 Energy Band Diagram: Grain–Grain Boundary–Grain (G–GB–G) Structure 188 8.5 Varistor-Embedded Devices 190 8.5.1 Voltage Biased Varistor and Embedded Voltage Biased Transistor (VBT) 190 8.5.1.1 Frequency Dependence of IHC 45 VBT Device 194 8.5.1.2 Comparison between a VBT, BJT, and Schottky Transistor 195 8.5.2 Electric Field Tuned Varistor and Its Embedded Electric Field Effect Transistor (E-FET) 196 8.5.2.1 Frequency Dependence of IHC 45 E-FET Device 198 8.5.3 Magnetically Tuned Varistor and Embedded Magnetic Field Effect Transistor (H-FET) 198 8.6 Magnetic Field Sensor 202 8.7 Thermistors 206 8.7.1 Heating Effects in Thermistors 207 Glossary 210 Problems 212 References 213 Further Reading 214 9 Electroceramics and Green Energy 215 9.1 Introduction 215 9.2 What is Green Energy? 215 9.3 Energy Storage and Its Defining Parameters 217 9.3.1 Capacitor as an Energy Storage Device 218 9.3.2 Battery-Supercapacitor Hybrid (BSH) Devices 220 9.3.3 Piezoelectric Energy Harvester 220 9.3.4 MEMS Power Generator 222 9.3.5 Ferroelectric Photovoltaic Devices 222 9.3.6 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) 224 9.3.7 Antiferroelectric Energy Storage 225 Glossary 227 Problems 227 References 228 10 Electroceramic Magnetics 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Magnetic Parameters 229 10.3 Relationship between Magnetic Flux, Susceptibility, and Permeability 230 10.4 Signature Properties of Ferrites 231 10.4.1 Temperature Dependence of Magnetic Parameters 234 10.5 Typical Structures Associated with Ferrites 234 10.6 Essential Theoretical Concepts 235 10.7 Magnetic Nature of Electron 235 10.7.1 Molecular FieldTheory 236 10.7.2 Antiferromagnetism and Ferrimagnetism 237 10.7.3 Quantum Mechanics and Magnetism 238 10.8 Classical Applications of Ferrites 239 10.9 Novel Magnetic Technologies 239 10.9.1 GMR Effect 240 10.9.2 CMR Effect 241 10.9.3 Spintronics 241 Glossary 242 Problems 243 References 245 Further Reading 245 11 Electro-optics and Acousto-optics 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Nature of Light 247 11.2.1 Fundamental Optical Properties of a Crystal 248 11.2.2 Electro-optic Effects 249 11.2.3 Selected Electro-optic Applications 251 11.2.3.1 OpticalWaveguides 251 11.2.3.2 Phase Shifters 252 11.2.3.3 Electro-optic Modulators 252 11.2.3.4 Night Vision Devices (NVD) 252 11.2.4 Acousto-optic Effect and Applications 253 Glossary 254 Problems 255 References 255 Further Reading 255 AppendixA Periodic Table of the Elements 257 AppendixB Fundamental Physical Constants and Frequently Used Symbols and Units (Rounded to Three Decimal Points) 259 AppendixC List of Prefixes Commonly Used 261 AppendixD Frequently Used Symbols and Units 263 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Reviews in Computational Chemistry series brings together leading authorities in the field to teach the newcomer and update the expert on topics centered on molecular modeling, such as computer-assisted molecular design (CAMD), quantum chemistry, molecular mechanics and dynamics, and quantitative structure-activity relationships (QSAR). This volume, like those prior to it, features chapters by experts in various fields of computational chemistry. Topics in Volume 29 include: Noncovalent Interactions in Density-Functional TheoryLong-Range Inter-Particle Interactions: Insights from Molecular Quantum Electrodynamics (QED) TheoryEfficient Transition-State Modeling using Molecular Mechanics Force Fields for the Everyday ChemistMachine Learning in Materials Science: Recent Progress and Emerging ApplicationsDiscovering New Materials via a priori Crystal Structure PredictionIntroduction to Maximally Localized Wannier FunctionsMethods for a Rapid and Automated Description of Proteins: ProteTable of ContentsContributors x Preface xii Contributors to Previous Volumes xv 1 Noncovalent Interactions in Density Functional Theory 1Gino A. DiLabio and Alberto Otero-de-la-Roza Introduction 1 Overview of Noncovalent Interactions 3 Theory Background 9 Density-Functional Theory 9 Failure of Conventional DFT for Noncovalent Interactions 17 Noncovalent Interactions in DFT 20 Pairwise Dispersion Corrections 20 Potential-Based Methods 42 Minnesota Functionals 47 Nonlocal Functionals 54 Performance of Density Functionals for Noncovalent Interactions 59 Description of Noncovalent Interactions Benchmarks 59 Performance of Dispersion-Corrected Methods 66 Noncovalent Interactions in Perspective 74 Acknowledgments 78 References 79 2 Long-Range Interparticle Interactions: Insights from Molecular Quantum Electrodynamics (QED) Theory 98Akbar Salam Introduction 98 The Interaction Energy at Long Range 101 Molecular QED Theory 104 Electrostatic Interaction in Multipolar QED 112 Energy Transfer 114 Mediation of RET by a Third Body 119 Dispersion Potential between a Pair of Atoms or Molecules 123 Triple–Dipole Dispersion Potential 128 Dispersion Force Induced by External Radiation 132 Macroscopic QED 136 Summary 141 References 143 3 Efficient Transition State Modeling Using Molecular Mechanics Force Fields for the Everyday Chemist 152Joshua Pottel and Nicolas Moitessier Introduction 152 Molecular Mechanics and Transition State Basics 154 Molecular Mechanics 154 Transition States 157 Ground State Force Field Techniques 158 Introduction 158 ReaxFF 159 Reaction Force Field 161 Seam 163 Empirical Valence Bond/Multiconfiguration Molecular Dynamics 166 Asymmetric Catalyst Evaluation 169 TSFF Techniques 173 Introduction 173 Q2MM 175 Conclusion and Prospects 178 References 178 4 Machine Learning in Materials Science: Recent Progress and Emerging Applications 186Tim Mueller, Aaron Gilad Kusne, and Rampi Ramprasad Introduction 186 Supervised Learning 188 A Formal Probabilistic Basis for Supervised Learning 189 Supervised Learning Algorithms 199 Unsupervised Learning 213 Cluster Analysis 215 Dimensionality Reduction 226 Selected Materials Science Applications 237 Phase Diagram Determination 237 Materials Property Predictions Based on Data from Quantum Mechanical Computations 240 Development of Interatomic Potentials 245 Crystal Structure Predictions (CSPs) 249 Developing and Discovering Density Functionals 250 Lattice Models 251 Materials Processing and Complex Materials Behavior 256 Automated Micrograph Analysis 257 Structure–Property Relationships in Amorphous Materials 260 Additional Resources 263 Summary 263 Acknowledgments 264 References 264 5 Discovering New Materials via A Priori Crystal Structure Prediction 274Eva Zurek Introduction and Scope 274 Crystal Lattices and Potential Energy Surfaces 276 Calculating Energies and Optimizing Geometries 281 Methods to Predict Crystal Structures 282 Following Soft Vibrational Modes 283 Random (Sensible) Structure Searches 284 Simulated Annealing 285 Basin Hopping and Minima Hopping 287 Metadynamics 288 Particle Swarm Optimization 289 Genetic Algorithms and Evolutionary Algorithms 291 Hybrid Methods 292 The Nitty-Gritty Aspects of Evolutionary Algorithms 294 Workflow 294 Selection for Procreation 295 Evolutionary Operators 297 Maintaining Diversity 299 The XtalOpt Evolutionary Algorithm 300 Practical Aspects of Carrying out an Evolutionary Structure Search 303 Crystal Structure Prediction at Extreme Pressures 312 Note in Proof 315 Conclusions 316 Acknowledgments 317 References 317 6 Introduction to Maximally Localized Wannier Functions 327Alberto Ambrosetti and Pier Luigi Silvestrelli Introduction 327 Theory 329 Bloch States 329 Wannier Functions 331 Maximally Localized Wannier Functions: Γ-Point Formulation 333 Extension to Brillouin-Zone k]Point Sampling 336 Degree of WF Localization 337 Entangled Bands and Subspace Selection 338 Applications 340 Charge Visualization 340 Charge Polarization 344 Bonding Analysis 348 Amorphous Phases and Defects 351 Electron Transport 354 Efficient Basis Sets 356 Hints About MLWFs Numerical Computation 361 Brief Review of the Presently Available Computational Tools 361 MLWF Generation 362 References 363 7 Methods for a Rapid and Automated Description of Proteins: Protein Structure, Protein Similarity, and Protein Folding 369Zhanyong Guo and Dieter Cremer Introduction 369 Protein Structure Description Methods Based on Frenet Coordinates and/or Coarse Graining 373 The Automated Protein Structure Analysis (APSA) 375 The Curvature–Torsion Description for Idealized Secondary Structures 378 Identification of Helices, Strands, and Coils 384 Difference between Geometry-Based and H]Bond-Based Methods 385 Combination of Geometry-Based and H-Bond]Based Methods 388 Chirality of SSUs 388 What is a Regular SSU? 389 A Closer Look at Helices: Distinction between α- and 310-Helices 391 Typical Helix Distortions 395 Level 2 of Coarse Graining: The Curved Vector Presentation of Helices 398 Identification of Kinked Helices 402 Analysis of Turns 406 Introduction of a Structural Alphabet 409 Derivation of a Protein Structure Code 411 Description of Protein Similarity 416 Qualitative and Quantitative Assessment of Protein Similarity 417 The Secondary Code and Its Application in Connection with Protein Similarity 423 Description of Protein Folding 423 Concluding Remarks 426 Acknowledgments 428 References 428 Index 439

Read more less

Book SynopsisMechanical Wave Vibrations An elegant and accessible exploration of the fundamentals of the analysis and control of vibration in structures from a wave standpoint In Mechanical Wave Vibrations: Analysis and Control, Professor Chunhui Mei delivers an expert discussion of the wave analysis approach (as opposed to the modal-based approach) to mechanical vibrations in structures. The book begins with deriving the equations of motion using the Newtonian approach based on various sign conventions before comprehensively covering the wave vibration analysis approach. It concludes by exploring passive and active feedback control of mechanical vibration waves in structures. The author discusses vibration analysis and control strategies from a wave standpoint and examines the applications of the presented wave vibration techniques to structures of various complexity. Readers will find in the book: A thorough introduction to mechanical wave vibration analysis,Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgement xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Sign Conventions and Equations of Motion Derivations 1 1.1 Derivation of the Bending Equations of Motion by Various Sign Conventions 1 1.1.1 According to Euler–Bernoulli Bending Vibration Theory 2 1.1.2 According to Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theory 7 1.2 Derivation of the Elementary Longitudinal Equation of Motion by Various Sign Conventions 10 1.3 Derivation of the Elementary Torsional Equation of Motion by Various Sign Conventions 12 2 Longitudinal Waves in Beams 15 2.1 The Governing Equation and the Propagation Relationships 15 2.2 Wave Reflection at Classical and Non-Classical Boundaries 16 2.3 Free Vibration Analysis in Finite Beams – Natural Frequencies and Modeshapes 20 2.4 Force Generated Waves and Forced Vibration Analysis of Finite Beams 24 2.5 Numerical Examples and Experimental Studies 27 2.6 MATLAB Scripts 32 3 Bending Waves in Beams 39 3.1 The Governing Equation and the Propagation Relationships 39 3.2 Wave Reflection at Classical and Non-Classical Boundaries 40 3.3 Free Vibration Analysis in Finite Beams – Natural Frequencies and Modeshapes 46 3.4 Force Generated Waves and Forced Vibration Analysis of Finite Beams 50 3.5 Numerical Examples and Experimental Studies 55 3.6 MATLAB Scripts 59 4 Waves in Beams on a Winkler Elastic Foundation 69 4.1 Longitudinal Waves in Beams 69 4.1.1 The Governing Equation and the Propagation Relationships 69 4.1.2 Wave Reflection at Boundaries 70 4.1.3 Free Wave Vibration Analysis 71 4.1.4 Force Generated Waves and Forced Vibration Analysis of Finite Beams 72 4.1.5 Numerical Examples 76 4.2 Bending Waves in Beams 79 4.2.1 The Governing Equation and the Propagation Relationships 79 4.2.2 Wave Reflection at Classical Boundaries 82 4.2.3 Free Wave Vibration Analysis 84 4.2.4 Force Generated Waves and Forced Wave Vibration Analysis 84 4.2.5 Numerical Examples 89 ftoc.indd 7 29-06-2023 20:15:06 5 Coupled Waves in Composite Beams 97 5.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 97 5.2 Wave Reflection at Classical and Non-Classical Boundaries 100 5.3 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Point Attachment 102 5.4 Free Vibration Analysis in Finite Beams – Natural Frequencies and Modeshapes 104 5.5 Force Generated Waves and Forced Vibration Analysis of Finite Beams 105 5.6 Numerical Examples 108 5.7 MATLAB Script 114 6 Coupled Waves in Curved Beams 119 6.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 119 6.2 Wave Reflection at Classical and Non-Classical Boundaries 121 6.3 Free Vibration Analysis in a Finite Curved Beam – Natural Frequencies and Modeshapes 127 6.4 Force Generated Waves and Forced Vibration Analysis of Finite Curved Beams 128 6.5 Numerical Examples 134 6.6 MATLAB Scripts 143 7 Flexural/Bending Vibration of Rectangular Isotropic Thin Plates with Two Opposite Edges Simply-supported 151 7.1 The Governing Equations of Motion 151 7.2 Closed-form Solutions 152 7.3 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis Along the Simply-supported X Direction 154 7.4 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis Along the y Direction 156 7.4.1 Wave Reflection at a Classical Boundary along the y Direction 157 7.4.2 Wave Propagation and Wave Vibration Analysis along the y Direction 159 7.5 Numerical Examples 159 8 In-Plane Vibration of Rectangular Isotropic Thin Plates with Two Opposite Edges Simply-supported 189 8.1 The Governing Equations of Motion 189 8.2 Closed-form Solutions 190 8.3 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis along the Simply-supported X Direction 192 8.3.1 Wave Reflection at a Simply-supported Boundary Along the X Direction 192 8.3.2 Wave Propagation and Wave Vibration Analysis Along the X Direction 195 8.4 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis along the y Direction 197 8.4.1 Wave Reflection at a Classical Boundary along the y Direction 198 8.4.2 Wave Propagation and Wave Vibration Analysis along the y Direction 201 8.5 Special Situation of k 0 = 0: Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis along the y Direction 201 8.5.1 Wave Reflection at a Classical Boundary along the y Direction Corresponding to a Pair of Type I Simple Supports Along the X Direction When K 0 = 0 202 8.5.2 Wave Reflection at a Classical Boundary along the y Direction Corresponding to a Pair of Type II Simple Supports Along the X Direction When K 0 = 0 203 8.5.3 Wave Propagation and Wave Vibration Analysis along the y Direction When k 0 = 0 205 8.6 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis with a Pair of Simply-supported Boundaries along the y Direction When k 0 ≠ 0 207 8.6.1 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis with a Pair of Simply-supported Boundaries along the y Direction When k 0 ≠ 0, k 1 ≠ 0, and k 2 ≠ 0 207 8.6.2 Wave Reflection, Propagation, and Wave Vibration Analysis with a Pair of Simply-supported Boundaries along the y Direction When k 0 = 0, and either k 1 = 0 or k 2 = 0 209 8.7 Numerical Examples 212 8.7.1 Example 1: Two Pairs of the Same Type of Simple Supports Along the X and Y Directions 212 8.7.2 Example 2: One Pair of the Same Type Simple Supports Along the X Direction, Various Combinations of Classical Boundaries on Opposite Edges along the y Direction 217 8.7.3 Example 3: One Pair of Mixed Type Simple Supports Along the X Direction, Various Combinations of Classical Boundaries on Opposite Edges along the y Direction 223 9 Bending Waves in Beams Based on Advanced Vibration Theories 227 9.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 227 9.1.1 Rayleigh Bending Vibration Theory 227 9.1.2 Shear Bending Vibration Theory 228 9.1.3 Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theory 230 9.2 Wave Reflection at Classical and Non-Classical Boundaries 232 9.2.1 Rayleigh Bending Vibration Theory 232 9.2.2 Shear and Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theories 238 9.3 Waves Generated by Externally Applied Point Force and Moment on the Span 244 9.3.1 Rayleigh Bending Vibration Theory 245 9.3.2 Shear and Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theories 246 9.4 Waves Generated by Externally Applied Point Force and Moment at a Free End 247 9.4.1 Rayleigh Bending Vibration Theory 248 9.4.2 Shear and Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theories 249 9.5 Free and Forced Vibration Analysis 250 9.5.1 Free Vibration Analysis 250 9.5.2 Forced Vibration Analysis 250 9.6 Numerical Examples and Experimental Studies 252 9.7 MATLAB Scripts 257 10 Longitudinal Waves in Beams Based on Various Vibration Theories 263 10.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 263 10.1.1 Love Longitudinal Vibration Theory 263 10.1.2 Mindlin–Herrmann Longitudinal Vibration Theory 264 10.1.3 Three-mode Longitudinal Vibration Theory 265 10.2 Wave Reflection at Classical Boundaries 267 10.2.1 Love Longitudinal Vibration Theory 267 10.2.2 Mindlin–Herrmann Longitudinal Vibration Theory 268 10.2.3 Three-mode Longitudinal Vibration Theory 269 10.3 Waves Generated by External Excitations on the Span 271 10.3.1 Love Longitudinal Vibration Theory 271 10.3.2 Mindlin–Herrmann Longitudinal Vibration Theory 272 10.3.3 Three-mode Longitudinal Vibration Theory 273 10.4 Waves Generated by External Excitations at a Free End 275 10.4.1 Love Longitudinal Vibration Theory 275 10.4.2 Mindlin–Herrmann Longitudinal Vibration Theory 276 10.4.3 Three-mode Longitudinal Vibration Theory 276 10.5 Free and Forced Vibration Analysis 277 10.5.1 Free Vibration Analysis 278 10.5.2 Forced Vibration Analysis 278 10.6 Numerical Examples and Experimental Studies 281 11 Bending and Longitudinal Waves in Built-up Planar Frames 287 11.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 287 11.2 Wave Reflection at Classical Boundaries 289 11.3 Force Generated Waves 291 11.4 Free and Forced Vibration Analysis of a Multi-story Multi-bay Planar Frame 292 11.5 Reflection and Transmission of Waves in a Multi-story Multi-bay Planar Frame 304 11.5.1 Wave Reflection and Transmission at an L-shaped Joint 304 11.5.2 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a T-shaped Joint 308 11.5.3 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Cross Joint 315 12 Bending, Longitudinal, and Torsional Waves in Built-up Space Frames 329 12.1 The Governing Equations and the Propagation Relationships 329 12.2 Wave Reflection at Classical Boundaries 333 12.3 Force Generated Waves 336 12.4 Free and Forced Vibration Analysis of a Multi-story Space Frame 338 12.5 Reflection and Transmission of Waves in a Multi-story Space Frame 341 12.5.1 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Y-shaped Spatial Joint 343 12.5.2 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a K-shaped Spatial Joint 353 13 Passive Wave Vibration Control 369 13.1 Change in Cross Section or Material 369 13.1.1 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Step Change by Euler–Bernoulli Bending Vibration Theory 371 13.1.2 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Step Change by Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theory 372 13.2 Point Attachment 373 13.2.1 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Point Attachment by Euler–Bernoulli Bending Vibration Theory 374 13.2.2 Wave Reflection and Transmission at a Point Attachment by Timoshenko Bending Vibration Theory 375 13.3 Beam with a Single Degree of Freedom Attachment 376 13.4 Beam with a Two Degrees of Freedom Attachment 378 13.5 Vibration Analysis of a Beam with Intermediate Discontinuities 380 13.6 Numerical Examples 381 13.7 MATLAB Scripts 390 14 Active Wave Vibration Control 401 14.1 Wave Control of Longitudinal Vibrations 401 14.1.1 Feedback Longitudinal Wave Control on the Span 401 14.1.2 Feedback Longitudinal Wave Control at a Free Boundary 405 14.2 Wave Control of Bending Vibrations 407 14.2.1 Feedback Bending Wave Control on the Span 407 14.2.2 Feedback Bending Wave Control at a Free Boundary 410 14.3 Numerical Examples 413 14.4 MATLAB Scripts 416 Index 421

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book emphasizes the use of four complex plane formalisms (impedance, admittance, complex capacitance, and modulus) in a simultaneous fashion. The purpose of employing these complex planes for handling semicircular relaxation using a single set of measured impedance data (ac small-signal electrical data) is highly underscored. The current literature demonstrates the importance of template version of impedance plot whereas this book reflects the advantage of using concurrent four complex plane plots for the same data. This approach allows extraction of a meaningful equivalent circuit model attributing to possible interpretations via potential polarizations and operative mechanisms for the investigated material system. Thus, this book supersedes the limitations of the impedance plot, and intends to serve a broader community of scientific and technical professionals better for their solid and liquid systems. This book addresses the following highlighted contents for tTable of ContentsBackground of this Book xiii Acknowledgments xxiii 1 Introduction to Immittance Spectroscopy 1 1.1 Basic Definition and Background 1 1.2 Scope and Limitation 5 1.3 Applications of the Immittance Studies to Various Material Systems 6 1.4 Concept of the Linear Circuit Elements: Resistance, Capacitance, and Inductance 9 1.5 Concept of Impedance, Admittance, Complex Capacitance, and Modulus 13 1.6 Immittance Functions 21 1.7 Series Resonant Circuit 22 1.8 Parallel Resonant Circuit 23 1.9 Capacitance and Inductance in Alternating Current 24 Problems 24 References 25 2 Basics of Solid State Devices and Materials 27 2.1 Overview of the Fundamentals of Physical Electronics 27 2.2 Basics of Semiconductors 33 2.3 Single-Crystal and Polycrystal Materials 35 2.4 SCSJ and MPCHPH Systems 37 2.5 Representation of the Competing Phenomena 42 2.6 Effect of Normalization of the Electrical Parameters 43 Problems 46 References 47 3 Dielectric Representation and Operative Mechanisms 49 3.1 Dielectric Constant of Materials: Single Crystals and Polycrystals 49 3.2 Dielectric Behavior of Materials: Single Crystals and Polycrystals 53 3.3 Origin of Frequency Dependence 58 3.4 Effect of Polarization 60 3.5 Equivalent Circuit Representation of the Mechanisms and Processes 67 3.6 Defects and Traps 69 3.7 Point Defects and Stoichiometric Defects 77 3.8 Leaky Systems 78 Problems 79 References 80 4 Ideal Equivalent Circuits and Models 85 4.1 Concept of Equivalent Circuit 85 4.2 Simple and Basic Circuits in Complex Planes: R, C, R-C Series, and R-C Parallel 86 4.3 Debye Circuits: Single Relaxation 89 4.4 Duality of the Equivalent Circuits: Multiple Circuits for a Single Plane 97 4.5 Duality of Equivalent Circuits between Z*- and M*-Planes for Relaxations without Intercept 98 4.6 Duality of Equivalent Circuits between Y*- and C*-Planes for Relaxations without Intercept 100 4.7 Duality of Equivalent Circuits for Simultaneous Z*-, Y*-, C*-, and M*-Planes’ Relaxations 102 4.8 Proposition of Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Grains and Grain Boundaries 103 Problems 105 References 106 5 Debye and Non-Debye Relaxations 109 5.1 Ideal Systems 109 5.2 Non-Ideal Systems 116 5.3 Non-Ideal Systems Implying Distributed Time Constants 122 5.4 D-C Representation, Depression Parameter, and Equivalent Circuit: Conventional Domain 128 5.5 Depression Parameter Based on ωτpeak = 1: Complex Domain 134 5.6 Optimization of ZHF: Complex Domain 137 5.7 Depression Parameter β Based on ωτpeak = 1 139 5.8 Feature of the Depression Parameter β Based on ωτ π 1 145 5.9 Analysis of the Havriliak-Negami Representation 146 5.10 Geometrical Interpretation of H-N Relaxation at the Limiting Case 151 5.11 Extraction of the Relaxation Time τ and the H-N Depression Parameters α and β 154 5.12 Checking Generalized Depression Parameter β when α is Real 159 5.13 Checking Generalized Depression Parameter α when β is Real 160 5.14 Effect of α and β on the H-N Distribution Function 162 5.15 Meaning of the Depression Parameters α and β 166 5.16 Relaxation function with Respect to the Depression Parameters α and β 168 Problems 170 References 170 6 Modeling and Interpretation of the Data 175 6.1 Equivalent Circuit Model for the Single Complex Plane (SCP) Representation 175 6.2 Models and Circuits 177 6.3 Nonconventional Circuits 184 6.4 Multiple Equivalent Circuits for Multiple Relaxations in a Single Complex Plane 186 6.5 Single Equivalent Circuit for Multiple Complex Planes 187 6.6 Equivalent Circuit for Resonance 189 6.7 Single Equivalent Circuit from Z*- and M*-Planes 189 6.8 Temperature and Bias Dependence of the Equivalent Circuit Modeling 190 6.9 Equivalent Circuit: Zinc Oxide (ZnO) Based Varistors 191 6.10 Equivalent Circuit: Lithium Niobate LiNbO3 Single Crystal 196 6.11 Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Yttria (Y2O3) 200 6.12 Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Calcium Zirconate (CaZrO3) 201 6.13 Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Calcium Stannate (CaSnO3) 202 6.14 Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) 203 6.15 Equivalent Circuit: Multi-Layered Thermoelectric Device (Alternate SiO2/SiO2+Ge Thin-Film) 204 6.16 Equivalent Circuit: Polycrystalline Tungsten Oxide (WO3) 206 6.17 Equivalent Circuit: Biological Material – E. Coli Bacteria 207 Problems 208 References 209 7 Data-Handling and Analyzing Criteria 213 7.1 Acquisition of the Immittance Data 213 7.2 Lumped Parameter/Complex Plane Analysis (LP/CPA) 214 7.3 Spectroscopic Analysis (SA) 222 7.4 Bode Plane Analysis (BPA) 225 7.5 Misrepresentation of the Measured Data 227 7.6 Misinterpretation of the Bode Plot: Equivalent Circuit 230 Problems 232 References 233 8 Liquid Systems 241 8.1 Non-Crystalline Systems: Liquids 241 8.2 Warburg and Faradaic Impedances 245 8.3 Constant Phase Element (CPE) 249 8.4 Biological Liquid: E. Coli Bacteria 251 Problems 255 References 256 9 Case Study 259 9.1 Analysis of the Measured Data: Aspects of Data-Handling/Analyzing Criteria 259 9.2 Case 1: Proper Physical Geometrical Factors 260 9.3 Case 2: Improper Normalization 262 9.4 Case 3: Effect of Electrode and Lead Wire 264 9.5 Case 4: Identification of Contributions to the Terminal Immittance 265 9.6 Case 5: Use of Proper Unit 267 9.7 Case 6: Demonstration of the Invalid Plot 270 9.8 Case 7: Obscuring Frequency Dependence 271 9.9 Case 8: Misnomer Nomenclature for the Complex Plane Plot 273 9.10 Case 9: Extraction of Equivalent Circuit from the Straight Line or the Non-Relaxation Curve 274 Problems 277 References 278 10 Analysis of the Complicated Mott-Schottky Behavior 283 10.1 Capacitance – Voltage (C-V) Measurement 283 10.2 The Mott-Schottky Plot 287 10.3 Arbitrary Measurement Frequency and Construction of the Deceiving Mott-Schottky Plot 296 10.4 Frequency-Independent Representation 297 10.5 Extraction of the Device-Related Parameters 299 Problems 302 References 303 11 Analysis of the Measured Data 307 11.1 Introduction and Background of the Immittance Data Analysis 307 11.2 Measurement of the Immittance Data and Complex Plane Analysis 312 11.3 Nonlinear Least Squares Estimation 314 11.3.1 Gauss-Newton Method (Algorithm) of Least Squares Estimation 317 11.3.2 Levenberg-Marquardt Method (Algorithm) of Least Squares Estimation 320 11.3.3 Numerical Procedure to Calculate Jacobian Matrix 321 11.3.4 Error Analysis: Analysis of Errors in Regression 321 11.3.5 Selection of the Weights 322 11.4 Complex Nonlinear Least Squares (CNLS) Fitting of the Data 323 11.4.1 Procedure 1: Geometrical Fitting in the Complex Plane 323 11.4.2 Procedure 2: Simultaneous Fitting of Real and Imaginary Parts 328 11.5 Graphical User Interface Implementation of the Nonlinear Least Square Procedures: Implementation of CNLS using MATLAB 330 11.5.1 Input Data Generation 330 11.5.2 Input Data Processing 331 11.5.2.1 Visualization of the Measured (Raw) Data 332 11.5.2.2 Selection of Data Points for Fitting 333 11.5.2.3 Fitting of the Semicircle: Geometric Fitting 334 11.5.2.4 Calculation of the Parameters from the Semicircle Fitting 335 11.5.2.5 Calculation of the Parameters from the Simultaneous Fitting of Real and Imaginary Parts 336 11.5.3 Output Generation: Output File 337 11.5.3.1 Parameters from the Semicircle Fitting 337 11.5.3.2 Nonlinear Regression: Semicircle Fitting Output 337 11.5.3.3 Linear Regression: Line Fitting Output 338 11.5.3.4 Parameters from Simultaneous Fitting of Real and Imaginary Data 338 11.5.3.5 Nonlinear Regression: Simultaneous Fitting of Real and Imaginary Data Output 338 11.5.3.6 Measured Data used in Analysis 339 11.6 Effect of Fitting Procedure, Measurement Noise, and Solution Algorithm on the Estimated Parameters 340 11.7 Case Studies: CNLS Fitting of the Measured Data in the Complex Planes 342 11.7.1 M*-Plane Fitting: R-C Parallel Circuit 343 11.7.2 C*- and M*-Plane Representations of the Lithium Niobate (LN) Crystal 344 11.7.3 Z*- and Y*-Plane Representations of Multi-Layered Junction Device 349 11.7.4 Y*-plane Representation of the E. Coli Bacteria in Brain Heart Infusion Medium 351 11.8 Summary 353 Problems 355 References 357 12 Items for Appendix 363 12.1 Appendix – A: Sample Input Data for the R-C Parallel Circuit 363 12.2 Appendix – B: R-C Parallel Circuit Data Analysis Output in Z*-Plane 364 12.3 Appendix – C: R-C Parallel Circuit Data Analysis Output in M*-Plane 368 12.4 Appendix – D: Lithium Niobate Crystal Data Analysis Output in C*-Plane 370 12.5 Appendix – E: Multilayer Junction Thermoelectric Device Data Analysis Output in Y*-Plane 372 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e. , glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix International Standards for Properties and Performance of Advanced Ceramics 1 Michael G. Jenkins, Jonathan A. Salem, John Helfinstine, George D. Quinn, and Stephen T. Gonczy Tensile Creep and Rupture Behavior of Different Fiber Content and Type Single Tow SiC/SiC Minicomposites 11 Amjad Almansour, Emmanuel Maillet, and Gregory N. Morscher Optical Deformation Analysis of Alumina Based Wound Highly Porous CMCs 21 S. Hackemann and J. Wischek Electrical Resistance and Acoustic Emission during Fatigue Testing of SiC/SiC Composites 33 Zipeng Han and Gregory N. Morscher Ti-Based Ceramic Composite Processing using Hybrid Centrifugal Thermite Assisted Technique 41 Reza Mahmoodian, M.A. Hassan, and Mohd Hamdi Bin Abd Shukor Ceramic Matrix Composites: Residual Tensile Testing after Intermediate Temperature Oxidation 49 G. Ojard, I. Smyth, U. Santhosh, Y. Gowayed, and D. C. Jarmon Ceramic Matrix Composites: Effect of Defects on Fatigue and Nondestructive Evaluation 59 I. Smyth, G. Ojard, N. Magdefrau, U. Santhosh, J. Ahmad, and Y. Gowayed Effect of Particle Loading on Properties, Damping, and Wear of Al/SiC MMCs 65 S. Salamone, B. Givens, K. Kremer, and M. Aghajanian Novel Application of Fractal Analysis in Refractory Composite Microsturctural Characterization 73 Anja Terzi , Vojislav Miti , Ljubiša Koci , Zagorka Radojevi , and Snežana Pašali Hardmetals based on Niobium Carbide (NbC) versus Casted NbC Bearing MMCs 87 Mathias Woydt and Hardy Mohrbacher Weight Loss Mechanism of (La0.8Sr0.2)0.98MnO3±δ during Thermal Cycles 93 Shadi Darvish, Ali Karbasi, Surendra K. Saxena, and Yu Zhong Engineering Application of Menger Sponge 101 R. Kitazawa Author Index 109

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS Effects of TiO2 Addition on Microstructure and Ionic Conductivity of Gadolinia-Doped Ceria Solid Electrolyte 3M. C. F. Dias and E. N. S. Muccillo Effect of Specific Surface Area and Particle Size Distribution on the Densification of Gadolinium Doped Ceria 13K. Paciejewska, A. Weber, S. Kühn, and M. Kleber Study on Sintering and Stability Issues of BaZr0.1Ce0.7Y0.1Yb0.1O3-Electrolyte for SOFCs 21Armin Vahid Mohammadi and Zhe Cheng Sintering, Mechanical, Electrical and Oxidation Properties of Ceramic Intermetallic TiC-Ti3Al Composites from Nano-TiC Particles 31Zhezhen Fu, Kanchan Mondal, and Rasit Koc Characteristics of Protective LSM Coatings on Cr-Contained Steels used as Metallic Interconnectors of Intermediated Temperature Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 45Chun-Liang Chang, Chang-sing Hwang, Chun-Huang Tsai, Sheng-Fu Yang, Wei-Ja Shong, Zong-Yang Jhuang-Shie, and Te-Jung Daron Huang Electrical and Microstructural Evolutions of La0.67Sr0.33MnO3 Coated Ferritic Stainless Steels after Long-Term Aging at 800°C 57Chien-Kuo Liu, Peng Yang, Wei-Ja Shong, Ruey-Yi Lee, and Jin-Yu Wu Structural and Electrochemical Performance Stability of Perovskite–Fluorite Composite for High Temperature Electrochemical Devices 67Sapna Gupta and Prabhakar Singh Durability of Lanthanum Strontium Cobalt Ferrite ((La0.60Sr0.40)0.95(Co0.20Fe0.80)O3-x) Cathodes in CO2 and H2O Containing Air 75Boxun Hu, Manoj K. Mahapatra, Vinit Sharma, Rampi Ramprasad, Nguyen Minh, Scott Misture, and Prabhakar Singh Fabrication of the Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell with Composite Cathodes and the Performance Evaluation upon Long-Term Operation 83Tai-Nan Lin, Yang-Chuang Chang, Maw-Chwain Lee, and Ruey-yi Lee Development of Microtubular Solid Oxide Fuel Cells using Hydrocarbon Fuels 93Hirofumi Sumi, Hiroyuki Shimada, Toshiaki Yamaguchi, Koichi Hamamoto, Toshio Suzuki, and Yoshinobu Fujishiro Highly Efficient Solid Oxide Electrolyzer and Sabatier System 105Viswanathan Venkateswaran, Tim Curry, Christie Iacomini, and John Olenick SINGLE CRYSTALLINE MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL AND OPTICAL APPLICATIONS The Effects of Excess Silicon and Carbon in SiC Source Materials on SiC Single Crystal Growth in Physical Vapor Transport Method 117Tatsuo Fujimoto, Masashi Nakabayashi, Hiroshi Tsuge, Masakazu Katsuno, Shinya Sato, Shoji Uhsio, Komomo Tani, Hirokastu Yashiro, Hosei Hirano, and Takayuki Yano Recent Progress of GaN Substrates Manufactured by VAS Method 129Takehiro Yoshida, Takayuki Suzuki, Toshio Kitamura, Yukio Abe, Hajime Fujikura, Masatomo Shibata, and Toshiya Saito Coilable Single Crystal Fibers of Doped-YAG for High Power Applications 139B. Ponting, E. Gebremichael, R. Magana, and G. Maxwell Hydrothermal Crystal Growth and Applications 151M. Prakasam, O. Viraphong, O. Cambon, and A. Largeteau Reactive Atmospheres for Oxide Crystal Growth 157Detlef Klimm, Steffen Ganschow, Zbigniew Galazka, Rainer Bertram, Detlev Schulz, and Reinhard Uecker Discussion on Polycrystals over Single Crystals for Optical Devices 169Mythili Prakasam and Alain Largeteau Terahertz Time-Domain Spectroscopy Application to Non-Destructive Quality Evaluation of Industrial Crystalline Materials 177S. Nishizawa, T. Nagashima, M. W. Takeda, and K. Shimamura Author Index 187

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix TNO’s Research on Ceramic Based Armor 1Erik Carton, Geert Roebroeks, Jaap Weerheijm, André Diederen, and Manfred Kwint Investigation of the Kinetic Energy Characterization of Advanced Ceramics 19Tyrone L. Jones Predicting the Light Transmittance of Multilayer Transparent Armor 29Brandon S. Aldinger Operator Training and Performance Measurement for Nondestructive Testing of Ceramic Armor 41K. F. Schmidt, J. R. Little, W. H. Green, L. P. Franks, and W. A. Ellingson From Micron-Sized Particles to Nanoparticles and Nanobelts: Structural Non-Uniformity in the Synthesis of Boron Carbide by Carbothermal Reduction Reaction 51Paniz Foroughi and Zhe Cheng Nanocrystalline Boron Carbide Powder Synthesized Via Carbothermal Reduction Reaction 63Said M. El-Sheikh, Yasser M. Z. Ahmed, Emad M. M. Ewais, Asmaa Abd-El-Baset Abd Allah, and Said Anwar Synthesis and Crystallization Behavior of Amorphous Boron Nitride 75Metin Örnek, Chawon Hwang, Vladislav Domnich, Steven L. Miller, Willam E. Mayo, and Richard A. Haber c-BN Seeding Effect on the Phase Transition of a-BN(OC) Compound 83Chawon Hwang, Metin rnek, Vladislav Domnich, William E. Mayo, Steve L. Miller, and Richard A. Haber Screening of Silicon Precursors for Incorporation into Boron Carbide 93Anthony Etzold, Richard Haber, and William Rafaniello Processing of Boron Rich Boron Carbide 99Tyler Munhollon, Rich Haber, and William Rafaniello Reaction Bonded SiC/Diamond Composites: Properties and Impact Behavior in High Strain Rate Applications 111S. Salamone, M. Aghajanian, S.E Horner, and J.Q. Zheng Influence of Powder Oxygen Content on Silicon Carbide Microstructure and Properties 119V. DeLucca and R. A. Haber Preparation, Characterization and Development of TiB2 Hard Ceramic Materials 131Azmi Mert Celik, Richard A. Haber, Kanak Kuwelkar, and William Rafaniello Improving Fracture Toughness of Alumina with Multi-Walled Carbon Nanotube and Alumina Fiber Reinforcements 137J. Lo, R. Zhang, B. Shalchi-Amirkhiz, D.Walsh, M. Bolduc, S. Lin, B. Simard, K. Bosnick, M. O’Toole, A. Merati, and M. Bielawski Author Index 147

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix BIOCERAMICS Potential of Bioactive Glass Scaffolds as Implants for Structural Bone Repair 3Mohamed N. Rahaman, B. Sonny Bal, and Lynda F. Bonewald In Vitro Degradation and Conversion of Melt-Derived Bioactive Glass Microfibers in Simulated Body Fluid 17Mohamed N. Rahaman, Xin Liu, and Delbert E. Day On the Formation of Apatites in the Chemically Bonded CaO-Al2O3-SiO2-H2O Bioceramic System 29Leif Hermansson, Gunilla Gomez-Ortega, Emil Abrahamsson, and Jesper Lööf Fabrication and Characterization of Nano Bioglass-Ceramic Scaffold for Bone Tissue Engineering 37Sampath Kumar Arepalli, Himanshu Tripathi, M. Vyshali Nanda, V.Sri Sravya, Ram Pyare, and S. P. Singh Synthesis and Characterization of Co-Cu Ferrite and Bioglass Composites for Hyperthermia Treatment of Cancer 51V. Chalisgaonkar, K. Pandey, A. S. Kumar, H. Tripathi, S. P. Singh, and R. Pyare Alpha–Beta Phase Transformation in Tricalcium Phosphate (TCP) Ceramics: Effect of Mg2+ Doping 63Matteo Frasnelli and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Experimental Approach to Study the Thermal Induced State of Stress in a Medical Ceramic Bilayer 71V. Mercurio Effect of Grain Boundary Segregation on the Hydrothermal Degradation of Dental 3Y-TZP Ceramics 81F. Zhang, M. Inokoshi, K. Vanmeensel, B. Van Meerbeek, I. Naert, and J. Vleugels POROUS CERAMICS Treatment of Produced Water using Silicon Carbide Membrane Filters 91Abhaya K. Bakshi, Rajendra Ghimire, Eric Sheridan, and Melanie Kuhn Microcapsules from Pickering Emulsions Stabilized by Clay Particles 107Gisèle L. Lecomte-Nana, Volga Niknam, Anne Aimable, Marguerite Bienia, David Kpogbemabou, Jean-Charles Robert-Arnouil, and Asma Lajmi Author Index 125

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe practical, clear, and concise guide for conducting experimental modal tests Modal Testing: A Practitioner''s Guide outlines the basic information necessary to conduct an experimental modal test. The text draws on the author's extensive experience to cover the practical side of the concerns that may arise when performing an experimental modal test. Taking a hands-on approach, the book explores the issues related to conducting a test from start to finish. It covers the cornerstones of the basic information needed and summarizes all the pertinent theory related to experimental modal testing. Designed to be accessible, Modal Testing presents the most common excitation techniques used for modal testing today and is filled with illustrative examples related to impact testing which is the most widely used excitation technique for traditional experimental modal tests. This practical text is not about developing the details of the theory but rathTable of ContentsPreface xv About the CompanionWebsite xix Part I Overview of Experimental Modal Analysis using the Frequency Response Method 1 1 Introduction to ExperimentalModal Analysis: A Simple Non-mathematical Presentation 3 1.1 Could you Explain Modal Analysis to Me? 6 1.2 Just what are these Measurements called FRFs? 10 1.2.1 Why is Only One Row or Column of the FRF Matrix Needed? 13 1.3 What’s the Difference between a Shaker Test and an Impact Test? 17 1.3.1 What Measurements do we Actually make to Compute the FRF? 18 1.4 What’s the Most ImportantThing toThink about when Impact Testing? 21 1.5 What’s the Most ImportantThing toThink about when Shaker Testing? 22 1.6 Tell me More AboutWindows; They Seem Pretty Important! 24 1.7 So how do we get Mode Shapes from the Plate FRFs? 25 1.8 Modal Data and Operating Data 29 1.8.1 What is Operating Data? 29 1.8.2 So what Good is Modal Data? 33 1.8.3 So Should I Collect Modal Data or Operating Data? 34 1.9 Closing Remarks 36 2 General Theory of Experimental Modal Analysis 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Basic Modal AnalysisTheory – SDOF 38 2.2.1 Single Degree of Freedom System Equation 38 2.2.2 Single Degree of Freedom System Response due to Harmonic Excitation 40 2.2.3 Damping Estimation for Single Degree of Freedom System 42 2.2.4 Response Assessment with Varying Damping 43 2.2.5 Laplace Domain Approach for Single Degree of Freedom System 46 2.2.6 System Transfer Function 47 2.2.7 Different Forms of the Transfer Function 48 2.2.8 Residue of the SDOF System 49 2.2.9 Frequency Response Function for a Single Degree of Freedom System 49 2.2.10 Transfer Function/Frequency Response Function/S-plane for a Single Degree of Freedom System 51 2.2.11 Frequency Response Function Regions for a Single Degree of Freedom System 51 2.2.12 Different Forms of the Frequency Response Function 53 2.2.13 Complex Frequency Response Function 53 2.3 Basic Modal AnalysisTheory – MDOF 56 2.3.1 Multiple Degree of Freedom System Equations 57 2.3.2 Laplace Domain for Multiple Degree of Freedom System 66 2.3.3 The Frequency Response Function 68 2.3.4 Mode Shapes from Frequency Response Equations 68 2.3.5 Point-to-Point Frequency Response Function 71 2.3.6 Response of Multiple Degree of Freedom System to Harmonic Excitations 72 2.3.7 Example: Cantilever Beam Model with Three Measured DOFs 75 2.3.8 Summary of Time, Frequency, and Modal Domains 83 2.3.9 Response due to Forced Excitation using Mode Superposition 87 2.4 Summary 89 3 General Signal Processing andMeasurements Related to Experimental Modal Analysis 93 3.1 Introduction 93 3.2 Time and Frequency Domain 93 3.3 Some General Information Regarding Data Acquisition 96 3.4 Digitization of Time Signals 97 3.5 Quantization 97 3.5.1 ADC Underload 98 3.5.2 ADC Overload 100 3.6 AC Coupling 100 3.7 SamplingTheory 101 3.8 Aliasing 103 3.9 What is the Fourier Transform? 105 3.9.1 Fourier Transform and Discrete Fourier Transform 107 3.9.2 FFT: Periodic Signal 108 3.9.3 FFT: Non-periodic Signal 108 3.10 Leakage and Minimization of Leakage 109 3.10.1 Minimization of Leakage 111 3.11 Windows and Leakage 111 3.11.1 RectangularWindow 112 3.11.2 HanningWindow 116 3.11.3 Flat TopWindow 116 3.11.4 Comparison ofWindows withWorst Leakage Distortion Possible 116 3.11.5 Comparison of Rectangular, Hanning and Flat TopWindow 119 3.11.6 ForceWindow 119 3.11.7 ExponentialWindow 119 3.11.8 Convolution of theWindow in the Frequency Domain 119 3.12 Frequency Response Function Formulation 119 3.13 TypicalMeasurements 123 3.13.1 Time Signal and Auto-power Functions 123 3.13.2 TypicalMeasurement: Cross Power Function 124 3.13.3 TypicalMeasurement: Frequency Response Function 124 3.13.4 TypicalMeasurement: Coherence Function 124 3.14 Time and Frequency Relationship Definition 126 3.15 Input–Output Model with Noise 127 3.15.1 H1 Formulation: Output Noise Only 127 3.15.2 H2 Formulation: Output Noise Only 128 3.15.3 H1 Formulation: Input Noise Only 128 3.15.4 H2 Formulation: Input Noise Only 128 3.16 Summary 129 4 Excitation Techniques 131 4.1 Introduction 131 4.2 Impact Excitation Technique 132 4.2.1 Impact Hammer 132 4.2.2 Hammer Impact Tip Selection 136 4.2.3 Useful Frequency Range for Impact Excitation 137 4.2.4 ForceWindow for Impact Excitation 137 4.2.5 Pre-trigger Delay 137 4.2.6 Double Impact 140 4.2.7 Response due to Impact 140 4.2.8 Roving Hammer vs Stationary Hammer and Reciprocity 143 4.2.9 Impact Testing: an Example Set of Measurements 147 4.3 Shaker Excitation 159 4.3.1 Modal Shaker Setup 161 4.3.2 Historical Development of Shaker Excitation Techniques 162 4.3.3 Swept Sine Excitation 163 4.3.4 Pure Random Excitation 163 4.3.5 Pure Random Excitation withWindows Applied 165 4.3.6 Pure Random Excitation with Overlap Processing 165 4.3.7 Pseudo-random Excitation 167 4.3.8 Periodic Random Excitation 167 4.3.9 Burst Random Excitation 168 4.3.10 Sine Chirp Excitation 170 4.3.11 Digital Stepped Sine Excitation 170 4.4 Comparison of Different Excitations for aWeldment Structure 172 4.4.1 Random Excitation with NoWindow 172 4.4.2 Random Excitation with HanningWindow 173 4.4.3 Burst Random Excitation with NoWindow 173 4.4.4 Sine Chirp Excitation with NoWindow 174 4.4.5 Comparison of Random, Burst Random and Sine Chirp 175 4.4.6 Comparison of Random and Burst Random at Resonant Peaks 175 4.4.7 Linearity Check Using Sine Chirp 175 4.5 Multiple-input,Multiple-outputMeasurement 175 4.5.1 Multiple Input vs Single Input Testing 177 4.5.2 Multiple Input vs Single Input for aWeldment Structure 181 4.5.3 Multiple Input vs Single Input Testing 181 4.5.4 Comparison of Multiple Input and Single Input forWeldment Structure 182 4.5.5 MIMO Measurements on a Multi-component Structure 182 4.6 Summary 187 5 Modal Parameter Estimation Techniques 189 5.1 Introduction 189 5.2 ExperimentalModal Analysis 190 5.2.1 Least Squares Approximation of Data 190 5.2.2 Classification of Modal Parameter Estimation Techniques 193 5.3 Extraction of Modal Parameters 198 5.3.1 Peak Picking Technique 198 5.3.2 Circle Fitting – Kennedy and Pancu 199 5.3.3 SDOF Polynomial 200 5.3.4 Residual Effects of Out of Band Modes 200 5.3.5 MDOF Polynomial 201 5.3.6 Least Squares Complex Exponential 201 5.3.7 Advanced Forms of Time and Frequency Domain Estimators 203 5.3.8 General Time Domain Techniques 203 5.3.9 General Frequency Domain Techniques 203 5.3.10 General Consideration for Time vs Frequency Representation 204 5.3.11 Additional Remarks on Modal Parameter Estimation 204 5.3.12 Two Step Process for Modal Parameter Estimation 205 5.4 Mode Identification Tools 206 5.4.1 Summation Function 206 5.4.2 Mode Indicator Function 206 5.4.3 Complex Mode Indicator Function 207 5.4.4 Stability Diagram 208 5.4.5 PolyMAX 210 5.5 Modal Model Validation Tools 212 5.5.1 Synthesis of Frequency Response Functions using Extracted Parameters 212 5.5.2 Modal Assurance Criterion 213 5.5.3 Mode Participation Factors 215 5.5.4 Mode Overcomplexity 215 5.5.5 Mean Phase Co-linearity and Mean Phase Deviation 216 5.6 Operating Modal Analysis 216 5.7 Summary 219 Part II Practical Considerations for ExperimentalModal Testing 221 6 Test Setup Considerations 223 6.1 Test Plan? 224 6.2 How Many Modes Required? 225 6.3 Frequency Range of Interest? 228 6.4 Transducer Possibilities? 232 6.5 Test Configurations? 232 6.6 How Many Measurement Points Needed? 235 6.7 Excitation Techniques 238 6.8 Miscellaneous Items to Consider 238 6.9 Summary 245 7 Impact Testing Considerations 247 7.1 Hammer Impact Location 247 7.2 Hammer Tip and Frequency Range 248 7.3 Hammers for Different Size Structures 249 7.4 How Does Impact Skew and Deviation of Input Point Affect theMeasurement? 256 7.4.1 Skewed Impact Force 256 7.4.2 Inconsistent Impact Force Location 256 7.5 Impact Hammer Frequency Bandwidth 256 7.6 Accelerometer ICP Considerations for Low Frequency Measurements 264 7.7 Considerations for Reciprocity Measurements 264 7.8 Roving Hammer vs Roving Accelerometer 267 7.9 Picking a Good Reference Location 268 7.10 Multiple Impact Difficulties and Considerations 268 7.10.1 Academic Structure 269 7.10.2 LargeWind Turbine Blade 271 7.11 What is “Filter Ring” during an Impact Measurement? 274 7.12 Test Bandwidth MuchWider than Desired Frequency Range 275 7.13 Why Does the Structure Response Need to Come to Zero at the End of the Sample Time? 279 7.14 Measurements with no Overload but Transducers are Saturated 282 7.14.1 Case 1: Sensitive Accelerometer with ExponentialWindow 282 7.14.2 Case 2: Sensitive Accelerometer with NoWindow 283 7.14.3 Case 3: Less Sensitive Accelerometer with NoWindow 283 7.15 How much Roll Off in the Input Hammer Force Spectrum is Acceptable? 286 7.16 Can the Hammer be Switched in the Middle of a Test to Avoid Double Impacts? 289 7.17 Closing Remarks 292 8 Shaker Testing Considerations 293 8.1 General Hardware Related Issues 293 8.1.1 General Information about Shakers and Amplifiers 293 8.1.2 What is the Difference between the Constant Current and Constant Voltage Settings on the Shaker Amplifier? 294 8.1.3 Some Shakers have a Trunnion: Is it Really Needed andWhy Do You Have It? 294 8.1.4 Where is the Best Location to Place a Shaker for a Modal Test? 295 8.1.5 How Should the Shaker be Constrained when Testing? 296 8.1.6 What’s the BestWay to Support a Shaker for Lateral Vibration When it is Hung? 296 8.1.7 What are the Most Common Practical Failures with Shaker Setup? 297 8.1.8 What is the Correct Level of Shaker Excitation for Modal Testing? 297 8.1.9 How many Shakers should I use in my Modal Test? 297 8.1.10 Shaker and Stinger Alignment Issues 297 8.1.11 When should the Shaker be Attached to the Structure? 298 8.1.12 Should I Disconnect the Stingers while not Testing? 298 8.1.13 Force Gage or Impedance Head must be Mounted on Structure Side of Stinger? 300 8.1.14 What’s an Impedance Head? Why use it?Where does it go? 301 8.2 Stinger Related Issues 302 8.2.1 Why should Stingers be used? 302 8.2.2 Can a Poorly Designed Shaker/Stinger Setup Produce Incorrect Results? 303 8.2.3 Stingers and their Effect on Measured Frequency Response Functions 306 8.2.3.1 Stinger Location 307 8.2.3.2 Stinger Alignment 307 8.2.3.3 Stinger Length 308 8.2.3.4 Stinger Type 310 8.2.3.5 Sleeved Stingers 310 8.2.3.6 How do PianoWire StingersWork? How are they Pretensioned?? 314 8.3 Shaker Related Issues 314 8.3.1 Is MIMO needed for Structures with DirectionalModes? 314 8.3.2 Shaker Force Levels and SISO vs MIMO Considerations 316 8.3.2.1 High Shaker Force Levels 316 8.3.2.2 High Shaker Force Levels 318 8.3.2.3 Effects of FRF Measurements in the Modal Parameter Estimation Process 320 8.4 Concluding Remarks 325 9 Insight intoModal Parameter Estimation 327 9.1 Introductory Remarks 327 9.2 Mode Indicator Tools Help Identify Modes 328 9.3 SDOF vsMDOF for a Simple System 330 9.4 Local vs Global: MACL Frame 332 9.5 Repeated Root: Composite Spar 334 9.6 Wind Turbine Blade: Same Geometry but Very Different Modes 335 9.7 Stability Diagram Demystified 337 9.8 Curvefitting Demystified 340 9.9 Curvefitting Different Bands for the Poles and Residues 343 9.10 Synthesizing the FRF from Parameters from Several Bands Stitched Together 344 9.11 A Large Multiple Reference Modal Test Parameter Estimation 346 9.11.1 Case 1: Use of All Measured FRFs 346 9.11.2 Case 2: Use of Selected Sets of Measured FRFs 350 9.11.3 Case 3: Use of PolyMAX 352 9.12 Operating Modal Analysis 357 9.13 Concluding Remarks 363 10 General Considerations 365 10.1 An ExperimentalModal Test: a Thought Process Divulged 369 10.2 FFT Analyzer Setup 377 10.2.1 General FFT Analyzer Setup 377 10.2.2 Setup for Impact Testing 378 10.2.3 Setup for Shaker Testing 379 10.3 Log Sheets 379 10.4 Practical Considerations: Checklists 379 10.4.1 Checklist for Analyzer Setup 380 10.4.2 Checklist for Impact Testing 382 10.4.3 Checklist for Shaker Testing 384 10.4.4 Checklist for Measurement Adequacy 386 10.4.5 Checklist for Miscellaneous 388 10.5 Summary 391 Appendix: Logbook Forms 392 11 Tips, Tricks, and Other Stuff 395 11.1 Modal Testing Primer 396 11.1.1 Impact Setup 396 11.1.2 Shaker Setup 397 11.1.3 Drive Point Measurements 398 11.1.4 Reciprocity 398 11.1.5 Inappropriate Reference Location 399 11.1.6 Multiple-input,Multiple-output Testing 399 11.1.7 Multiple Reference Testing 400 11.2 Impact Hammer and Impulsive Excitation 400 11.2.1 The Right Hammer for the Test 400 11.2.2 Hammer – Get the Swing of it 401 11.2.3 Hammer Tripod 401 11.2.4 Hammer tip selection 401 11.2.5 No Hammer: Improvise 402 11.2.6 Pete’s Hammer Test Impact Ritual 402 11.3 Accelerometer Issues 403 11.3.1 Mass Loading 403 11.3.2 Mass Loading Effects from Tri-axial Accelerometers 404 11.3.3 Accelerometer Sensitivity Selection 407 11.3.4 Tri-axial Accelerometers 408 11.4 Curvefitting Considerations 411 11.4.1 Should all Measurements be used when Curvefitting 412 11.5 Blue Frame with Three Plate Subsystem 414 11.6 Miscellaneous Issues 422 11.6.1 Modal Test Axis Labels 422 11.6.2 Testing Does Not Need to Start at point 1 423 11.6.3 Test to aWider Frequency Range 423 11.6.4 Ui times Uj; the key to many questions 423 11.7 Summary 425 A Linear Algebra: Basic Operations Needed forModal Analysis Operations 427 A.1 Define a Matrix 427 A.2 Define a Column Vector 427 A.3 Define a Row Vector 428 A.4 Define a Diagonal Matrix 428 A.5 Define Matrix Addition 428 A.6 Define Matrix Scalar Multiply 428 A.7 Define Matrix Multiply 429 A.8 Matrix Multiplication Rules 429 A.9 Transpose of a Matrix 430 A.10 Transposition Rules 430 A.11 Symmetric Matrix Rules 430 A.12 Define a Matrix Inverse 431 A.13 Matrix Inverse Properties 431 A.14 Define an Eigenvalue Problem 431 A.15 Generalized Inverse 431 A.16 Singular Value Decomposition 432 B Example Using Two Degree of Freedom System: Eigenproblem 433 C Pole, Residue, and FRF Problem for 2-DOF System 437 D Example using Three Degree of Freedom System 443 E DYNSYSWebsite Materials 451 E.1 Technical Materials Developed 451 E.1.1 Theoretical Aspects of First and Second Order Systems 452 E.1.2 First Order Systems: Modeling Step with ODE and Block Diagram 452 E.1.3 Second Order Systems: Modeling Step, Impulse, IC with ODE and Block Diagram 452 E.1.4 MathematicalModeling Considerations 452 E.1.5 Simulink and MATLAB Primer Materials 453 E.1.6 Miscellaneous Materials 453 E.2 DYNSYS.UML.EDUWebsite 453 F Basic Modal Analysis Information 463 F.1 SDOF Definitions 463 F.1.1 Damping Estimates 463 F.1.2 System Transfer Function 464 F.1.3 Different Forms of the System Transfer Function 464 F.1.4 Frequency Response Function 465 F.2 MDOF Definitions 466 Part III Collection of Sets of Modal Data Collected for Processing 467 G Repeated Root Frame: Boundary Condition Effects 469 G.1 Corner Supports Set #1 470 G.2 Midlength Supports Set #2 474 G.3 Modal Correlation between Set #1 and Set #2 474 H Radarsat Satellite Testing 479 H.1 Data Reduction Set 1: Reference BUS:109:Z, BUS:118:Z, PMS:217:X and PMS:1211:Y 479 H.2 Data Reduction Set 2: Reference PMS:217:X and PMS:1211:Y 479 I Demo Airplane Testing 487 I.1 Impact Testing 487 I.2 SIMO Testing with Skewed Shaker 487 I.3 MIMO Testing with Two Vertical Modal Shakers 493 J Whirlpool Dryer Cabinet Modal Testing 497 K GM MTU Automobile Round Robin Modal Testing 501 L UML Composite Spar Modal Testing 505 M UML BUHModal Testing 509 N Nomenclature 515 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisNewly revised, DeGarmo''s Materials and Processes in Manufacturing has been the market-leading text on manufacturing and manufacturing processes courses for over fifty years. Authors J T. Black and Ron Kohser have continued this book''s long and distinguished tradition of exceedingly clear presentation and highly practical approach to materials and processes, presenting mathematical models and analytical equations only when they enhance the basic understanding of the material. Updated to reflect all current practices, standards, and materials, this edition has new coverage of additive manufacturing, lean engineering, and processes related to ceramics, polymers, and plastics.Table of ContentsPreface iii 1 Introduction to DeGarmo’s Materials and Processes in Manufacturing 1 1.1 Materials, Manufacturing, and the Standard of Living 1 1.2 Manufacturing and Production Systems 3 Review Questions 24 Problems 25 2 Properties of Materials 26 2.1 Introduction 26 2.2 Static Properties 28 2.3 Dynamic Properties 38 2.4 Temperature Effects (Both High and Low) 43 2.5 Machinability, Formability, and Weldability 46 2.6 Fracture Toughness and the Fracture Mechanics Approach 46 2.7 Physical Properties 48 2.8 Testing Standards and Testing Concerns 48 Review Questions 48 Problems 50 3 Nature of Materials 51 3.1 Structure—Property—Processing—Performance Relationships 51 3.2 The Structure of Atoms 52 3.3 Atomic Bonding 52 3.4 Secondary Bonds 53 3.5 Atom Arrangements in Materials 54 3.6 Crystal Structures 54 3.7 Development of a Grain Structure 56 3.8 Elastic Deformation 56 3.9 Plastic Deformation 57 3.10 Dislocation Theory of Slippage 58 3.11 Strain Hardening or Work Hardening 59 3.12 Plastic Deformation in Polycrystalline Material 60 3.13 Grain Shape and Anisotropic Properties 60 3.14 Fracture 61 3.15 Cold Working, Recrystallization, and Hot Working 61 3.16 Grain Growth 62 3.17 Alloys and Alloy Types 62 3.18 Atomic Structure and Electrical Properties 62 Review Questions 63 Problems 64 4 Equilibrium Phase Diagrams and the Iron–Carbon System 65 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Phases 65 4.3 Equilibrium Phase Diagrams 65 4.4 Iron–Carbon Equilibrium Diagram 71 4.5 Steels and the Simplified Iron–Carbon Diagram 72 4.6 Cast Irons 74 Review Questions 75 Problems 76 5 Heat Treatment 77 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 Processing Heat Treatments 77 5.3 Heat Treatments Used to Increase Strength 80 5.4 Strengthening Heat Treatments for Nonferrous Metals 80 5.5 Strengthening Heat Treatments for Steel 83 5.6 Surface Hardening of Steel 94 5.7 Furnaces 96 5.8 Heat Treatment and Energy 97 Review Questions 98 Problems 99 6 Ferrous Metals and Alloys 101 6.1 Introduction to History-Dependent Materials 101 6.2 Ferrous Metals 101 6.3 Iron 102 6.4 Steel 102 6.5 Stainless Steels 113 6.6 Tool Steels 115 6.7 Cast Irons 117 6.8 Cast Steels 120 6.9 The Role of Processing on Cast Properties 120 Review Questions 121 Problems 122 7 Nonferrous Metals and Alloys 123 7.1 Introduction 123 7.2 Copper and Copper Alloys 123 7.3 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys 128 7.4 Magnesium and Magnesium Alloys 134 7.5 Zinc and Zinc Alloys 136 7.6 Titanium and Titanium Alloys 137 7.7 Nickel-Based Alloys 138 7.8 Superalloys, Refractory Metals, and Other Materials Designed for High-Temperature Service 138 7.9 Lead and Tin and Their Alloys 141 7.10 Some Lesser-Known Metals and Alloys 141 7.11 Metallic Glasses 141 7.12 Graphite 142 7.13 Materials for Specific Applications 142 7.14 High Entropy Alloys 142 Review Questions 143 Problems 144 8 Nonmetallic Materials: Plastics, Elastomers, Ceramics, and Composites 145 8.1 Introduction 145 8.2 Plastics 145 8.3 Elastomers 156 8.4 Ceramics 159 8.5 Composite Materials 166 Review Questions 174 Problems 175 9 Material Selection 177 9.1 Introduction 177 9.2 Material Selection and Manufacturing Processes 179 9.3 The Design Process 179 9.4 Approaches to Material Selection 180 9.5 Additional Factors to Consider 183 9.6 Consideration of the Manufacturing Process 183 9.7 Ultimate Objective 184 9.8 Materials Substitution 185 9.9 Effect of Product Liability on Materials Selection 186 9.10 Aids to Material Selection 186 Review Questions 187 Problems 188 10 Fundamentals of Casting 191 10.1 Introduction to Materials Processing 191 10.2 Introduction to Casting 192 10.3 Casting Terminology 193 10.4 The Solidification Process 194 10.5 Patterns 202 10.6 Design Considerations in Castings 203 10.7 The Casting Industry 206 Review Questions 206 Problems 208 11 Expendable-Mold Casting Processes 209 11.1 Introduction 209 11.2 Sand Casting 209 11.3 Cores and Core Making 222 11.4 Other Expendable-Mold Processes with Multiple-Use Patterns 225 11.5 Expendable-Mold Processes Using Single-Use Patterns 226 11.6 Shakeout, Cleaning, and Finishing 232 11.7 Summary 232 Review Questions 232 Problems 234 12 Multiple-Use-Mold Casting Processes 235 12.1 Introduction 235 12.2 Permanent-Mold Casting 235 12.3 Die Casting 238 12.4 Squeeze Casting and Semisolid Casting 241 12.5 Centrifugal Casting 242 12.6 Continuous Casting 244 12.7 Melting 244 12.8 Pouring Practice 247 12.9 Cleaning, Finishing, Heat Treating, and Inspection 247 12.10 Automation in Foundry Operations 248 12.11 Process Selection 248 Review Questions 250 Problems 251 13 Fabrication of Plastics, Ceramics, and Composites 252 13.1 Introduction 252 13.2 Fabrication of Plastics 252 13.3 Processing of Rubber and Elastomers 262 13.4 Processing of Ceramics 263 13.5 Fabrication of Composite Materials 267 Review Questions 275 Problems 277 14 Fundamentals of Metal Forming 279 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Forming Processes: Independent Variables 280 14.3 Dependent Variables 281 14.4 Independent–Dependent Relationships 281 14.5 Process Modeling 282 14.6 General Parameters 282 14.7 Friction, Lubrication, and Wear under Metalworking Conditions 283 14.8 Temperature Concerns 284 14.9 Formability 290 Review Questions 290 Problems 292 15 Bulk Forming Processes 293 15.1 Introduction 293 15.2 Classification of Deformation Processes 293 15.3 Bulk Deformation Processes 294 15.4 Rolling 294 15.5 Forging 298 15.6 Extrusion 308 15.7 Wire, Rod, and Tube Drawing 312 15.8 Cold Forming, Cold Forging, and Impact Extrusion 314 15.9 Piercing 317 15.10 Other Squeezing Processes 318 15.11 Surface Improvement by Deformation Processing 320 Review Questions 321 Problems 322 16 Sheet-Forming Processes 325 16.1 Introduction 325 16.2 Shearing Operations 325 16.3 Bending 331 16.4 Drawing and Stretching Processes 338 16.5 Alternative Methods of Producing Sheet-Type Products 349 16.6 Seamed Pipe Manufacture 349 16.7 Presses 350 Review Questions 354 Problems 356 17 Powder Metallurgy (Particulate Processing) 357 17.1 Introduction 357 17.2 The Basic Process 357 17.3 Powder Manufacture 358 17.4 Powder Testing and Evaluation 359 17.5 Powder Mixing and Blending 360 17.6 Compacting 360 17.7 Sintering 363 17.8 Advances in Sintering (Shorter Time, Higher Density, Stronger Products) 364 17.9 Hot-Isostatic Pressing 365 17.10 Other Techniques to Produce High-Density P/M Products 366 17.11 Metal Injection Molding (MIM) 366 17.12 Secondary Operations 368 17.13 Properties of P/M Products 369 17.14 Design of Powder Metallurgy Parts 371 17.15 Powder Metallurgy Products 371 17.16 Advantages and Disadvantages of Powder Metallurgy 373 17.17 Process Summary 374 Review Questions 375 Problems 376 18 Additive Processes—Including 3-D Printing 377 18.1 Introduction 377 18.2 Layerwise Manufacturing 378 18.3 Liquid-Based Processes 381 18.4 Powder-Based Processes 383 18.5 Deposition-Based Processes 387 18.6 Uses and Applications 390 18.7 Pros, Cons and Current and Future Trends 393 18.8 Economic Considerations 395 Review Questions 396 Problems 397 19 Fundamentals of Machining/ Orthogonal Machining 398 19.1 Introduction 398 19.2 Fundamentals 398 19.3 Forces and Power in Machining 406 19.4 Orthogonal Machining (Two Forces) 409 19.5 Chip Thickness Ratio, rc 412 19.6 Mechanics of Machining (Statics) 413 19.7 Shear Strain, γ, and Shear Front Angle, ϕ 414 19.8 Mechanics of Machining (Dynamics) (Section courtsey of Dr. Elliot Stern) 416 Review Questions 422 Problems 423 20 Cutting Tool Materials 424 20.1 Introduction 424 20.2 Cutting Tool Materials 428 20.3 Tool Geometry 437 20.4 Tool-Coating Processes 438 20.5 Tool Failure and Tool Life 440 20.6 Taylor Tool Life 441 20.7 Cutting Fluids 446 20.8 Economics of Machining 446 Review Questions 448 Problems 449 21 Turning and Boring Processes 451 21.1 Introduction 451 21.2 Fundamentals of Turning, Boring, and Facing Turning 453 21.3 Lathe Design and Terminology 457 21.4 Cutting Tools for Lathes 462 21.5 Workholding in Lathes 466 Review Questions 470 Problems 471 22 Milling 472 22.1 Introduction 472 22.2 Fundamentals of Milling Processes 472 22.3 Milling Tools and Cutters 479 22.4 Machines for Milling 483 Review Questions 487 Problems 487 23 Drilling and Related Hole-Making Processes 488 23.1 Introduction 488 23.2 Fundamentals of the Drilling Process 489 23.3 Types of Drills 490 23.4 Tool Holders for Drills 500 23.5 Workholding for Drilling 501 23.6 Machine Tools for Drilling 501 23.7 Cutting Fluids for Drilling 504 23.8 Counterboring, Countersinking, and Spot Facing 506 23.9 Reaming 506 Review Questions 508 Problems 509 24 Sawing, Broaching, Shaping, and Filing Machining Processes 510 24.1 Introduction 510 24.2 Introduction to Sawing 510 24.3 Introduction to Broaching 518 24.4 Fundamentals of Broaching 520 24.5 Broaching Machines 525 24.6 Introduction to Shaping and Planing 525 24.7 Introduction to Filing 529 Review Questions 531 Problems 532 25 Abrasive Machining Processes 533 25.1 Introduction 533 25.2 Abrasives 535 25.3 Grinding Wheel Structure and Grade 538 25.4 Grinding Wheel Identification 542 25.5 Grinding Machines 546 25.6 Honing 553 25.7 Superfinishing 554 25.8 Free Abrasives 555 25.9 Design Considerations in Grinding 559 Review Questions 559 Problems 560 26 CNC Processes and Adaptive Control: A(4) and A(5) Levels of Automation 561 26.1 Introduction 561 26.2 Basic Principles of Numerical Control 561 26.3 CNC Part Programming 567 26.4 Interpolation and Adaptive Control 574 26.5 Machining Center Features and Trends 577 26.6 Summary 581 Review Questions 581 Problems 582 27 JIG and Fixture Design 584 27.1 Introduction 584 27.2 Conventional Fixture Design 584 27.3 Tool Design Steps 587 27.4 Clamping Considerations 588 27.5 Chip Disposal 589 27.6 Example of Jig Design 589 27.7 Types of Jigs 591 27.8 Conventional Fixtures 593 27.9 Modular Fixturing 593 27.10 Setup and Changeover 594 27.11 Clamps 599 27.12 Other Workholding Devices 599 27.13 Economic Justification of Jigs and Fixtures 602 Review Questions 603 Problems 603 28 Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes 605 28.1 Introduction 605 28.2 Chemical Machining Processes 607 28.3 Electrochemical Machining Processes 611 28.4 Electrical Discharge Machining 616 Review Questions 624 29 Fundamentals of Joining 626 29.1 Introduction to Consolidation Processes 626 29.2 Classification of Welding and Thermal Cutting Processes 627 29.3 Some Common Concerns 627 29.4 Types of Fusion Welds and Types of Joints 628 29.5 Design Considerations 630 29.6 Heat Effects 630 29.7 Weldability or Joinability 635 29.8 Summary 635 Review Questions 636 Problems 637 30 Gas Flame and Arc Processes 638 30.1 Oxyfuel-Gas Welding 638 30.2 Oxygen Torch Cutting 641 30.3 Flame Straightening 643 30.4 Arc Welding 643 30.5 Consumable-Electrode Arc Welding 644 30.6 Nonconsumable Electrode Arc Welding 650 30.7 Other Processes Involving Arcs 654 30.8 Arc Cutting 656 30.9 Metallurgical and Heat Effects in Thermal Cutting 658 30.10 Welding Equipment 658 30.11 Thermal Deburring 659 Review Questions 660 Problems 662 31 Resistance and Solid-State Welding Processes 663 31.1 Introduction 663 31.2 Theory of Resistance Welding 663 31.3 Resistance Welding Processes 665 31.4 Advantages and Limitations of Resistance Welding 669 31.5 Solid-State Welding Processes 669 Review Questions 677 Problems 678 32 Other Welding Processes, Brazing, and Soldering 679 32.1 Introduction 679 32.2 Other Welding and Cutting Processes 679 32.3 Surface Modification by Welding-Related Processes 686 32.4 Brazing 689 32.5 Soldering 696 Review Questions 699 Problems 700 33 Adhesive Bonding, Mechanical Fastening, and Joining of Non-Metals 701 33.1 Adhesive Bonding 701 33.2 Mechanical Fastening 708 33.3 Joining of Plastics 711 33.4 Joining of Ceramics and Glass 713 33.5 Joining of Composites 714 Review Questions 714 Problems 715 34 Surface Integrity and Finishing Processes 717 34.1 Introduction 717 34.2 Surface Integrity 717 34.3 Abrasive Cleaning and Finishing 724 34.4 Chemical Cleaning 729 34.5 Coatings 730 34.6 Vaporized Metal Coatings 738 34.7 Clad Materials 738 34.8 Textured Surfaces 738 34.9 Coil-Coated Sheets 738 34.10 Edge Finishing and Burr Removal 739 Review Questions 741 35 Nano and Micro-Manufacturing Processes 742 35.1 Introduction 742 35.2 Lithography 745 35.3 Micromachining Processes 748 35.4 Deposition Processes 751 35.5 How ICs are Made 757 35.6 Nano- and Micro-Scale Metrology 763 Review Questions 765 Problems 766 36 Measurement and Inspection 767(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) 36.1 Introduction 767 36.2 Standards of Measurement 767 36.3 Allowance and Tolerance 770 36.4 Inspection Methods for Measurement 776 36.5 Measuring Instruments 777 36.6 Vision Systems 784 36.7 Coordinate Measuring Machines 785 36.8 Angle-measuring Instruments 787 36.9 Gages for Attributes Measuring 787 Review Questions 790 Problems 791 37 Nondestructive Examination (NDE) / Nondestructive Testing (NDT) 793(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) 37.1 Destructive vs. Nondestructive Testing 793 37.2 Visual Inspection 795 37.3 Liquid Penetrant Inspection 795 37.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection 796 37.5 Ultrasonic Inspection 797 37.6 Radiography 799 37.7 Eddy-Current Testing 800 37.8 Acoustic Emission Monitoring 802 37.9 Other Methods of Nondestructive Testing and Inspection 803 37.10 Dormant vs. Critical Flaws 804 37.11 Current and Future Trends 804 Review Questions 804 Problems 805 38 Manufacturing Automation and Industrial Robots 807(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) 38.1 Introduction 807 38.2 The A(4) Level of Automation 812 38.3 A(5) Level of Automation Requires Evaluation 818 38.4 Industrial Robotics 822 38.5 Computer-Integrated Manufacturing (CIM) 828 38.6 Computer-Aided Design 830 38.7 Computer-Aided Manufacturing 832 38.8 Summary 832 Review Questions 833 Advanced Topic 1 Process Capability and Quality Control 834(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) A1.1 Introduction 834 A1.2 Determining Process Capability 835 A1.3 Introduction to Statistical Quality Control 841 A1.4 Sampling Errors 845 A1.5 Gage Capability 846 A1.6 Just in Time/Total Quality Control 846 A1.7 Six Sigma 855 A1.8 Summary 858 Review Questions 858 Problems 859 Advanced Topic 2 The Enterprise (Production System) 861(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) A2.1 Introduction 861 A2.2 Typical Functional Areas in the Production System (PS) 861 Review Questions 876 Problems 877 Advanced Topic 3 Lean Engineering 878(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) A3.1 Introduction 878 A3.2 The Lean Engineer 878 A3.3 The Lean Production System 879 A3.4 Linked-Cell Manufacturing System Design Rules 879 A3.5 Manufacturing System Designs 880 A3.6 Preliminary Steps to Lean Production 881 A3.7 Methodology for Implementation of Lean Production 882 A3.8 Design Rule MT < CT 894 A3.9 Decouplers 895 A3.10 Integrating Production Control 898 A3.11 Integrating Inventory Control 900 A3.12 Lean Manufacturing Cell Design 901 A3.13 Machine Tool Design for Lean Manufacturing Cells 904 A3.14 L-CMS Strategy 908 Review Questions 909 Problems 910 Advanced Topic 4 Mixed-Model Final Assembly 911(online at www.wiley.com/college/black) A4.1 Introduction 911 A4.2 History 911 A4.3 Mixed-Model Final Assembly 912 A4.4 An Example of MMFA 913 A4.5 Key Enabling Systems 913 A4.6 Manual Assembly Line Balancing 915 A4.7 Sequencing 917 A4.8 Quality in Mixed-Model Final Assembly 918 A4.9 Examples of Assembly Aids/Poka-Yoke(Error-Proofing) Applications 920 Review Questions 921 Problems 922 Index I1 Selected References For Additional Study S1

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe purpose of this unique handbook is to provide reference material that includes basic principles and current developments in the field of natural coloration and finishing. A sustainable world requires the utilization of renewable materials or resources that can be produced in huge quantities for a wide range of applications. To adopt the use of active materials for textile coloration and finishing, they should reach the technical demands of the modern world such as eco-preservation, economic and ecological requirements by which, equity and sustainability might be considered. Therefore, there is a need to discuss and understand the challenges and solutions of textile coloration and functional finishing methodologies. The 20 chapters comprising the Handbook of Renewable Materials for Coloration and Finishing are divided into four segments: Substrates for Coloration and Finishing; Renewable Colorants and their Applications; Advanced Materials and TechnoloTable of ContentsPreface xixPart I: Substrates for Coloration and Finishing 1 1 An Introduction to Textile Fibers: An Overview 3Mohd Shabbir and Faqeer Mohammad 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Classification 4 1.2.1 Natural Fibers 5 1.2.2 Synthetic Fibers 5 1.2.3 Semi-Synthetic Fibers 6 1.3 Conclusion 6 References 7 2 Effect of Processing and Type of Mechanical Loading on Performance of Bio-Fibers and Bio-Composites 9Vijay Chaudhary and Pramendra Kumar Bajpai 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Extraction of Bio-Fibers 10 2.3 Mechanical Loading 12 2.4 Tensile Test 14 2.5 Flexural Test 15 2.6 Impact Test 15 2.7 Tribological Performance 16 2.8 Conclusion 16 References 17 3 Mechanical and Chemical Structure of Natural Protein Fibers: Wool and Silk 19Mohd Yusuf 3.1 Introduction 19 3.2 Wool 20 3.2.1 Physical Properties 20 3.2.2 Chemical Properties 21 3.2.3 Morphology 22 3.2.4 Chemical Structure 24 3.3 Silk 31 3.3.1 Physical properties 31 3.3.2 Chemical Properties 33 3.3.3 Morphology 34 3.3.4 Chemical Structure 36 3.4 Conclusion 38 References 38 Part II: Renewable Colorants and their Applications: Revolutionary Approach 41 4 Animal Based Natural Dyes: A Short Review 43Shahid Adeel, Sana Rafi, Muhammad Abdul Mustaan, Mahwish Salman and Abdul Ghaffar 4.1 Introduction of Natural Dyes 44 4.2 Sustainability of Natural Dyes 45 4.3 Classification of Natural Dyes 46 4.4 Animal Based Natural Dyes 47 4.4.1 Cochineal 47 4.4.1.1 Polish Cochineal 49 4.4.1.2 Armenian Cochineal 50 4.4.2 Kermes 50 4.4.3 Lac Insect 51 4.4.4 Sea Snails 53 4.4.4.1 Bolinusbrandaris 53 4.4.4.2 Hexaplex trunculus 54 4.4.4.3 Stramonita haemastoma 54 4.5 Extraction Methodology 56 4.6 Application of Animal Based Dyes 60 4.6.1 Textile 60 4.6.2 Dye Sensitized Solar Cells 62 4.6.3 Food 63 4.6.4 Pharmaceuticals 64 4.6.5 Nano-technological Image 64 4.7 Future Prospects 65 4.8 Conclusion 66 Acknowledgment 66 References 66 5 Natural Dyes and Pigments: Extraction and Applications 75Rym Mansour 5.1 Introduction 75 5.2 Classification of Natural Dyes 77 5.2.1 Classification Based on Color 77 5.2.1.1 Red 77 5.2.1.2 Blue 77 5.2.1.3 Yellow 77 5.2.1.4 Green 78 5.2.1.5 Black and Brown 78 5.2.1.6 Orange 78 5.2.2 Classification Based on Chemical Constitution 78 5.2.2.1 Anthraquinone Dyes 78 5.2.2.2 Indigoid Dyes 79 5.2.2.3 Carotenoid Dyes 79 5.2.2.4 Flavonoid Dyes 79 5.2.2.5 Dihydropyran Dyes 79 5.2.3 Classification Based on Application 80 5.2.3.1 Mordant Dyes 80 5.2.3.2 Vat Dyes 80 5.2.3.3 Direct Dyes 80 5.2.3.4 Acid Dyes 81 5.2.3.5 Basic Dyes 81 5.2.3.6 Disperse Dyes 81 5.2.4 Classification Based on Origin 81 5.2.4.1 Plants 81 5.2.4.2 Minerals 82 5.2.4.3 Animals 82 5.3 Extraction of Natural Dyes 82 5.3.1 Extraction Methods 82 5.3.1.1 Aqueous Extraction 82 5.3.1.2 Acid and Alkali Extraction Process 83 5.3.1.3 Ultrasonic and Microwave Extraction 84 5.3.1.4 Fermentation 84 5.3.1.5 Enzymatic Extraction 85 5.3.1.6 Solvent Extraction 85 5.3.1.7 Supercritical Fluid Extraction 86 5.4 Natural Dyes Application 86 5.4.1 Textile, Medicinal and Herbal Applications 86 5.4.1.1 Quinones 87 5.4.1.2 Anthraquinones 87 5.4.1.3 Naphthoquinones 88 5.4.1.4 Anthocyanins 89 5.4.1.5 Usnic Acid 89 5.4.1.6 Tannins 90 5.4.2 Natural Dyes in Food Coloration 90 5.4.3 UV-protective Finishing 92 5.4.4 Insect Repellent Finishing 93 5.4.5 Natural Dyes in Dye-sensitized Solar Cells 94 5.5 Other Applications of Natural Dyes 95 5.6 Conclusion and Future Outlook 96 References 97 6 Lichen Derived Natural Colorants: History, Extraction, and Applications 103Luqman Jameel Rather,, Salman Jameel Rather, Showkat Ali Ganie and Khursheed Ahmad Bhat 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 History 105 6.3 Lichen Dyes and Industrial Revolution 106 6.4 Extraction 107 6.5 Dye Stuffs from Lichens 107 6.5.1 Lichen Dyestuffs: Orchils and Litmus 110 6.6 Yellowish, Brownish and Reddish Colorants from Lichen 110 6.7 Ways of Dyeing with Lichens 111 6.8 Future Prospectus and Conclusion 111 Acknowledgement 112 References 112 7 Chlorophylls as Pigment: A Contemporary Approach 115Shafat Ahmad Khan, Mohd Yusuf, Pooja Agarwal and Lalit Prasad 7.1 Introduction 116 7.2 Molecular Structure and Physico-chemical Characterization 117 7.3 Coloring Aspects 119 7.4 Characterization and Quality Control 120 7.5 Conclusion and Future Outlook 121 References 122 8 Contemporary Revolutions in Natural Dyes: Extraction and Dyeing Methodology 125Fazal-ur-Rehman, Shahid Adeel, Sana Rafi, Noman Habib, Khalid Mahmood Zia, Mohammad Zuber and Nasim Akhtar 8.1 Introduction 126 8.2 Pros and Cons of Natural Dyes 127 8.3 Classification of Natural Dyes 129 8.3.1 Plant Based Natural Dyes 129 8.3.1.1 Pomegranate 129 8.3.1.2 Australian Pine 130 8.3.1.3 Bush Grape 130 8.3.1.4 Butterfly Pea 130 8.3.1.5 Mugavu 131 8.3.1.6 Jackfruit 132 8.3.1.7 Larkspur 134 8.3.1.8 Tee Oil Plant 135 8.3.1.9 Chaste Tree 136 8.3.1.10 Chinese Sumac 137 8.3.1.11 Limoniastrum Monopetalum 137 8.3.1.12 Yerba Mate 137 8.3.1.13 Camphor Tree 138 8.3.1.14 Basil 139 8.3.1.15 Fennel 139 8.3.1.16 Indian Paper Plant 140 8.3.1.17 Guava 140 8.3.1.18 Scarlet Sage 141 8.3.1.19 Sandalwood 142 8.3.1.20 Centaury 142 8.4 Extraction Methodology 144 8.4.1 Conventional Methods 145 8.4.2 Modern Methods 146 8.5 Exploration of New Plants Using Modern Tools to Maintain Sustainability 150 8.5.1 Harmal 150 8.5.2 Saffron 152 8.5.3 Madder 152 8.5.4 Safflower 153 8.5.5 Arjun 154 8.5.6 Chicken Gizzard 156 8.5.7 Red Calico 156 8.5.8 Golden Duranta 157 8.5.9 Marigold 157 8.5.10 Milk Weed 159 8.5.11 Neem 160 8.6 Conclusion 161 Acknowledgment 161 References 161 9 A Review on Phytochemistry, Pharmacological and Coloring Potential of Lawsonia inermis 169Mohd Yusuf 9.1 Introduction 169 9.2 Phytochemistry 171 9.2.1 Phenolics 171 9.2.1.2 Naphthoquinones 171 9.2.1.3 Naphthalenes 172 9.2.1.4 Acetylenes 173 9.2.1.5 Alkyl Phenones 174 9.2.1.6 Xanthones 175 9.2.1.7 Coumarins 175 9.2.1.8 Tannins 176 9.2.1.9 Lignans 176 9.2.1.10 Others 176 9.2.2 Terpenoids 178 9.2.3 Steroids 178 9.2.4 Alkaloids 178 9.2.5 Miscellaneous Compounds 179 9.3 Pharmacological Potential 181 9.4 Coloring Potential 182 9.5 Conclusion and Future Outlook 184 References 184 10 Sustainable Application of Natural Dyes in Cosmetic Industry 189Shahid Adeel, Shazia Abrar, Shumaila Kiran,,Tahir Farooq, Tahsin Gulzar and Mubeen Jamal 10.1 Introduction 190 10.2 Classification of Natural Dyes 191 10.2.1 Sources of Origin 191 10.2.1.1 Plant Origin 191 10.2.1.2 Animal Origin 195 10.2.1.3 Mineral Origin 195 10.2.1.4 Microbial Origin 195 10.3 Application of Natural Dyes in Cosmetics 196 10.3.1 Natural Lip Cosmetics 196 10.3.2 Natural Hair Dyes 197 10.4 Methods of Application as Hair Colorant 199 10.5 Natural Dyes as Hair Colorant 200 10.5.1 Henna (Lawsonia inermis Linn) 200 10.5.2 Indigo (Indigoferatinctoria) 202 10.5.3 Shoe Flower (Hibiscus rosa-sinensis L.) 203 10.5.4 Amla (EmblicaofficinalisLinn) 205 10.5.5 Beet (Beta Vulgaris) 206 10.6 Advantages/Merits 206 10.7 Disadvantages/Demerits 207 10.8 Conclusion 207 Acknowledgments 208 References 208 11 Application of Natural Dyes to Cotton and Jute Textiles: Science and Technology and Environmental Issues 213Ashis Kumar Samanta 11.1 Introduction 214 11.2 Extraction of Color Solution from the Sources of Natural Dyes 216 11.3 Purification of Selected Natural Dyes 216 11.4 Testing and Characterization of Purified Natural Dyes Before its Application to Textiles 217 11.4.1 UV-VIS Spectral Analysis of Aqueous Extracted Solution of Natural Dyes 217 11.4.2 FTIR Spectral Analysis 217 11.4.3 Analysis of DSC-Thermo Grams 218 11.5 Mechanism of Complex Formation Amongst Dye-Mordant and Fiber for Fixation of Natural Dyes on Different Fibers 221 11.6 Technological Aspects of Natural Dyeing to Cotton and Jute: Effect of Different Mordants 226 11.6.2 Effect of Selective Single and Double Mordanting on Jute and Cotton Fabrics for Natural Dyeing 227 11.6.2 Effect of Dyeing Process Variables for Optimizing the Dyeing Conditions 245 11.7 Study of Dyeing Kinetics for Dyeing Jack fruit Wood on Cotton and Jute fabrics 254 11.7.2 Dye Affinity 255 11.7.3 Dyeing Absorption Isotherm 257 11.7.4 Heat (Enthalpy) of Dyeing 260 11.7.5 Entropy of Dyeing and Gibb’s Free Energy 261 11.8 Study of Compatibility of Binary and Ternary Mixture of Natural dyes to Obtain Compound Shade 262 11.9 Test of Compatibility for Selected Binary Mixture of Natural Dyes 263 11.9.2 Newer Proposed Method of Test of Compatibility (Method-II) 264 11.9 Some Recent Studies on Natural Dyes for Textiles 274 11.10 Conclusions 275 References 276 12 Bio-Colorants as Photosensitizers for Dye Sensitized Solar Cell (DSSC) 279Pooja Agarwal, Mohd Yusuf, Shafat Ahmed Khan and Lalit Prasad 12.1 Introduction 279 12.2 Operational Principle of the DSSCs 281 12.3 DSSC Components 283 12.3.1 Semiconductor Film Electrode 283 12.3.2 Electrolyte 285 12.3.2.1 Liquid Electrolyte 285 12.3.2.2 Solid State Electrolytes 287 12.3.2.3 Quasi-Solid Electrolyte 287 12.3.3 Counter Electrode 288 12.3.4 Photosensitizers 289 12.3.4.1 Metal Complex Sensitizer 289 12.3.4.2 Metal-Free Organic Sensitizer 290 12.3.4.3 Natural Sensitizer/Natural Dye/Natural Pigments 291 12.4 Conclusion and Future Outlook 297 References 298 Part III: Advanced Materials and Technologies for Coloration and Finishing 301 13 Advanced Materials and Technologies for Antimicrobial Finishing of Cellulosic Textiles 303Nabil A. Ibrahim, Basma M. Eid and Faten H. H. Abdellatif 13.1 Cellulosic Fibers 303 13.2 Wet Processing of Cellulosic Textiles 304 13.2.1 Pre-treatment 304 13.2.2 Coloration 306 13.2.3 Finishing 306 13.3 Antimicrobial Finishing of Cellulosic Textiles 307 13.3.1 Criteria for Proper Antimicrobial Agents 310 13.3.2 Best Available Techniques 310 13.4 Traditional Antimicrobial Finishing Chemicals, Application Method, Disadvantages 311 13.4.1 Synthetic Antimicrobial Agents 311 13.4.1.1 Quaternary Ammonium Compounds 311 13.4.1.2 Poly (hexamethylenebiguanide) (PHMB) 312 13.4.1.3 N-Halamine Compounds 313 13.4.1.4 Triclosan 314 13.4.2 Natural Antimicrobial Agents 314 13.4.2.1 Chitosan 315 13.5 Advanced Antimicrobial Agents 320 13.5.1 Antimicrobial Agent Based on Natural Products 320 13.5.2 Advanced Antimicrobial Agents Based on Nano-materials 327 13.5.2.1 Silver Nanoparticles AgNPs 329 13.5.2.2 Tianium Dioxide Nanoparticle (TiO2NPs) 333 13.5.2.3 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles (ZnO NPs) 335 13.5.2.4 Cuprousoxide Nanoparticle (Cu2ONPs) 335 13.5.3 Nan composites and Hybrid Materials 336 13.6 Evaluation of Antimicrobial Products 336 13.7 Conclusion and Future Prospects 336 Reference 345 14 Bio-macromolecules: A New Flame Retardant Finishing Strategy for Textiles 357Giulio Malucelli 14.1 Introduction 357 14.2 The Role of Bio-macromolecules as Flame Retardant Systems: Structure-Property Relationships 363 14.2.1 Whey Proteins 364 14.2.2 Caseins 367 14.2.3 Hydrophobins 371 14.2.4 Nucleic Acids 374 14.2.5 Other Bio-macromolecules: A Quick Recent Overview 380 14.3 Current Limitations 381 14.4 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 382 Acknowledgements 382 Reference 383 15 Significant Trends in Nano Finishes for Improvement of Functional Properties of Fabrics 387N. Gokarneshan and K. Velumani 15.1 Introduction 388 15.2 Significance of Nanotechnology 389 15.3 Application of Nanotechnology in Textiles 389 15.4 Nanotechnology for Improved Fabric Finishing 392 15.5 Problem Associated with Nanotechnology 393 15.6 Nano Safe Textile Finishes with Papaya Peel and Silver 393 15.6.1 Overview 393 15.6.2 Related Aspects 393 15.6.3 Analysis of UV Visible Spectra 394 15.6.4 Dynamic Light Scattering 395 15.6.5 Evaluation of Antibacterial Activity of Textile Material 396 15.7 Plasma Induced Finishes for Multifunctional Properties 397 15.7.1 Overview 397 15.7.2 Related Aspects 397 15.7.3 Ultra Violet Protection 398 15.7.4 Flame Retardant Properties 399 15.7.5 Thermo-Gravimetric Analysis 400 15.7.6 Morphology of Surface 401 15.7.7 Antibacterial Properties 401 15.7.8 Crease Recovery Angle 401 15.7.9 Surface Chemical Changes 402 15.7.10 Tensile Properties 403 15.8 Nano Finishes Adopting Green Approach 403 15.8.1 Overview 403 15.8.2 Related Aspects 403 15.8.3 Release of Silver Nano Particle 405 15.8.4 Anti-Microbial Activity 405 15.9 Multi Functional Nano Finish on Denim Fabrics 406 15.9.1 Overview 406 15.9.2 Related Aspects 407 15.9.3 Characterization of Nanoparticles 408 15.9.4 Characterization of Treated Fabric 408 15.10 Role of Silk Sericin in Nano Finishing with Silver Particles 410 15.10.1 Overview 410 15.10.2 Related Aspects 411 15.10.3 Characterization of Silver Nanoparticles 411 15.10.4 Importance of Sericin asCapping Agent 412 15.10.5 Application of Silver Nano Particles as Antibacterial Agent 413 15.11 Improvement in Coloration and Antimicrobial Properties in Silk Fabrics with Aqueous Binders 413 15.11.1 Overview 413 15.11.2 Related Aspects 414 15.11.3 Analysis of Polyurethane Acrylate 414 15.11.4 Influence of PUA Concentration on K/S Value 415 15.11.5 Influence of Titanium Dioxide Concentration on K/S Value 415 15.11.6 UV Protection 415 15.11.7 Antimicrobial Property 416 15.11.8 Wrinkle Resistance 417 15.11.9 Fiber Surface 417 15.11.10 Fastness Properties 417 15.12 Nanoparticles for Improving Flame Retardant Properties of Fabrics 418 15.13 Application of Herbal Synthesized Silver Nano Particles on Cotton Fabric 420 15.14 Conclusion 422 References 423 16 Rot Resistance and Antimicrobial Finish of Cotton Khadi Fabrics 435Tapas Ranjan Kar 16.1 Introduction 436 16.2 Anti Microbial Treatment 439 16.3 Some Important Study on Eco-friendly Antimicrobial Finishing of Cotton Khadi Fabric 440 16.3.2 Reaction Scheme 445 16.3.3 Crease Recovery and Stiffness 453 16.3.4 Appearance Properties 455 16.4 Effect of Varying Concentration Level of Chitosan and PEG for Application of Mixture of Chitosan and PEG on Microbial and Other Properties of Cotton Khadi Fabric with CA and SHP as Mixed Catalyst and Their Optimization 455 16.5 Characterization of Control and Treated Cotton Fabrics by FTIR, TGA, and X-RD Analysis 460 16.5.1 Analysis of FTIR Spectra for Untreated and Treated Cotton Khadi Fabric with PEG and its Mixture 460 16.5.2 Characterization of Thermal Stability of the Control and Treated Fabric 463 16.5.3 X-ray Diffraction of Untreated and Treated Fabrics with CA and SHP as Catalyst 465 16.6 Study of Residual Antimicrobial Effect after Repeated Washing Cycles 466 16.7 Analysis of Surface Properties by SEM 467 16.8 Conclusion 467 16.8.1 Ranking Index of Different Treatments on Loss of Tenacity and Antimicrobial Reduction Percentage Values 468 Acknowledgement 469 Reference 469 17 Advanced Technologies for Coloration and Finishing Using Nanotechnology 473Abdul Azeez Nazeer, Saravanan Dhandapani and Sudarshana Deepa Vijaykumar 17.1 Introduction 474 17.2 Nanoparticles in Dyes 474 17.2.1 Plasma Technology 475 17.2.1.1 Coloration of Plasma-Treated Polyester Fibers 476 17.2.1.2 Coloration of Plasma-Treated Wool Fibers 476 17.2.1.3 Coloration of Plasma-Treated Cotton Fibers 476 17.3 Nano Finishing 477 17.3.1 Hydrophobic Finishing 477 17.3.2 Antimicrobial Finishing 480 17.3.3 Self Cleaning Finishing 482 17.3.4 Flame Retardent 485 17.3.5 UV Protecting Finishing 487 17.3.6 Wrinkle Resistant 488 17.4 Encapsulation Technology 489 17.4.1 Application of Microcapsules on Textile Industry 495 17.5 Conclusion 497 References 497 18 Sol–Gel Flame Retardant and/or Antimicrobial Finishings for Cellulosic Textiles 501Giulio Malucelli 18.1 Introduction 502 18.2 The Sol–Gel Process 504 18.2.1 Sol–gel Fully Inorganic Coatings 506 18.2.2 Phosphorus-Doped Sol–Gel Coatings 509 18.2.3 Smoke Suppressant Sol–Gel Coating Formulations 510 18.2.4 Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Sol–Gel Coatings 511 18.2.5 Antibacterial Effects Provided by Sol–Gel Coatings 513 18.3 Current Limitations 515 18.4 Conclusions and Future Outlook 515 References 516 Part IV: Sustainability 521 19 Sustainable Coloration and Value Addition to Textiles 523S. Basak, Kartick K. Samanta, S. K. Chattopadhyay and P. Pandit 19.1 Introduction 524 19.2 Sustainable Coloration of Textile Materials 525 19.2.2 Naturally Colored Cotton 526 18.2.3 Natural Dye from Plants 527 19.2.4 Sustainable Synthetic Color 530 19.2.5 Easy Care Finishing of Textile Products 531 19.3 Antimicrobial Finishing of Textiles 532 19.4 Flame Retardant Finishing of Textile 535 19.5 UV Protective Textile 537 19.6 Mosquito, Insect and Moth Repellent Finishing of Textile 538 19.7 Irradiation-Induced Value Addition to Textiles 539 19.8 Enzyme-Based Textile Pretreatment 540 19.9 Bio-mimic Based Value Addition to Textile 541 19.10 Conclusion and Future Outlook 543 References 543 20 Interconnection Between Biotechnology and Textile: A New Horizon of Sustainable Technology 549Aranya Mallick 20.1 Introduction 549 20.2 Influence of Bioprocess on Textile 550 20.2.1 Fibers and Polymers 551 20.2.1.1 Modified Cotton 551 20.2.1.2 Biopolymers 552 20.2.1.3 Thermoplastic Polymers Derived from Natural Sources 555 20.2.2 Pretreatment 557 20.2.2.1 Desizing 558 20.2.2.2 Scouring 559 20.2.2.3 Bleaching 559 20.2.2.4 Peroxide Killing 559 20.2.3 Dyes and Dyeing 560 20.2.3.1 Natural Dyes and Dyeing 560 20.2.3.2 Bacteria Derived Pigments 561 20.2.4 After or Post-treatment 561 20.2.5 Decolorization of Textile Dyes Waste 562 20.2.6 Biosurfactants 563 20.2.7 Antimicrobial Activities and the Tests 563 20.2.8 Textile Detergent 565 20.3 Influence of Textile on Biotechnology 565 20.3.1 Filtration 565 20.3.2 Immobilization 565 20.3.3 Protective Textile 567 20.3.3.1 Air Permeable Material 567 20.3.3.2 Semipermeable Material 567 20.3.3.3 Impermeable Material 567 20.3.3.4 Selective Permeable Membrane 568 20.4 Conclusion 568 References 568 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn excellent one-volume resource for understanding the most important current issues in the research and advances in materials science for environmental and energy technologies This proceedings volume contains a collection of 20 papers from the 2016 Materials Science and Technology (MS&T''16) meeting held in Salt Lake City, UT, from October 24-27 of that year. These conference symposia provided a forum for scientists, engineers, and technologists to discuss and exchange state-of-the-art ideas, information, and technology on advanced methods and approaches for processing, synthesis, characterization, and applications of ceramics, glasses, and composites. Topics covered include: the 8th International Symposium on Green and Sustainable Technologies for Materials Manufacturing Processing; Materials Issues in Nuclear Waste Management in the 21st Century; Construction and Building Materials for a Better Environment; Materials for Nuclear Applications and Extreme EnvirTable of ContentsPreface ix GREEN AND SUSTAINABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR MATERIALS MANUFACTURING AND PROCESSING Titania Nanosheet Production by an Inexpensive Green Process 3Cody Cannon and Allen W. Apblett Green Synthetic Method for Synthesis of Calcium Molybdate 15 Based on a Bimetallic ComplexAhmed Moneeb, Cory Perkins, Allen W. Apblett, Abdullah Al-Abdulrahman, and Abdulaziz Bagabas Controlling Factors Aiming for High Performance SiC 27 Polycrystalline FiberToshihiro Ishikawa and Ryutaro Usukawa Extrusion and Tape Casting Based Production of New 39 Lightweight Kiln Furniture with Non-Planar SurfaceUwe Scheithauer, Eric Schwarzer, Hans-Jürgen Richter, Tassilo Moritz, and Alexander Michaelis Development of Stoneware Body Formulation Suitable For 51 Fast FiringC. S. Prasad and L. K. Sharma Comparative Study on the Microstructure Evolution of Semicoke 5 9 and Lump Coal under High TemperatureRunsheng Xu, Wei Wang, Jianliang Zhang, Zhengliang Xue, Changgui Cheng, and Yun Zhou Carbon Structure in Blast Furnace Dusts Characterized by 69 Raman Spectroscope and Its Links with Combustion ReactivityDi Zhao, Jianliang Zhang, Guangwei Wang, Runsheng Xu, Haiyang Wang, and Jianbo Zhong CONSTRUCTION AND BUILDING MATERIALS FOR A BETTER ENVIRONMENT Portland Cement Paste Blended with Pulverized Coconut 79 FibersHenry A. Colorado and Alexandra Loaiza Mechanical Properties of Jute Fiber Reinforced Geopolymers 85Ana Carolina Constâncio Trindade, Himad Ahmed Alcamand, Paulo Henrique Ribeiro Borges, and Flávio de Andrade Silva Calcium Aluminate Cements Subject to High Temperature 97John F. Zapata, Maryory Gomez, and Henry A. Colorado Aggregate Optimization in Concrete using the Viterbo Method 107Edinson Murillo-Mosquera, Sergio Cifuentes, and Henry A. Colorado MATERIALS ISSUES IN NUCLEAR WASTE MANAGEMENT IN THE 21ST CENTURY Xtractite: An Inorganic Ion-Exchange Material for Sorption of 121 RadionuclidesAllen W. Apblett, Nicholas Materer, Cory Perkins, Evgueni Kadossov, Shoaib Shaikh, and Hayden Hamby Effect of Carbonate Concentration on the Dissolution Rates of 133 UO2 and Spent Fuel—A ReviewAkira Kitamura and Kuniaki Akahori Volumetrically-Stabilized Pyrochlore Waste form using 145 Co-DopingS. T. Locker, B. M. Clark, and S. K. Sundaram Integrated Research Program Overview on the “Innovative 151 Approaches to Marine Atmospheric Stress Corrosion Cracking Inspection, Evaluation and Modeling in Used-Fuel Dry Storage Canisters"Z. Shayer, Z. Yu, D. L. Olson, S. Liu, S. Gordon, X. Wu, K. L. Murty, N. Kumar, D. Kaoumi, B. Anderson, M. Remillieus, T. J. Ulrich, C. Bryan, D. Enos, J. D. Almer, J. R. Johns, and D. Lewis SCC Detection and Life Prediction for Nuclear Waste Management 165 using PGAA and NAAZeev Shayer and Jason Brookman Advances in Materials Science for Environmental and Energy Technologies MATERIALS FOR NUCLEAR APPLICATIONS AND EXTREME ENVIRONMENTS Reducing Risks in Nuclear Power Plants Operation by using 181 FeCrAl Alloys as Fuel CladdingR. B. Rebak, K. A. Terrani, William Gassmann, John Williams, R. M. Fawcett, and R. E. Stachowski Annular Accident Tolerant Fuel with Discs and Rod Inserts 195Robert D. Mariani, Pavel Medvedev, and Douglas L. Porter NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, ENVIRONMENT, ELECTRONICS, AND INDUSTRY Nanocarbon-Infused Metals: A New Class of Covetic Materials for 207 Energy ApplicationsU. (Balu) Balachandran, B. Ma, S. E. Dorris, R. E. Koritala, and D. R. Forrest MATERIALS AND PROCESSES FOR CO2 CAPTURE, CONVERSION, AND SEQUESTRATION The Study of Catalysts Based on Intermetallic NiAl Alloys 221Karina Belokon and Yuriy Belokon

Read more less

Book SynopsisServes as a guide for seasoned researchers and students alike, who wish to learn about the cross-fertilization between biology and materials that is driving this emerging area of science This book covers the most relevant topics in basic research and those having potential technological applications for the field of biopolymer brushes. This area has experienced remarkable increase in development of practical applications in nanotechnology and biotechnology over the past decade. In view of the rapidly growing activity and interest in the field, this book covers the introductory features of polymer brushes and presents a unifying and stimulating overview of the theoretical aspects and emerging applications. It immerses readers in the historical perspective and the frontiers of research where our knowledge is increasing steadilyproviding them with a feeling of the enormous potential, the multiple applications, and the many up-and-coming trends behind the developmenTable of ContentsVolume 1 Preface xxi List of Contributors xxiii 1 Functionalization of Surfaces Using Polymer Brushes: An Overview of Techniques, Strategies, and Approaches 1Juan M. Giussi,M. Lorena Cortez,Waldemar A. Marmisoll´e, and Omar Azzaroni 1.1 Introduction: Fundamental Notions and Concepts 1 1.2 Preparation of Polymer Brushes on Solid Substrates 4 1.3 Preparation of Polymer Brushes by the “Grafting-To” Method 5 1.4 Polymer Brushes by the “Grafting-From” Method 9 1.4.1 Surface-Initiated Atom Transfer Radical Polymerization 9 1.4.2 Surface-Initiated Reversible-Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer Polymerization 10 1.4.3 Surface-Initiated Nitroxide-Mediated Polymerization 13 1.4.4 Surface-Initiated Photoiniferter-Mediated Polymerization 13 1.4.5 Surface-Initiated Living Ring-Opening Polymerization 15 1.4.6 Surface-Initiated Ring-Opening Metathesis Polymerization 17 1.4.7 Surface-Initiated Anionic Polymerization 18 1.5 Conclusions 20 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 2 Polymer Brushes by AtomTransfer Radical Polymerization 29Guojun Xie, Amir Khabibullin, Joanna Pietrasik, Jiajun Yan, and KrzysztofMatyjaszewski 2.1 Structure of Brushes 29 2.2 Synthesis of Polymer Brushes 31 2.2.1 Grafting through 31 2.2.2 Grafting to 32 2.2.3 Grafting from 32 2.3 ATRP Fundamentals 33 2.4 Molecular Bottlebrushes by ATRP 38 2.4.1 Introduction 38 2.4.2 Star-Like Brushes 40 2.4.3 Blockwise Brushes 42 2.4.4 Brushes with Tunable Grafting Density 45 2.4.5 Brushes with Block Copolymer Side Chains 46 2.4.6 Functionalities and Properties of Brushes 50 2.5 ATRP and Flat Surfaces 55 2.5.1 Chemistry at Surface 55 2.5.2 Grafting Density 55 2.5.3 Architecture 56 2.5.4 Applications 57 2.6 ATRP and Nanoparticles 58 2.6.1 Chemistry 58 2.6.2 Architecture 59 2.6.3 Applications 61 2.7 ATRP and Concave Surfaces 63 2.8 ATRP and Templates 63 2.8.1 Templates from Networks 63 2.8.2 Templates from Brushes 64 2.9 Templates from Stars 65 2.10 Bio-Related Polymer Brushes 66 2.11 Stimuli-Responsive Polymer Brushes 74 2.11.1 Stimuli-Responsive Solutions 76 2.11.2 Stimuli-Responsive Surfaces 78 2.12 Conclusion 79 Acknowledgments 80 References 80 3 Polymer Brushes by Surface-Mediated RAFT Polymerization for Biological Functions 97Tuncer Caykara 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Polymer Brushes via the Surface-Initiated RAFT Polymerization Process 99 3.3 Polymer Brushes via the Interface-Mediated RAFT Polymerization Process 101 3.3.1 pH-Responsive Brushes 102 3.3.2 Temperature-Responsive Brushes 106 3.3.3 Polymer Brushes on Gold Surface 110 3.3.4 Polymer Brushes on Nanoparticles 114 3.3.5 Micropatterned Polymer Brushes 115 3.4 Summary 117 References 119 4 Electro-Induced Copper-Catalyzed Surface Modification with Monolayer and Polymer Brush 123Bin Li and Feng Zhou 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 “Electro-Click” Chemistry 124 4.3 Electrochemically Induced Surface-Initiated Atom Transfer Radical Polymerization 129 4.4 Possible Combination of eATRP and “e-Click” Chemistry on Surface 136 4.5 Surface Functionality 136 4.6 Summary 137 Acknowledgments 138 References 138 5 Polymer Brushes on Flat and Curved Substrates:What Can be Learned fromMolecular Dynamics Simulations 141K. Binder, S.A. Egorov, and A.Milchev 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Molecular Dynamics Methods: A Short “Primer” 144 5.3 The Standard Bead Spring Model for Polymer Chains 148 5.4 Cylindrical and Spherical Polymer Brushes 150 5.5 Interaction of Brushes with Free Chains 152 5.6 Summary 153 Acknowledgments 156 References 157 6 Modeling of Chemical Equilibria in Polymer and Polyelectrolyte Brushes 161Rikkert J. Nap,Mario Tagliazucchi, Estefania Gonzalez Solveyra, Chun-lai Ren, Mark J. Uline, and Igal Szleifer 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Theoretical Approach 163 6.3 Applications of the Molecular Theory 177 6.3.1 Acid–Base Equilibrium in Polyelectrolyte Brushes 178 6.3.1.1 Effect of Salt Concentration and pH 178 6.3.1.2 Effect of Polymer Density and Geometry 184 6.3.2 Competition between Chemical Equilibria and Physical Interactions 186 6.3.2.1 Brushes of Strong Polyelectrolytes 186 6.3.2.2 Brushes ofWeak Polyelectrolytes: Self-Assembly in Charge-Regulating Systems 189 6.3.2.3 Redox-Active Polyelectrolyte Brushes 193 6.3.3 End-Tethered Single Stranded DNA in Aqueous Solutions 195 6.3.4 Ligand–Receptor Binding and Protein Adsorption to Polymer Brushes 201 6.3.5 Adsorption Equilibrium of Polymer Chains through Terminal Segments: Grafting-to Formation of Polymer Brushes 207 6.4 Summary and Conclusion 212 Acknowledgments 216 References 216 7 Brushes of Linear and Dendritically Branched Polyelectrolytes 223E. B. Zhulina, F. A. M. Leermakers, and O. V. Borisov 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Analytical SCF Theory of Brushes Formed by Linear and Branched Polyions 224 7.2.1 Dendron Architecture and System Parameters 225 7.2.2 Analytical SCF Formalism 226 7.3 Planar Brush of PE Dendrons with an Arbitrary Architecture 229 7.3.1 Asymptotic Dependences for Brush Thickness H 231 7.4 Planar Brush of Star-Like Polyelectrolytes 232 7.5 Threshold of Dendron Gaussian Elasticity 234 7.6 Scaling-Type Diagrams of States for Brushes of Linear and Branched Polyions 235 7.7 Numerical SF-SCF Model of Dendron Brush 236 7.8 Conclusions 238 References 239 8 Vapor Swelling of Hydrophilic Polymer Brushes 243Casey J. Galvin and Jan Genzer 8.1 Introduction 243 8.2 Experimental 245 8.2.1 General Methods 245 8.2.2 Synthesis of Poly((2-dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes with a Gradient in Grafting Density 245 8.2.3 Synthesis of Poly(2-(diethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes 245 8.2.4 Chemical Modification of Poly((2-dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes 246 8.2.5 Bulk Synthesis of PDMAEMA 246 8.2.6 Preparation of Spuncast PDMAEMA Films 246 8.2.7 Chemical Modification of Spuncast PDMAEMA Film 247 8.2.8 Spectroscopic EllipsometryMeasurements under Controlled Humidity Conditions 247 8.2.9 Spectroscopic EllipsometryMeasurements of Alcohol Exposure 247 8.2.10 Fitting Spectroscopic Ellipsometry Data 248 8.2.11 Infrared Variable Angle Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 248 8.3 Results and Discussion 248 8.3.1 Comparing Polymer Brush and Spuncast Polymer Film Swelling 250 8.3.2 Influence of Side Chain Chemistry on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 252 8.3.3 Influence of Solvent Vapor Chemistry on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 256 8.3.4 Influence of Grafting Density on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 259 8.4 Conclusion 262 8.A.1 Appendix 263 8.A.1.1 Mole Fraction Calculation 263 8.A.1.2 Water Cluster Number Calculation 264 Acknowledgments 265 References 265 9 Temperature Dependence of the Swelling and Surface Wettability of Dense Polymer Brushes 267Pengyu Zhuang, Ali Dirani, Karine Glinel, and AlainM. Jonas 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 The Swelling Coefficient of a Polymer Brush Mirrors Its Volume Hydrophilicity 269 9.3 The Cosine of the Contact Angle ofWater on aWater-Equilibrated Polymer Brush Defines Its Surface Hydrophilicity 270 9.4 Case Study: Temperature-Dependent Surface hydrophilicity of Dense PNIPAM Brushes 272 9.5 Case Study: Temperature-Dependent Swelling and Volume Hydrophilicity of Dense PNIPAMBrushes 274 9.6 Thermoresponsive Poly(oligo(ethylene oxide)methacrylate) Copolymer Brushes: Versatile Functional Alternatives to PNIPAM 277 9.7 Surface and Volume Hydrophilicity of Nonthermoresponsive Poly(oligo(ethylene oxide)methacrylate) Copolymer Brushes 279 9.8 Conclusions 282 Acknowledgments 283 References 283 10 Functional Biointerfaces Tailored by “Grafting-To”Brushes 287Eva Bittrich, Manfred Stamm, and Petra Uhlmann 10.1 Introduction 287 10.2 Part I: Polymer Brush Architectures 288 10.2.1 Design of Physicochemical Interfaces by Polymer Brushes 288 10.2.1.1 Stimuli-Responsive Homopolymer Brushes 288 10.2.1.2 Combination of Responses Using Mixed Polymer Brushes 290 10.2.1.3 Stimuli-Responsive Gradient Brushes 293 10.2.2 Modification of Polymer Brushes by Click Chemistry 293 10.2.2.1 Definition of Click Chemistry 293 10.2.2.2 Modification of End Groups of Grafted PNIPAAm Chains 295 10.2.3 Hybrid Brush Nanostructures 297 10.2.3.1 Nanoparticles Immobilized at Polymer Brushes 298 10.2.3.2 Sculptured Thin Films Grafted with Polymer Brushes 300 10.3 Part II: Actuating Biomolecule Interactions with Surfaces 303 10.3.1 Adsorption of Proteins to Polymer Brush Surfaces 303 10.3.1.1 Calculation of the Adsorbed Amount of Protein from Ellipsometric Experiments 305 10.3.1.2 Preventing Protein Adsorption 306 10.3.1.3 Adsorption at Polyelectrolyte Brushes 310 10.3.2 Polymer Brushes as Interfaces for Cell Adhesion and Interaction 313 10.3.2.1 Cell Adhesion on Stimuli-Responsive Polymer Surfaces Based on PNIPAAm Brushes 315 10.3.2.2 Growth Factors on Polymer Brushes 318 10.4 Conclusion and Outlook 320 Acknowledgments 321 References 321 11 Glycopolymer Brushes Presenting Sugars in Their Natural Form: Synthesis and Applications 333Kai Yu and Jayachandran N. Kizhakkedathu 11.1 Introduction and Background 333 11.2 Results and Discussion 334 11.2.1 Synthesis of Glycopolymer Brushes 334 11.2.1.1 Synthesis of N-Substituted Acrylamide Derivatives of Glycomonomers 334 11.2.1.2 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes on Gold Chip and SiliconWafer 334 11.2.1.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes on Polystyrene Particles 335 11.2.1.4 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes with Variation in the Composition of Carbohydrate Residues on SPR Chip 338 11.2.1.5 Preparation of Glycopolymer Brushes-Modified Particles with Different Grafting Density (Conformation) 338 11.2.2 Applications of Glycopolymer Brushes 341 11.2.2.1 Antithrombotic Surfaces Based on Glycopolymer Brushes 341 11.2.2.2 Glycopolymer Brushes Based Carbohydrate Arrays to Modulate Multivalent Protein Binding on Surfaces 345 11.2.2.3 Modulation of Innate Immune Response by the Conformation and Chemistry of Glycopolymer Brushes 351 11.3 Conclusions 356 Acknowledgments 357 References 357 12 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes for Thermally Modulated Cell Adhesion and Detachment 361Kenichi Nagase and Teruo Okano 12.1 Introduction 361 12.2 Thermoresponsive Polymer Hydrogel-Modified Surfaces for Cell Adhesion and Detachment 362 12.3 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes Prepared Using ATRP 363 12.4 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes Prepared by RAFT Polymerization 368 12.5 Conclusions 372 Acknowledgments 372 References 372 Volume 2 Preface xxi List of Contributors xxiii 13 Biomimetic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brush Coatings 377Dicky Pranantyo, Li Qun Xu, En-Tang Kang, Koon-Gee Neoh, and Serena Lay-Ming Teo 13.1 Introduction to Biofouling Management 377 13.2 Polymer Brushes for Surface Functionalization 378 13.3 Biomimetic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 379 13.3.1 Mussel Adhesive-Inspired Dopamine Anchors 379 13.3.1.1 Antifouling Polymer Brushes Prepared via the “Grafting-To” Approach on (poly)Dopamine Anchor 383 13.3.1.2 Antifouling Polymer Brushes Prepared via the “Grafting-From” Approach on (poly)Dopamine Anchor 386 13.3.1.3 Direct Grafting of Antifouling Polymer Brushes Containing Anchorable Dopamine-Derived Functionalities 389 13.3.2 (Poly)phenolic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 391 13.3.3 Biomolecular Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 393 13.4 Barnacle Cement as Anchor for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 397 13.5 Conclusion and Outlooks 399 References 400 14 Protein Adsorption Process Based on Molecular Interactions at Well-Defined Polymer Brush Surfaces 405Sho Sakata, Yuuki Inoue, and Kazuhiko Ishihara 14.1 Introduction 405 14.2 Utility of Polymer Brush Layers as Highly Controllable Polymer Surfaces 406 14.3 Performance of Polymer Brush Surfaces as Antifouling Biointerfaces 408 14.4 Elucidation of Protein Adsorption Based on Molecular Interaction Forces 412 14.5 Concluding Remarks 416 References 417 15 Are Lubricious Polymer Brushes Antifouling? Are Antifouling Polymer Brushes Lubricious? 421Edmondo M. Benetti and Nicholas D. Spencer 15.1 Introduction 421 15.2 Poly(ethylene glycol) Brushes 422 15.3 Beyond Simple PEG Brushes 424 15.4 Conclusion 429 References 429 16 Biofunctionalized Brush Surfaces for Biomolecular Sensing 433Shuaidi Zhang and Vladimir V. Tsukruk 16.1 Introduction 433 16.2 Biorecognition Units 435 16.2.1 Antibodies 435 16.2.2 Antibody Fragments 435 16.2.3 Aptamers 437 16.2.4 Peptide Aptamers 438 16.2.5 Enzymes 438 16.2.6 Peptide Nucleic Acid, Lectin, and Molecular Imprinted Polymers 439 16.3 Immobilization Strategy 439 16.3.1 Through Direct Covalent Linkage 440 16.3.1.1 Thiolated Aptamers on Noble Metal 440 16.3.1.2 General Activated Surface Chemistry 442 16.3.1.3 Diels–Alder Cycloaddition 444 16.3.1.4 Staudinger Ligation 444 16.3.1.5 1,3-Dipolar Cycloaddition 446 16.3.2 Through Affinity Tags 447 16.3.2.1 Biotin–Avidin/Streptavidin Pairing 447 16.3.2.2 NTA–Ni2+–Histidine Pairing 448 16.3.2.3 Protein A/Protein G – Fc Pairing 449 16.3.2.4 Oligonucleotide Hybridization 450 16.4 Microstructure and Morphology of Biobrush Layers 451 16.4.1 Grafting Density Control 451 16.4.2 Conformation and Orientation of Recognition Units 453 16.5 Transduction Schemes Based upon Grafted Biomolecules 462 16.5.1 Electrochemical-Based Sensors 462 16.5.2 Field Effect Transistor Based Sensors 463 16.5.3 SPR-Based Sensors 465 16.5.4 Photoluminescence-Based Sensors 466 16.5.5 SERS Sensors 468 16.5.6 Microcantilever Sensors 469 16.6 Conclusions 471 Acknowledgments 472 References 472 17 Phenylboronic Acid and Polymer Brushes: An Attractive Combination with Many Possibilities 479Solmaz Hajizadeh and Bo Mattiasson 17.1 Introduction: Polymer Brushes and Synthesis 479 17.2 Boronic Acid Brushes 481 17.3 Affinity Separation 483 17.4 Sensors 487 17.5 Biomedical Applications 492 17.6 Conclusions 494 References 494 18 Smart Surfaces Modified with Phenylboronic Acid Containing Polymer Brushes 497Hongliang Liu, ShutaoWang, and Lei Jiang 18.1 Introduction 497 18.2 Molecular Mechanism of PBA-Based Smart Surfaces 498 18.3 pH-Responsive Surfaces Modified with PBA Polymer Brush and Their Applications 501 18.4 Sugar-Responsive SurfacesModified with PBA Polymer Brush and Their Applications 503 18.5 PBA Polymer Brush–Based pH/Sugar Dual-Responsive OR Logic Gates and Their Applications 504 18.6 PBA Polymer Brush-Based pH/Sugar Dual-Responsive AND Logic Gates and Their Applications 506 18.7 PBA-Based Smart Systems beyond Polymer Brush and Their Applications 509 18.8 Conclusion and Perspective 511 References 512 19 Polymer Brushes andMicroorganisms 515Madeleine Ramstedt 19.1 Introduction 515 19.1.1 Societal Relevance for Surfaces Interacting with Microbes 515 19.1.2 Microorganisms 516 19.2 Brushes and Microbes 519 19.2.1 Adhesive Surfaces 529 19.2.2 Antifouling Surfaces 530 19.2.2.1 PEG-Based Brushes 531 19.2.2.2 Zwitterionic Brushes 533 19.2.2.3 Brush Density 533 19.2.2.4 Interactive Forces 535 19.2.2.5 Mechanical Interactions 537 19.2.3 Killing Surfaces 537 19.2.3.1 Antimicrobial Peptides 540 19.2.4 Brushes and Fungi 543 19.2.5 Brushes and Algae 546 19.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 549 Acknowledgments 551 References 552 20 Design of Polymer Brushes for Cell Culture and Cellular Delivery 557Danyang Li and Julien E. Gautrot Abbreviations 557 20.1 Introduction 559 20.2 Protein-Resistant Polymer Brushes for Tissue Engineering and In Vitro Assays 561 20.2.1 Design of Protein-Resistant Polymer Brushes 561 20.2.2 Cell-Resistant Polymer Brushes 565 20.2.3 Patterned Antifouling Brushes for the Development of Cell-Based Assays 567 20.3 Designing Brush Chemistry to Control Cell Adhesion and Proliferation 570 20.3.1 Polyelectrolyte Brushes for Cell Adhesion and Culture 570 20.3.2 Control of Surface Hydrophilicity 573 20.3.3 Surfaces with Controlled Stereochemistry 574 20.3.4 Switchable Brushes Displaying Responsive Behavior for Cell Harvesting and Detachment 576 20.4 Biofunctionalized Polymer Brushes to Regulate Cell Phenotype 581 20.4.1 Protein Coupling to Polymer Brushes to Control Cell Adhesion 581 20.4.2 Peptide-Functionalized Polymer Brushes to Regulate Cell Adhesion, Proliferation, Differentiation, and Migration 583 20.5 Polymer Brushes for Drug and Gene Delivery Applications 586 20.5.1 Polymer Brushes in Drug Delivery 586 20.5.2 Polymer Brushes in Gene Delivery 590 20.6 Summary 593 Acknowledgments 593 References 593 21 DNA Brushes: Self-Assembly, Physicochemical Properties, and Applications 605Ursula Koniges, Sade Ruffin, and Rastislav Levicky 21.1 Introduction 605 21.2 Applications 605 21.3 Preparation 607 21.4 Physicochemical Properties of DNA Brushes 610 21.5 Hybridization in DNA Brushes 613 21.6 Other Bioprocesses in DNA Brushes 618 21.7 Perspective 619 Acknowledgments 620 References 621 22 DNA Brushes: Advances in Synthesis and Applications 627Renpeng Gu, Lei Tang, Isao Aritome, and Stefan Zauscher 22.1 Introduction 627 22.2 Synthesis of DNA Brushes 628 22.2.1 Grafting-to Approaches 628 22.2.1.1 Immobilization on Gold Thin Films 628 22.2.1.2 Immobilization on Silicon-Based Substrates 632 22.2.2 Grafting-from Approaches 634 22.2.2.1 Surface-Initiated Enzymatic Polymerization 634 22.2.2.2 Surface-Initiated Rolling Circle Amplification 634 22.2.2.3 Surface-Initiated Hybridization Chain Reaction 634 22.2.3 Synthesis of DNA Brushes on Curved Surfaces 637 22.3 Properties and Applications of DNA Brushes 637 22.3.1 The Effect of DNA-Modifying Enzymes on the DNA Brush Structure 637 22.3.2 Stimulus-Responsive Conformational Changes of DNA Brushes 639 22.3.3 DNA Brush for Cell-Free Surface Protein Expression 643 22.3.4 DNA Brush-Modified Nanoparticles for Biomedical Applications 645 22.4 Conclusion and Outlook 649 References 649 23 Membrane Materials Form Polymer Brush Nanoparticles 655Erica Green, Emily Fullwood, Julieann Selden, and Ilya Zharov 23.1 Introduction 655 23.2 Colloidal Membranes Pore-Filled with Polymer Brushes 657 23.2.1 Preparation of Silica Colloidal Membranes 657 23.2.2 PAAM Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 658 23.2.3 PDMAEMA Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 659 23.2.4 PNIPAAM brush-filled silica colloidal membranes 664 23.2.5 Polyalanine Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 666 23.2.6 PMMA Brush-Filled SiO2@Au Colloidal Membranes 670 23.2.7 Colloidal Membranes Filled with Polymers Brushes Carrying Chiral Groups 672 23.2.8 pSPM and pSSA Brush-Filled Colloidal Nanopores 673 23.3 Self-Assembled PBNPs Membranes 676 23.3.1 PDMAEMA/PSPM Membranes 676 23.3.2 PHEMA Membranes 678 23.3.3 pSPM and pSSA Membranes 680 23.4 Summary 683 References 683 24 Responsive Polymer Networks and Brushes for Active Plasmonics 687Nestor Gisbert Quilis, Nityanand Sharma, Stefan Fossati,Wolfgang Knoll, and Jakub Dostalek 24.1 Introduction 687 24.2 Tuning Spectrum of Surface Plasmon Modes 688 24.3 Polymers Used for Actuating of Plasmonic Structures 692 24.3.1 Temperature-Responsive Polymers 692 24.3.2 Optical Stimulus 694 24.3.3 Electrochemical Stimulus 695 24.3.4 Chemical Stimulus 696 24.4 Imprinted Thermoresponsive Hydrogel Nanopillars 697 24.5 Thermoresponsive Hydrogel Nanogratings Fabricated by UV Laser Interference Lithography 699 24.6 Electrochemically Responsive Hydrogel Microgratings Prepared by UV Photolithography 702 24.7 Conclusions 705 Acknowledgments 706 References 706 25 Polymer Brushes as Interfacial Materials for Soft Metal Conductors and Electronics 709Casey Yan and Zijian Zheng 25.1 Introduction 709 25.2 Mechanisms of Polymer-Assisted Metal Deposition 712 25.3 Role of Polymer Brushes 716 25.4 Selection Criterion of Polymer Brushes Enabling PAMD 716 25.5 Strategies to Fabricate Patterned Metal Conductors 717 25.6 PAMD on Different Substrates and Their Applications in Soft Electronics 720 25.6.1 On Textiles 720 25.6.2 On Plastic Thin films 721 25.6.3 On Elastomers 724 25.6.4 On Sponges 728 25.7 Conclusion, Prospects, and Challenges 731 References 732 26 Nanoarchitectonic Design of Complex Materials Using Polymer Brushes as Structural and Functional Units 735M. Lorena Cortez, Gisela D´ýaz,Waldemar A. Marmisoll´e, Juan M. Giussi, and Omar Azzaroni 26.1 Introduction 735 26.2 Nanoparticles at Spherical Polymer Brushes: Hierarchical Nanoarchitectonic Construction of Complex Functional Materials 736 26.3 Nanotube and Nanowire Forests Bearing Polymer Brushes 737 26.3.1 Polymer Brushes on Surfaces DisplayingMicrotopographical Hierarchical Arrays 738 26.3.2 Environmentally Responsive Electrospun Nanofibers 740 26.4 Fabrication of Free-Standing “Soft” Micro- and Nanoobjects Using Polymer Brushes 741 26.5 Solid-State Polymer Electrolytes Based on Polymer Brush–Modified Colloidal Crystals 743 26.6 Proton-Conducting Membranes with Enhanced Properties Using Polymer Brushes 745 26.7 Hybrid Architectures Combining Mesoporous Materials and Responsive Polymer Brushes: Gated Molecular Transport Systems and Controlled Delivery Vehicles 747 26.8 Ensembles of Metal NanoparticlesModified with Polymer Brushes 750 26.9 Conclusions 754 Acknowledgments 755 References 755 Index 759

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 78th Glass Problem Conference (GPC) including the 11th Advances in Fusion and Processing of Glass (AFPG) Symposium is organized by the Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802 and The Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. The Program Director was S. K. Sundaram, Inamori Professor of Materials Science and Engineering, Kazuo Inamori School of Engineering, The New York State College of Ceramics, Alfred University, Alfred, NY 14802. The Conference Director was Robert Weisenburger Lipetz, Executive Director, Glass Manufacturing Industry Council (GMIC), Westerville, OH 43082. Donna Banks of the GMIC coordinated the events and provided support. The Conference started with a half-day plenary session followed by technical sessions. The themes and chairs of four half-day technical sessions were as follows: Modeling, Sensors, and Furnace DesignJames Uhlik, Toledo EngineTable of ContentsForeword ix Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii 78th GLASS PROBLEMS CONFERENCE Modeling, Sensors, and Furnace Design Optimization of Regenerator Design 5Oscar Verheijen, Luuk Thielen, Goetz Heilemann, and Elias Carrillo Glass Defects Identification using a Mass Spectrometer, SEMEDX Microanalysis and HTO Analysis 13Martina Jezikova, Filip Janos, Jiri Ullrich, and Erik Muijsenberg A New Radiometric Measurement Device for the Temperature of Ribbon Zones in Tin Bath and Lehrs 29Wolf Kuhn Furnace Design and Equipment for Extended Furnace Life 39Christoph Jatzauk Use of Continuous Infrared Temperature Image to Optimize Furnace Operations 4Neil G. Simpson, Mark Bennett, and S. Fiona Turner Refractories & Testing Acceptance Test of Fused Cast AZS Sidewall Blocks using Ground Penetrating Radar 59Dan Swiler and Daniel Ragland New Industry Standard in Furnace Inspection 75Yakup Bayram, Jon Wechsel, and Elmer Sperry Combustion Design and Implementation of OPTIMELT™ Heat Recovery for an Oxy-Fuel Furnace at Libbey Leerdam 89M. van Valburg and E. Sperry, S. Laux, R. Bell, A. Francis, and H. Kobayashi Maintaining Full Production in Furnaces with Failing Regenerators using Oxy-Fuel Combustion 99William J. Horan Heat-Oxy-Combustion Bi-Fuel Burner - Heavy Fuel Oil Trials 111S. Juma, X. Paubel, T. Kang, and L. Jarry Environmental & Safety Glass Furnace Catalytic Ceramic Filter Installation and Operation Experience 123Weijian Chen and Martin Schroter Glassil Dustshield™: A Materials Engineering Solution to Meet OSHA’S New Respirable Silica Regulations 157Greg Bedford, Ashley Rich, Emma Hansen, and John Jackson Deadly Dust: Reducing the Risks of Silica Dust in Glass Working Operations 165Greg Carmichael New Approach to Safety Estimation of Heat Soak Tested Thermally Toughened Safety Glass 169Andreas M. Kasper ADVANCES IN FUSION AND PROCESSING OF GLASS SYMPOSIUM Design of SLS Compositions for Accelerated Chemical StrengtheningWilliam C. LaCourse Warp Reduction in Thin Chemically Strengthened Float Glasses 191Arun K. Varshneya Research and Development of New Energy-Saving, Environmentally Friendly Fiber Glass Technology 201Hong Li The Relation between Furnace Efficiency and the Physics and Chemistry of the Melting Process 221Reinhard Conradt Gyrotron Based Melting 233Paul P. Woskov How the Industrial Revolution 4.0 Will Impact the Glass Industry Image Analysis that is Part of ES 4.0 is a Key Component towards Industry 4.0 247Erick Muijsenberg Modification of the Glass Surface during Manufacturing 263J.W. McCamy, A. Ganjoo, and C-H Hung

Read more less

Book SynopsisDeformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, Sixth Edition, provides a detailed examination of the mechanical behavior of metals, ceramics, polymers, and their composites. Offering an integrated macroscopic/microscopic approach to the subject, this comprehensive textbook features in-depth explanations, plentiful figures and illustrations, and a full array of student and instructor resources. Divided into two sections, the text first introduces the principles of elastic and plastic deformation, including the plastic deformation response of solids and concepts of stress, strain, and stiffness. The following section demonstrates the application of fracture mechanics and materials science principles in solids, including determining material stiffness, strength, toughness, and time-dependent mechanical response. Now offered as an interactive eBook, this fully-revised edition features a wealth of digital assets. More than three hours of high-quality video fooTable of ContentsForeword xvii Preface to the Sixth Edition xix The Comet and Titanic Disasters: Fiction Foreshadows Truth ! xix Additional References for Video Entitled "The Comet and Titanic Disasters: Fiction Foreshadows Truth!!" xix Stress Intensity Factor Formulations xx Elliptical and Penny-Shaped Stress Intensity Factors xx Multiplicity of Y-calibration Factors xx Design Concepts xx Estimation of Crack Tip Plastic Zone Size and Shear Lip Development xx Compact-Tension Fracture Toughness Test xx Fatigue Fracture xxi Extensive Folder of Powerpoint Slides xxii Chapter Thirteen: Final Thoughts xxii Dedication xxii Acknowledgments xxii About the Authors xxv Section One Recoverable and Nonrecoverable Deformation 1 Chapter 1 Elastic Response of Solids 3 1.1 Mechanical Testing 3 1.2 Definitions of Stress and Strain 4 1.3 Stress–Strain Curves for Uniaxial Loading 8 1.4 Nonaxial Testing 23 1.5 Multiaxial Linear Elastic Response 27 1.6 Elastic Anisotropy 34 1.7 Thermal Stresses and Thermal Shock-Induced Failure 50 Chapter 2 Yielding and Plastic Flow 63 2.1 Dislocations in Metals and Ceramics 63 2.2 Slip 81 2.3 Yield Criteria for Metals and Ceramics 88 2.4 Post-Yield Plastic Deformation 90 2.5 Slip in Single Crystals and Textured Materials 102 2.6 Deformation Twinning 111 2.7 Plasticity in Polymers 120 Chapter 3 Controlling Strength 143 3.1 Strengthening: A Definition 143 3.2 Strengthening of Metals 143 3.3 Strain (Work) Hardening 151 3.4 Boundary Strengthening 155 3.5 Solid Solution Strengthening 158 3.6 Precipitation Hardening 164 3.7 Dispersion Strengthening 170 3.8 Strengthening of Steel Alloys by Multiple Mechanisms 172 3.9 Metal-Matrix Composite Strengthening 175 3.10 Strengthening of Polymers 177 3.11 Polymer-Matrix Composites 182 Chapter 4 Time-Dependent Deformation 189 4.1 Time-Dependent Mechanical Behavior of Solids 189 4.2 Creep of Crystalline Solids: An Overview 191 4.3 Temperature–Stress–Strain-Rate Relations 195 4.4 Deformation Mechanisms 202 4.5 Superplasticity 205 4.6 Deformation-Mechanism Maps 208 4.7 Parametric Relations: Extrapolation Procedures for Creep Rupture Data 215 4.8 Materials for Elevated Temperature Use 220 4.9 Viscoelastic Response of Polymers and the Role of Structure 227 Section Two Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials 249 Chapter 5 Fracture: An Overview 251 5.1 Introduction 251 5.2 Theoretical Cohesive Strength 253 5.3 Defect Population in Solids 254 5.4 The Stress-Concentration Factor 260 5.5 Notch Strengthening 264 5.6 External Variables Affecting Fracture 265 5.7 Characterizing the Fracture Process 266 5.8 Macroscopic Fracture Characteristics 269 5.9 Microscopic Fracture Mechanisms 278 Chapter 6 Elements of Fracture Mechanics 299 6.1 Griffith Crack Theory 299 6.2 Charpy Impact Fracture Testing 307 6.3 Related Polymer Fracture Test Methods 311 6.4 Limitations of the Transition Temperature Philosophy 312 6.5 Stress Analysis of Cracks 315 FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 6.1: Fracture Toughness of Manatee Bones in Impact 327 6.6 Design Philosophy 328 6.7 Relation Between Energy Rate and Stress Field Approaches 330 6.8 Crack-Tip Plastic-Zone Size Estimation 332 6.9 Fracture-Mode Transition: Plane Stress Versus Plane Strain 336 FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 6.2: Analysis of Crack Development during Structural Fatigue Test 339 6.10 Plane-Strain Fracture-Toughness Testing of Metals and Ceramics 341 6.11 Fracture Toughness of Engineering Alloys 344 6.12 Plane-Stress Fracture-Toughness Testing 355 6.13 Toughness Determination from Crack-Opening Displacement Measurement 358 6.14 Fracture-Toughness Determination and Elastic-Plastic Analysis with the J Integral 360 6.14.1 Determination of JIC 362 6.15 Other Fracture Models 368 6.16 Fracture Mechanics and Adhesion Measurements 371 Chapter 7 Fracture Toughness 383 7.1 Some Useful Generalities 383 7.2 Intrinsic Toughness of Metals and Alloys 389 7.3 Toughening of Metals and Alloys Through Microstructural Anisotropy 402 7.4 Optimizing Toughness of Specific Alloy Systems 411 7.5 Toughness of Ceramics, Glasses, and Their Composites 416 7.6 Toughness of Polymers and Polymer-Matrix Composites 426 7.7 Natural and Biomimetic Materials 434 7.8 Metallurgical Embrittlement of Ferrous Alloys 440 7.9 Additional Data 449 Chapter 8 Environment-Assisted Cracking 463 8.1 Embrittlement Models 465 8.2 Fracture Mechanics Test Methods 472 8.3 Life and Crack-Length Calculations 492 Chapter 9 Cyclic Stress and Strain Fatigue 499 9.1 Macrofractography of Fatigue Failures 499 9.2 Cyclic Stress-Controlled Fatigue 503 9.3 Cyclic Strain-Controlled Fatigue 529 9.4 Fatigue Life Estimations for Notched Components 541 9.5 Fatigue Crack Initiation Mechanisms 545 9.6 Avoidance of Fatigue Damage 547 Chapter 10 Fatigue Crack Propagation 559 10.1 Stress and Crack Length Correlations with FCP 559 10.2 Macroscopic Fracture Modes in Fatigue 568 FATIGUE FAILURE ANALYSIS CASE STUDY 10.1: Stress Intensity Factor Estimate Based on Fatigue Growth Bands 571 10.3 Microscopic Fracture Mechanisms 572 10.4 Crack Growth Behavior at ΔK Extremes 578 10.5 Influence of Load Interactions 592 10.6 Environmentally Enhanced FCP (Corrosion Fatigue) 600 10.7 Microstructural Aspects of FCP in Metal Alloys 606 10.8 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Engineering Plastics 618 10.9 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Ceramics 628 10.10 Fatigue Crack Propagation in Composites 632 Chapter 11 Analyses of Engineering Failures 645 11.1 Typical Defects 647 11.2 Macroscopic Fracture Surface Examination 647 11.3 Metallographic and Fractographic Examination 651 11.4 Component Failure Analysis Data 652 11.5 Case Histories 652 CASE 1: Shotgun Barrel Failures 653 CASE 2: Analysis of Aileron Power Control Cylinder Service Failure 658 CASE 3: Failure of Pittsburgh Station Generator Rotor Forging 660 CASE 4: Stress Corrosion Cracking Failure of the Point Pleasant Bridge 661 CASE 5: Weld Cold Crack-Induced Failure of Kings Bridge, Melbourne, Australia 664 CASE 6: Failure Analysis of 175-mm Gun Tube 665 CASE 7: Hydrotest Failure of a 660-cm-Diameter Rocket Motor Casing 670 CASE 8: Premature Fracture of Powder-Pressing Die 673 CASE 9: A Laboratory Analysis of a Lavatory Failure 674 11.6 Additional Comments Regarding Welded Bridges 676 Chapter 12 Consequences of Product Failure 683 12.1 Introduction to Product Liability 683 12.2 History of Product Liability 684 12.3 Product Recall 697 RECALL CASE STUDY: The "Unstable" Ladder 708 Chapter 13 Final Thoughts 713 13.1 Funding Highway and Bridge Repairs 713 13.2 Nonredundant Bridges 715 13.3 Dee Bridge Collapse, Chester, England (1847) 716 13.4 A Final Reflection 718 Appendix A Fracture Surface Preservation, Cleaning and Replication Techniques, and Image Interpretation 721 A.1 Fracture Surface Preservation 721 A.2 Fracture Surface Cleaning 721 A.3 Replica Preparation and Image Interpretation 723 Appendix B K Calibrations for Typical Fracture Toughness and Fatigue Crack Propagation Test Specimens 727 Appendix C Y Calibration Factors for Elliptical and Semicircular Surface Flaws 731 Appendix D Suggested Checklist of Data Desirable for Complete Failure Analysis 733 Author Index 737 Materials Index 749 Subject Index 755

Read more less

Book SynopsisSPECTROSCOPY FOR MATERIALS CHARACTERIZATION Learn foundational and advanced spectroscopy techniques from leading researchers in physics, chemistry, surface science, and nanoscience In Spectroscopy for Materials Characterization, accomplished researcher Simonpietro Agnello delivers a practical and accessible compilation of various spectroscopy techniques taught and used to today. The book offers a wide-ranging approach taught by leading researchers working in physics, chemistry, surface science, and nanoscience. It is ideal for both new students and advanced researchers studying and working with spectroscopy. Topics such as confocal and two photon spectroscopy, as well as infrared absorption and Raman and micro-Raman spectroscopy, are discussed, as are thermally stimulated luminescence and spectroscopic studies of radiation effects on optical materials. Each chapter includes a basic introduction to the theory necessary to understand a specific technique, details about the characteristicTable of ContentsPreface xv List of Contributors xvii 1 Radiation–Matter Interaction Principles: Optical Absorption and Emission in the Visible-Ultraviolet Region 1Simonpietro Agnello 1.1 Empirical Aspects of Radiation–Matter Interaction 1 1.1.1 Optical Absorption: The Lambert–Beer Law 1 1.1.2 Emission: Fluorescence and Phosphorescence 5 1.2 Microscopic Point of View 7 1.2.1 Einstein Coefficients 7 1.2.2 Oscillator Strength, Lifetime, Quantum Yield 11 1.2.3 Vibronic States: Homogeneous and Inhomogeneous Lineshape 14 1.2.4 Jablonski Energy Level Diagram: Permitted and Forbidden Transitions 20 1.2.5 Excited States Rate Equations 22 1.3 Instrumental Setups 23 1.3.1 Typical Block Diagram of Spectrometers 23 1.3.2 Light Sources 24 1.3.3 Dispersion Elements: Gratings and Resolution Power 25 1.3.4 Detectors: Photodiode, Photomultiplier, Charge Coupled Device 27 1.4 Case Studies 29 1.4.1 Optical Absorption in Visible-Ultraviolet Range 29 1.4.1.1 Scanning Device (Bandwidth and Scanning Speed Effects) 29 1.4.1.2 CCD Fiber Optic Device 31 1.4.2 Photoluminescence 31 1.4.2.1 Emission and Excitation Spectra: Energy Levels Reconstruction 32 References 33 2 Time-Resolved Photoluminescence 35Marco Cannas and Lavinia Vaccaro 2.1 Introduction to Photoluminescence Spectroscopy 35 2.1.1 Photoluminescence Properties Related to Points Defects: Electron–Phonon Coupling 35 2.1.2 Optical Transitions: The Franck–Condon Principle 38 2.1.3 Zero-Phonon Line 40 2.1.4 Phonon Line Structure 43 2.1.5 Vibrational Structure 45 2.1.6 Inhomogeneous Effects 48 2.2 Experimental Methods and Analysis 48 2.2.1 Time-Resolved Luminescence 48 2.2.2 Site-Selective Luminescence 50 2.2.3 Basic Design of Experimental Setup: Pulsed Laser Sources; Monochromators; Detectors 51 2.2.3.1 Tunable Laser 52 2.2.3.2 Time-Resolved Detection System: Spectrograph and Intensified CCD Camera 52 2.3 Case Studies: Luminescent Point Defects in Amorphous SiO2 54 2.3.1 Emission Spectra and Lifetime Measurements 55 2.3.2 Zero-Phonon Line Probed by Site-Selective Luminescence 58 References 63 3 Ultrafast Optical Spectroscopies 65Alice Sciortino and Fabrizio Messina 3.1 Femtosecond Spectroscopy: An Overview 65 3.2 Ultrafast Optical Pulses 67 3.2.1 General Properties 67 3.2.1.1 Dispersion Effect: Group Velocity Dispersion 67 3.2.2 Nonlinear Optics: Basis and Applications 69 3.2.2.1 Second Harmonic Generation and Sum Frequency Generation 69 3.2.2.2 Noncollinear Optical Parametric Amplifier 70 3.2.2.3 Supercontinuum Generation 72 3.3 Transient Absorption Spectroscopy 73 3.3.1 The Experimental Method 74 3.3.2 Typical Experimental Setups 76 3.3.3 Data Analysis and Interpretation 78 3.4 Ultrafast Fluorescence Spectroscopies 79 3.4.1 FLUC: The Experimental Method 80 3.4.2 FLUC: Typical Experimental Setups 80 3.4.3 FLUC: Data Analysis and Interpretation 82 3.4.4 Kerr-Based Femtosecond Fluorescence Spectroscopy 82 3.5 Femtosecond Stimulated Raman Spectroscopy 83 3.5.1 The Experimental Method 83 3.5.2 Typical Experimental Setups 84 3.5.3 Data Analysis and Interpretation 87 3.6 Case Studies 88 3.6.1 Ultrafast Relaxation Dynamics of Molecules in Solution Phase 88 3.6.2 Relaxation of Excited Charge Carriers and Excitons in Semiconductor Nanoparticles 89 3.6.3 Ultrafast Relaxation Dynamics of Carbon-based Nanomaterials 91 References 92 4 Confocal and Two-Photon Spectroscopy 97Giuseppe Sancataldo and Valeria Vetri 4.1 Introduction and Historical Perspectives 97 4.1.1 Point Spread Function and Optical Resolution 98 4.1.2 Optical Sectioning and Imaging of 3D Samples 101 4.2 Fluorescence Imaging 102 4.2.1 Laser Scanning Confocal Fluorescence Microscope 103 4.2.2 Two-Photon Microscope 105 4.2.3 The Importance of Sample Preparation from Solid State to Dynamic Specimens 108 4.2.4 Setting Up a Measurement 109 4.3 Spectroscopy Using a Microscope 110 4.3.1 Observables in Fluorescence Microscopy 111 4.3.2 Measuring Dynamics: Gaining Information Below Resolution 113 4.4 Case Studies 117 4.4.1 Understanding Microstructures and Mechanistic Aspects in Materials 117 4.4.2 Fluctuation Methods for the Analysis of Nanosystems 121 References 124 5 Infrared Absorption Spectroscopy 129Tiziana Fiore and Claudia Pellerito 5.1 Fundamentals 129 5.1.1 Introduction 130 5.1.2 Basic Principles 130 5.1.3 Infrared Spectra 135 5.1.4 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrometers (Interferometers) 137 5.2 Sources and Detectors 140 5.3 Techniques and Sampling Methods 144 5.3.1 Transmission Methods 144 5.3.1.1 Solid Samples 144 5.3.1.2 Liquid and Solution Samples 147 5.3.1.3 Gas Samples 148 5.3.2 Attenuated Total Reflectance (ATR) Method 148 5.3.3 FTIR Microspectroscopy 150 5.3.4 AFM-IR Spectroscopy 150 5.3.5 Hyphenated Techniques 150 5.4 Applications and Case Studies 151 5.4.1 Chemical Characterization and Kinetics 151 5.4.2 Surfaces 152 5.4.3 Medical and Life Science (Pharmaceutical, Medical, Biological, Biotechnological) 153 5.4.4 Cultural Heritage and Forensic 156 5.4.5 Environmental and Geological 157 5.4.6 Food Industry 158 References 158 6 Raman and Micro-Raman Spectroscopy 169Giuliana Faggio, Rossella Grillo, and Giacomo Messina 6.1 Basic Theory 169 6.1.1 Introduction 169 6.1.2 Spectroscopic Units 169 6.1.3 Molecular Vibrations 170 6.1.4 Classical Theory of the Raman Scattering 171 6.1.5 Simplified Quantum Approach to Raman Scattering 174 6.1.6 Raman and IR Activities 178 6.1.7 Crystal Vibrations 180 6.1.8 Raman Scattering in Crystals 183 6.1.9 Surface-Enhanced Raman Scattering (SERS) 185 6.2 Instrumentation 187 6.2.1 Laser Sources and Optical Filters 187 6.2.2 Monochromators 188 6.2.3 Detectors 189 6.2.4 Raman Microscopy and Raman Mapping 189 6.3 Case Studies 191 6.3.1 Raman Indicators 191 6.3.2 Identification of Materials and Crystalline Quality 191 6.3.3 Graphene and Graphite Raman Spectra 193 6.3.4 Doping Detection 196 6.3.5 Basic Examples of SERS 196 References 198 7 Thermally Stimulated Luminescence 201Federico Moretti 7.1 Theory of Thermally Stimulated Luminescence 202 7.1.1 Simple Model 205 7.1.1.1 First-Order Kinetics 207 7.1.1.2 Second-Order Kinetics 211 7.1.1.3 General-Order Kinetics 211 7.1.2 Localized Transitions 213 7.1.3 Beyond the Ideal Behavior 214 7.1.3.1 Luminescence Quenching 215 7.1.3.2 Trap Energy Distributions 216 7.2 Data Analysis Methods 216 7.2.1 Initial Rise 217 7.2.2 Peak Shape 218 7.2.3 Heating Rate Method 220 7.2.4 Glow Curve Fit 221 7.3 Instrumentation and Considerations on Samples 221 7.4 Case Studies 222 7.4.1 Lanthanide Energy Level Position in the Bandgap 223 7.4.2 Bandgap Engineering 224 7.4.3 Correlation of TSL Data with EPR Results 225 Note 225 References 226 8 Spectroscopic Studies of Radiation Effects on Optical Materials 229Sylvain Girard, Vincenzo De Michele, and Adriana Morana 8.1 Introduction 229 8.1.1 Radiation Environments 229 8.1.2 Applications for Optical Materials 230 8.2 Radiation-Induced Effects on Optical Materials and Optical Fibers 231 8.2.1 Radiation-Induced Attenuation – RIA 231 8.2.2 Radiation-Induced Emission – RIE 233 8.2.3 Radiation-Induced Compaction – RIC and Refractive Index Change – RIRIC 234 8.2.4 Origins of Radiation-Induced Optical Changes 234 8.3 Radiation-Induced Attenuation Measurements 235 8.3.1 Postirradiation RIA Measurements 235 8.3.1.1 Bulk Glasses 235 8.3.1.2 Optical Fibers 235 8.3.2 In Situ RIA Measurements 236 8.3.2.1 Bulk Glasses 236 8.3.2.2 Optical Fibers 237 8.3.3 Exploitation of RIA Spectra: Point Defect Identification 241 8.3.3.1 Spectral Decomposition 241 8.3.3.2 Point Defect Kinetics 243 8.4 Radiation-Induced Luminescence (RIL) 243 8.4.1 Architectures of Fiber-Based Sensors: Extrinsic and Intrinsic 243 8.4.2 Calibration of the RIL Versus Proton Flux 245 8.4.3 Bragg Peak Measurements for Proton-Therapy Applications 245 8.5 Case Studies 246 8.5.1 Characterization of Bulk Glasses for Space Optical Systems 246 8.5.2 Fiber-Based Dosimetry with Phosphorus-Doped Optical Fibers 247 8.5.3 Proton Flux Measurements Through the RIL of Optical Fibers 249 References 249 9 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy (EPR) 253Antonino Alessi and Franco Gelardi 9.1 Introduction 253 9.2 Basic Principle of EPR 253 9.3 Anisotropy of g and Spectral Lineshape 255 9.4 The EPR Lineshape in Powder or in Amorphous 257 9.5 Hyperfine Interactions 258 9.6 Paramagnetic Center with S = 1 261 9.7 Basics of Continuous Wave EPR Setup 263 9.8 Parameters for EPR Signal Acquisition 266 9.9 Cw EPR Case Studies 268 9.10 Time-Resolved EPR Spectroscopy 270 9.10.1 Saturation Transients 270 9.10.2 Spin Nutations 272 9.10.3 Free Induction Decay 274 9.10.4 Spin Echo 276 References 277 10 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 281Alberto Spinella and Pellegrino Conte 10.1 Introduction 281 10.2 NMR General Concepts 281 10.2.1 Nuclear Spin and Magnetic Moment 281 10.2.2 Spin Precession and Larmor Frequency 283 10.2.3 Longitudinal Magnetization 283 10.2.4 Transverse Magnetization and NMR Signal 284 10.2.5 Spin Interactions 285 10.2.6 Fourier Transform NMR 287 10.3 Liquid-State NMR 288 10.3.1 The NMR Spectrometer 288 10.3.2 Sample Preparation 288 10.3.3 How to Set an Experiment 289 10.3.4 Longitudinal Relaxation Time Measurement 289 10.3.5 Transverse Relaxation Time Measurement 290 10.3.6 2D-Liquid-State NMR Techniques 291 10.3.7 Considerations on the Molecular Dynamics by NMR Spectroscopy 292 10.4 Solid-State NMR 293 10.4.1 Powdered Samples 293 10.4.2 Cross-Polarization and Heteronuclear Decoupling 294 10.4.3 Magic-Angle Spinning 296 10.4.4 Homonuclear Dipolar Decoupling 299 10.4.5 2D-Solid State NMR Techniques 299 10.4.6 Recoupling Techniques 300 10.4.7 Molecular Dynamics by Solid-State NMR Spectroscopy 301 10.5 Nonconventional NMR Techniques 301 10.5.1 Time Domain NMR 302 10.5.2 Fast Field Cycling NMR Relaxometry 302 10.5.3 Earth’s Magnetic Field NMR 309 10.6 Case Studies 309 10.6.1 Polymers and Polymer-Based Composites 309 10.6.2 Mesoporous Materials 310 10.6.3 Cultural Heritage 311 10.6.4 Food 313 10.6.5 Environmental NMR: Rocks, Soils, Waters, Air 313 10.6.6 NMR of “Exotic” Nuclei 314 References 315 11 X-Ray Absorption Spectroscopy and X-Ray Raman Scattering Spectroscopy for Energy Applications 319Alessandro Longo, Francesco Giannici, and Christoph J. Sahle 11.1 Introduction 319 11.2 The X-Ray Absorption Coefficient and the EXAFS Technique 320 11.2.1 The EXAFS Equation and the Key Approximations 322 11.2.1.1 Many-Body Effects 323 11.2.1.2 Inelastic Effects 324 11.2.2 Multiple Scattering Theory: Basic Information 325 11.2.3 XANES or Near-Edge X-Ray Absorption Fine Structure and Pre-Edge Region 328 11.3 EXAFS: Data Analysis Overview 331 11.4 Experimental Setups 333 11.4.1 Transmission Geometry 333 11.4.2 Fluorescence Geometry 334 11.5 X-Ray Raman Scattering Spectroscopy 335 11.5.1 Theoretical Background 335 11.5.2 Experimental Setup 338 11.5.2.1 Instrumentation 338 11.5.2.2 Data Processing 338 11.6 Case Studies: Application of XAFS and XRS for Energy Materials 339 11.6.1 CO Oxidation Reaction: The Au/CeO2 Catalyst 339 11.6.2 Materials for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 340 11.6.3 Oxide-Ion Conductors: Dopants and Vacancies 342 11.6.4 Proton-Conducting Oxides 343 11.6.5 The Role of Oxygen in Fuel Cell Cathodes 344 References 346 12 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 351Michelangelo Scopelliti 12.1 General Principles 351 12.2 Instrumental Setup 352 12.2.1 Vacuum and Ultrahigh Vacuum, UHV 353 12.2.1.1 Roughing Pumps 354 12.2.1.2 Turbomolecular Pumps 355 12.2.1.3 Ion Pumps 355 12.2.1.4 Titanium Sublimation Pumps 356 12.2.2 Magnetic Shielding 356 12.2.3 Sources 356 12.2.4 Sample Manipulators 358 12.2.5 Charge Neutralization Systems 359 12.2.5.1 Electron Guns 360 12.2.5.2 Ion Guns 360 12.2.6 Analyzers and Detectors 361 12.3 Applications 362 12.3.1 Quantitative Analysis 364 12.3.2 Qualitative Analysis 365 12.3.3 Surface Maps 365 12.3.4 Profiles 367 12.3.4.1 Depth Profiles 367 12.3.4.2 Angle-Resolved Profiles 368 12.4 Data Analysis 368 12.4.1 Shift Corrections 370 12.4.2 Background 371 12.4.3 Line Shapes 372 12.4.4 Nonlinear Fitting 375 12.5 Case Studies 376 12.5.1 Hydrocarbon Contamination 376 12.5.2 Energy Loss 376 12.5.3 Depth Profiles/1 378 12.5.4 Depth Profiles/2 379 References 380 13 Ultraviolet Photoelectron Spectroscopy – Materials Science Technique 383Dmitry A. Zatsepin and Anatoly F. Zatsepin 13.1 UPS History and Capabilities 383 13.2 Theory and Experimental Methodology of UPS 384 13.2.1 Physical Principles of UPS 384 13.2.2 Angle-Resolved UPS 389 13.3 UPS Experiment and Factors of Influence 391 13.3.1 Vacuum System and Pumping 391 13.3.2 Sample and External Spectral Standard Preparation 392 13.3.3 Ultraviolet Source 395 13.3.4 Charge Neutralizer 397 13.3.5 Staff Requirements 400 References 401 14 Transmission Electron Spectroscopy 405Raffaele Giuseppe Agostino and Vincenzo Formoso 14.1 Empirical Aspects of Electron–Matter Interaction 405 14.1.1 Fast Electrons Interaction with a Solid 405 14.1.2 Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy (EELS) 406 14.1.2.1 Inner Shell Excitations 408 14.1.2.2 Low-Loss Excitations 411 14.1.2.3 Energy-Filtered Images 413 14.2 Instrumental Setups 415 14.2.1 TEM in a Nutshell 415 References 422 15 Atomic Force Microscopy and Spectroscopy 425Gianpiero Buscarino 15.1 Introduction 425 15.2 The AFM Microscope 426 15.2.1 The Probe 426 15.2.2 Harmonic Excitation of the Cantilever 427 15.2.3 Scanning System 428 15.2.4 Measurement of the Cantilever’s Deflection 430 15.2.5 Feedback System 432 15.3 Tip–Surface Interaction Forces 432 15.3.1 Van der Waals 433 15.3.2 Short-Range Repulsive 434 15.3.3 Adhesion 435 15.3.4 Capillary 438 15.3.5 Other Forces 439 15.4 AFM Acquisition Modes 440 15.4.1 Contact Mode 440 15.4.2 Tapping Mode 442 15.5 AFM Spectroscopy 451 15.6 Case Studies 454 15.6.1 Roughness of a Flat Surface 454 15.6.2 Size Distribution of Nanoparticles 456 References 458 Index 461

Read more less

Book SynopsisGroup III-Nitride Semiconductor Optoelectronics Discover a comprehensive exploration of the foundations and frontiers of the optoelectronics technology of group-III nitrides and their ternary alloys In Group III-Nitride Semiconductor Optoelectronics, expert engineer Dr. C. Jayant Praharaj delivers an insightful overview of the optoelectronic applications of group III-nitride semiconductors. The book covers all relevant aspects of optical emission and detection, including the challenges of optoelectronic integration and a detailed comparison with other material systems. The author discusses band structure and optical properties of III-nitride semiconductors, as well as the properties of their low-dimensional structures. He also describes different optoelectronic systems such as LEDs, lasers, photodetectors, and optoelectronic integrated circuits. Group III-Nitride Semiconductor Optoelectronics covers both the fundamentals of the field and the mostTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Band Structure and Optical Properties of Group III-Nitride Semiconductors 3 Crystal Symmetry (Wurtzite and Cubic Phases) 3 Lattice Periodicity and Crystal Hamiltonian 4 Bloch’s Theorem and Nature of Electron States 4 Quantum Mechanical Properties Corresponding to Bloch States 5 Light–Matter Interaction in Semiconductors 7 Spontaneous and Piezoelectric Polarization 11 Phonon Spectrum 13 Scattering Mechanisms 13 Donors and Deep Acceptors 17 3 Growth and Doping of Group III-Nitride Devices 19 Major Epitaxial Growth Methods 19 In Situ and Implant Doping 31 Dislocations and Point Defects 31 Dopant-induced Defects 31 Substrates and Growth 31 Gallium Nitride Growth on Silicon Substrates 32 4 Optical Properties of Low-dimensional Structures in Group III Nitrides 39 Quantum Wells, Quantum Wires, and Quantum Dots 39 The k.p Method 43 Crystal Symmetry and Low-dimensional Structures 50 Alloy Disorder and Density Functional Theory Electronic Structure Calculation 51 Deviations from Charge Neutrality and Effect on Electronic Structure 54 Polarization Engineering Using Quaternaries and Complex Structures 55 Dislocations in Low-dimensional Structures and Carrier Dynamics 57 Disorder, Carrier Localization, and Effect on Recombination and Red Shifts 57 5 Light-emitting Diodes and Lasers 67 Blue, Green, and Ultraviolet (UV) LEDs 67 Light-emitting Diode Basic Operating Principles 71 Blue, Green, and UV Lasers 72 Blue, Green, and Device Laser Materials – Device Considerations 78 Nanowire microLEDs 80 LED Quantum Efficiencies and Laser Threshold Currents in Quantum Wires and Quantum Dots 80 Auger Recombination and Efficiency Droop in Group III-Nitride LEDs 82 Dislocations in Low-dimensional Structures and Carrier Dynamics 86 Disorder, Carrier Localization, and Effect on Recombination and Red Shifts 87 Staggered Quantum-well InGaN Laser Characteristics 87 Non-polar Plane Quantum-well InGaN LEDs and Lasers 89 Semi-polar Plane Quantum-well InGaN LEDs and Lasers 90 p-Type Ohmic Contacts and Efficiency of LEDs and Lasers 91 Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Lasers 93 Distributed Feedback Lasers 94 Plasmonic Nanolasers 94 Indium Gallium Nitride LEDs and Lasers on Si Substrates 95 6 Inter Sub-band Devices 103 Quantum Cascade Lasers 103 Infrared Photodetectors 103 7 Photodetectors 111 Ultraviolet Photodetectors 111 Complex Dielectric Function 111 Basic Principle of Operation 113 Metal–Semiconductor–Metal (MSM) Photodetector 115 Solar-blind Group III-Nitride UV Photodetectors 118 p-i-n Photodiodes 118 Schottky Barrier Photodiodes 123 Heterogenous Photodiodes with Group III Nitrides and Transition Metal Dichalcogenides 123 Alloy Nitrides and Spectral Response 124 Photodetectors and Substrate Engineering 125 8 Photovoltaics and Energy Conversion Devices 129 Indium Gallium Nitride Material System for Solar Cells 129 Basic Solar Cell Physics – p-n Junction Solar Cells 129 Intermediate Band Solar Cells 137 Substrate Effects on InGaN Solar Cells 139 Ohmic Contact Effects in p-n and p-i-n InGaN Solar Cells 140 Plasmonically Enhanced Solar Cells 140 Solar Concentrating Photovoltaics 140 Tandem Solar Cells Using Indium Gallium Nitride 141 Semiconductor Photocatalysis Using InGaN 143 9 Quantum Photonic Properties of Nitride Semiconductor Devices 147 Non-classical Light from Group III-Nitride Heterostructures 147 Spontaneous and Piezoelectric Polarization Effects 150 Spectral Diffusion in Quantum Dots 151 Photon Linewidths 152 Optically Pumped Versus Electrically Pumped Quantum Emitters 152 Photon Detection Properties 152 10 Polaritons in Nitride Semiconductor Heterostructures 155 Strong Coupling between Excitons and Cavity Modes 155 Conditions for Strong Coupling 155 Energies of Polariton Modes 156 Characterization of Polariton Modes 156 Polaritonic Lasing versus Photonic Lasing 157 Exciton Binding Energies and Polaritonic Lasing 159 Spontaneous and Piezoelectric Polarization Effects 160 Optically Pumped versus Electrically Pumped Polariton Lasers 161 Inhomogeneous Broadening in Polaritonic Lasing 161 Polariton Lasing in Quantum Heterostructure Nanocavities 162 11 Plasmon-coupled Group III-Nitride Optoelectronic Devices 163 Coupling between Localized Surface Plasmons (LSPs) and Quantum Wells 163 LEDs and Lasers Based on LSPR Coupling 163 Biosensing Schemes Based on LSPR/QW Coupling 164 InGaN QW Substrates for Surface-enhanced Raman Scattering (SERS) Extended Hotspots 165 InGaN Nanorods Plus Metal NPs for Water Splitting Using SPR Effects 166 InGaN QDs Plus Metal NPs for Water Splitting Using SPR Effects 168 12 Photonic Integrated Circuits Using Group III-Nitride Semiconductors 169 Indium Gallium Nitride (InGaN)-based Monolithic Photonic Chips 169 Photonic Integrated Circuits with Plasmonic Components 170 Exploring Modulators Using Nitrides for Easier Integration 170 Combining Photonic and Electronic Components on the Same Chip 171 Monolithically Integrated Multi-color LED Display on a Single Chip 171 13 Conclusion 173 Index 175

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe new edition of LaQue''s classic text on marine corrosion, providing fully updated control engineering practices and applications Extensively updated throughout, the second edition of La Que''s Handbook of Marine Corrosion remains the standard single-source reference on the unique nature of seawater as a corrosive environment. Designed to help readers reduce operational and life cycle costs for materials in marine environments, this authoritative resource provides clear guidance on design, materials selection, and implementation of corrosion control engineering practices for materials in atmospheric, immersion, or wetted marine environments. Completely rewritten for the 21st century, this new edition reflects current environmental regulations, best practices, materials, and processes, with special emphasis placed on the engineering, behavior, and practical applications of materials. Divided into three parts, the book first explains the fundamentals of Table of ContentsList of Contributors xix Preface xxi 1 The Nature of Marine Environments 1Bopinder Phull 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Seawater Chemistry 2 1.2.1 Chemical Composition of Seawater 2 1.2.1.1 Role of Ions 3 1.2.1.2 Dissolved Gases 5 1.2.1.3 Scale-Forming Compounds 8 1.2.1.4 Suspended Matter 9 1.2.1.5 pH 10 1.2.1.6 Chlorination 10 1.3 Physical 11 1.3.1 Temperature 11 1.3.2 Electrolytic Resistivity of Seawater 13 1.3.3 Velocity Effects 14 1.3.4 Effects of Depth 17 1.3.5 Splash and Tidal Zones 18 1.3.6 Bottom Sediments 20 1.4 Biological Effects 21 1.4.1 Microorganisms, Biofilms, and Biofouling 21 1.5 Testing 24 References 25 2 Electrochemistry and Forms of Corrosion 29David A. Shifler 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Corrosion Thermodynamics 30 2.3 Corrosion Kinetics 30 2.4 Passivity 33 2.5 Corrosion Mechanistic Modes 34 2.5.1 Stray Current Corrosion 35 2.5.2 Galvanic Corrosion 35 2.5.3 Crevice Corrosion 37 2.5.4 Pitting 38 2.5.5 Intergranular Corrosion 38 2.5.6 Microbiological-Influenced Corrosion 40 2.5.7 Dealloying 41 2.5.8 Flow-Influenced Corrosion 42 2.6 Environmentally Induced Cracking 43 2.6.1 Stress Corrosion Cracking 43 2.6.2 Fatigue and Corrosion Fatigue 44 2.6.3 High-Temperature Corrosion 45 2.7 Factors Influencing Corrosion 46 References 47 3 Atmospheric Corrosion in Marine Environments 49David G. Enos 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Understanding the Environment (Important Factors) 49 3.2.1 Humidity 51 3.2.2 Temperature 53 3.2.3 Solid and Liquid Contaminants (Salt Particulates, Seawater Aerosol, Dust, etc.) 53 3.2.4 Gaseous Contaminants 55 3.2.5 Physical Environment 55 3.3 Basic Electrochemistry of Atmospheric Corrosion 57 3.4 Corrosion Testing 59 3.4.1 Accelerated Testing 59 3.4.2 Long-Term Field Testing 59 3.5 Modeling 59 3.6 Summary 60 Acknowledgment 60 References 60 4 Localized Corrosion 63David A. Shifler 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Pitting 63 4.2.1 Cast Irons 65 4.2.2 Carbon Steels 66 4.2.3 Stainless Steels 66 4.2.4 Nickel Alloys 69 4.2.5 Aluminum Alloys 72 4.2.6 Copper Alloys 73 4.2.7 Titanium Alloys 77 4.3 Crevice Corrosion 78 4.3.1 Cast Irons 81 4.3.2 Carbon Steels 82 4.3.3 Stainless Steels 82 4.3.4 Nickel Alloys 86 4.3.5 Aluminum Alloys 89 4.3.6 Copper Alloys 91 4.3.7 Titanium Alloys 92 4.4 Intergranular Corrosion 93 4.4.1 Cast Irons 94 4.4.2 Carbon Steels 94 4.4.3 Stainless Steels 95 4.4.4 Nickel Alloys 97 4.4.5 Aluminum Alloys 98 4.4.6 Copper Alloys 101 4.4.7 Titanium Alloys 102 4.5 Dealloying 102 4.5.1 Cast Irons 103 4.5.2 Carbon Steels 104 4.5.3 Stainless Steels 104 4.5.4 Nickel Alloys 104 4.5.5 Aluminum Alloys 104 4.5.6 Copper Alloys 105 4.5.7 Titanium Alloys 108 References 108 Further Reading 121 5 Galvanic Corrosion 123Roger Francis 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Conditions Necessary for Galvanic Corrosion 124 5.3 Factors Affecting Galvanic Corrosion 125 5.3.1 Electrode Potential 125 5.3.2 Potential Variability 126 5.3.3 Electrode Efficiency 127 5.3.4 Electrolyte 129 5.3.5 Area Ratio 129 5.3.6 Aeration and Flow Rate 132 5.3.7 Metallurgical Condition and Composition 133 5.3.8 Stifling Effects 134 5.4 Alloy Groups 135 5.4.1 Group 1 Alloys 136 5.4.2 Group 2 Alloys 136 5.4.3 Group 3 Alloys 138 5.4.4 Group 4 Alloys 140 5.5 Marine Atmospheres 142 5.5.1 Factors Affecting Atmospheric Corrosion 142 5.5.2 Materials Compatibility 143 5.5.3 Atmospheric Variability 145 5.5.4 Tropical Atmospheres 145 5.6 Methods of Prevention 147 5.6.1 Materials 147 5.6.2 Insulation and Separation 147 5.6.3 Painting/Coatings 148 5.6.4 Cathodic Protection (CP) 149 5.6.5 Inhibitors 150 5.7 Design 150 References 151 6 The Effects of Turbulent Flow on Corrosion in Seawater 155K. Daniel Efird 6.1 Introduction 155 6.1.1 Evaluating Flow Effects 155 6.2 The Basics of Turbulent Flow and Corrosion 156 6.2.1 The Nature of Turbulent Flow 156 6.2.2 Disturbed Flow 159 6.3 Erosion-Corrosion 159 6.3.1 Cavitation Corrosion 160 6.4 Flow Effects for Specific Materials 161 6.4.1 Carbon and Low Alloy Steels and Cast Irons 161 6.4.2 Copper Alloys 162 6.4.3 Passive Alloys 163 6.5 Flow Effects in Specific Facility Applications 164 6.A Wall Shear Stress and Mass Transfer Coefficient Defined 167 6.A.1 Wall Shear Stress 167 6.A.2 Mass Transfer Coefficient 168 6.A.3 Interrelationship of Mass Transfer Coefficient and Wall Shear Stress 168 6.B University of Tulsa Erosion Model 169 References 169 7 Biological Fouling and Corrosion Processes 173Brenda J. Little and Jason S. Lee 7.1 Introduction 173 7.2 Development of Marine Fouling 174 7.2.1 Microfouling 174 7.2.2 Macrofouling 176 7.3 Influence of Marine Fouling on Corrosion 177 7.3.1 Corrosion Mechanisms Related to Generic Properties of Fouling Organisms 177 7.3.1.1 Oxygen Concentration Cells 177 7.3.1.2 Ennoblement 178 7.3.1.3 Galvanic Corrosion 178 7.3.2 Reactions Attributed to Specific Groups of Bacteria and Archaea 179 7.3.2.1 Sulfate Reduction 179 7.3.2.2 Sulfide Reactions with Specific Metals 179 7.3.2.3 Acid Production 181 7.3.2.4 Microbial Oxidation/Reduction of Iron 181 7.4 Diagnosis 182 7.5 Control and Prevention 182 7.5.1 Coatings 183 7.5.2 Biocidal Treatments 183 7.5.3 Cathodic Protection 183 7.5.4 Deoxygenation 184 7.5.5 Flow 185 7.6 Commentary 185 References 186 8 Marine Biofouling 191Simone Dürr, Robert Edyvean, and Eleanor Ramsden-Lister 8.1 What Is Biofouling? 191 8.2 Development of Biofouling on New Artificial Surfaces 192 8.2.1 Macromolecules (Conditioning Film) 192 8.2.2 Bacteria 192 8.2.3 Diatoms, Protozoans 195 8.2.4 Larvae and Spores 195 8.3 Established Biofouling Communities 197 8.4 The Effect of Biofouling on the Corrosion of Metals in the Marine Environment 199 8.5 Past and Present Antifouling Strategies on Metals Used in the Marine Environment 201 8.5.1 Tributyltin (TBT) Self-Polishing Copolymer Paints 201 8.5.2 Controlled Depletion Polymers (CDPs)/Self-Polishing Containing Biocides and Booster Biocides 201 8.5.3 Foul Release Coatings 202 8.5.4 Electrochemical Control 203 8.5.5 Electrochlorination 204 8.5.6 Ultrasonics for Antifouling 204 8.5.7 Mechanical Cleaning and Prevention 205 8.5.8 Enzymes 205 8.5.9 Biomimetics and Bioinspiration 206 8.6 Conclusion 206 References 207 9 Environmentally Enhanced Fatigue 215James Burns 9.1 Introduction 215 9.2 Precorrosion Effects 218 9.3 Loading Environment Effects 221 9.4 Crack Initiation 221 9.5 Crack Propagation 223 9.5.1 Aluminum 223 9.5.2 Titanium 225 9.5.3 Steel 226 9.6 Effect of Corrosion Mitigation Techniques on Fatigue 230 9.7 Conclusion 231 References 232 10 Effects of Stress – Environment Assisted Cracking 239John R. Scully 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 High-Strength Steels 242 10.2.1 Physical Metallurgy 242 10.2.2 General Susceptibility Trends 243 10.2.3 Dependence on Applied Potential 245 10.3 Stainless Steels 249 10.3.1 Physical Metallurgy 249 10.3.2 General Susceptibility Trends 251 10.3.3 Dependence on Applied Potential 254 10.4 Precipitation Hardened Stainless Steels 254 10.4.1 Physical and Mechanical Metallurgy of Precipitation Hardened Stainless Steel 254 10.4.2 General Susceptibility Trends 255 10.4.3 Effect of Applied Potential 260 10.5 Titanium Alloys 261 10.5.1 Physical Metallurgy 261 10.5.2 General Susceptibility Trends 263 10.5.3 Effect of Potential 264 10.6 High-Strength Aluminum Alloys 266 10.6.1 Physical Metallurgy 266 10.6.2 General Susceptibility Trends 268 10.6.3 Effects of Potential 271 10.7 Nickel Base Alloys 272 10.7.1 Physical Metallurgy 272 10.7.2 General Susceptibility Trends 273 10.7.2.1 Effects of Applied Potential 277 10.8 Copper, Copper Alloys, and Aluminum Bronze Alloys 277 10.8.1 Physical Metallurgy 277 10.8.2 General Susceptibility Trends 278 10.9 Magnesium Alloys 279 10.9.1 Physical Metallurgy 279 10.9.2 General Susceptibility Trends and Effects of Potential 279 References 280 11 Cathodic Delamination 291Thomas Ramotowski 11.1 Introduction 291 11.2 Mechanisms for Cathodic Delamination 293 11.3 Cathodic Delamination Mitigation Strategies 296 References 298 12 High Temperature Corrosion in Marine Environments 301David A. Shifler 12.1 Introduction 301 12.1.1 High Temperature Corrosion and Degradation Processes 301 12.2 Boilers 302 12.3 Diesel Engines 306 12.4 Gas Turbine Engines 309 12.4.1 High-Temperature Coatings 317 12.4.2 Factors Affecting Operational Life 319 12.5 Incinerators 319 12.6 Fuels 324 References 328 13 Design for Corrosion Control in Marine Environments 335David A. Shifler 13.1 Introduction 335 13.2 General Design Approach 336 13.3 Corrosion Control Design Choices for Marine Structures 339 13.3.1 Materials 339 13.3.2 Organic Coatings 339 13.3.3 Metallic Coatings 340 13.3.4 Cathodic Protection 341 13.3.5 Inhibitors 341 13.4 Structural Designs that Minimize Corrosion 342 13.5 Inspection to Evaluate Conformance to Design, Repair Criteria 345 13.6 Ship Design in Marine Environments 346 13.6.1 Military Ships and Assets 346 13.6.2 Commercial Ship Design 348 13.6.3 Cruise Ship Design 349 13.7 Offshore Structural Design in Marine Environments 350 13.8 Summary 351 References 351 Further Reading 353 Ships 353 Offshore Structures 354 14 Modeling of Marine Corrosion Processes 355Jason S. Lee, David G. Enos, Roger Francis, Sean Brossia, and David A. Shifler 14.1 Introduction 355 14.2 Computational Approaches 355 14.3 Assumptions in Modeling 356 14.4 Galvanic Corrosion 357 14.5 Localized Corrosion 359 14.5.1 Crevices 360 14.5.2 Cracks 363 14.5.3 Pitting 363 14.5.4 Intergranular Corrosion 364 14.6 General Corrosion 364 14.7 Atmospheric Corrosion Models 365 14.7.1 Holistic Atmospheric Corrosion Model 365 14.7.2 GILDES Model 366 14.8 Cathodic Protection 367 14.9 Recent Modeling Advances 369 14.9.1 Future Directions of DFT 370 14.10 Limitations and Future Needs 371 14.11 Summary 372 References 373 15 Marine Corrosion Testing 379David A. Shifler and David G. Enos 15.1 Introduction 379 15.2 Corrosion Test Planning 379 15.3 Types of Corrosion Testing 381 15.3.1 Laboratory Testing 381 15.3.2 Salt Spray/Salt Fog Testing 383 15.3.2.1 Types of Salt Spray Environments 384 15.3.2.2 Limitations of Salt Spray Testing 385 15.3.3 Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Exposure Testing 386 15.3.4 Immersion Testing 389 15.3.5 Electrochemical Testing 393 15.3.5.1 Direct Current Electrochemical Methods 393 15.3.5.2 Nondestructive Electrochemical Methods 396 15.3.6 High Velocity Flow Testing 397 15.3.7 Environmental Cracking Test Methods 398 15.3.8 High Temperature Testing – Burner-Rigs 401 15.3.9 Molten Salt Tests 401 15.3.9.1 Thermogravimetric Analysis 402 15.3.10 Microbiological Tests 403 15.4 Field Evaluation 405 15.4.1 In-Service Testing 408 15.4.1.1 Simulated Service Testing 410 15.4.2 Standards for Seawater Testing 410 References 412 16 Nonmetallic Materials in Marine Service 421Wayne Tucker 16.1 Introduction 421 16.2 Selection and Application 422 16.2.1 Material Definitions 422 16.2.2 Resistance to Environmental Factors 423 16.2.3 Mechanical and Physical Properties 423 16.3 Wood 424 16.3.1 Introduction 424 16.3.2 Degrading Factors 424 16.4 Plywood and Other Wood Composites 427 16.5 Concrete 428 16.5.1 Introduction 428 16.5.2 Marine Environmental Effects 429 16.5.3 Protection of Reinforced Concrete 430 16.5.4 Epoxy Coated Rebars (ECR) 431 16.5.5 Fiber Reinforced Concrete (FRC) 432 16.5.6 Repairs 432 16.6 Polymers 433 16.6.1 Fiber Reinforced Plastics (FRPs) 433 16.6.2 Environmental Effects 435 16.6.3 Fatigue of Marine Composites 436 16.6.4 Microbial Degradation 436 16.6.5 Ceramics and Glass 436 References 437 17 Electronics and Electrical Equipment in a Marine Environment 441James A. Ellor 17.1 Introduction 441 17.2 Primary Corrosion Phenomena in a Marine Environment 442 17.2.1 Types of Corrosion 444 17.2.1.1 Galvanic Corrosion 444 17.2.1.2 Electrolytic Corrosion 445 17.2.1.3 Electrochemical Migration 445 17.3 Protection from the Environment 446 17.3.1 Conformal Coatings 446 17.3.2 Enclosures 447 17.3.3 Hermetic Seals 448 17.3.4 Dehumidification 448 17.3.5 Corrosion Inhibitors 449 17.3.6 Water-Displacing Compounds 449 17.4 Corrosion Testing for Electronics in a Marine Environment 449 17.5 Conclusions 450 References 451 18 Structural Alloys in Marine Service 453David A. Shifler 18.1 Cast Irons 453 18.1.1 Cast Iron Metallurgy 454 18.1.2 Cast Iron Corrosion Behavior 457 18.2 Carbon Steels 458 18.2.1 Carbon Steel Chemistries 460 18.2.1.1 Effects of Alloying Additions 460 18.2.2 Surface Oxides/Corrosion Products 463 18.2.3 Heat Treating 464 18.2.4 Marine Steels 468 18.3 Stainless Steels 473 18.3.1 Stainless Steel Types 474 18.3.1.1 Austenitic Stainless Steels 474 18.3.1.2 Ferritic Stainless Steels 475 18.3.1.3 Martensitic Stainless Steels 478 18.3.1.4 Duplex Stainless Steels 478 18.3.1.5 Precipitation-Hardening Stainless Steels 479 18.3.2 Corrosion Behavior of Stainless Steels 479 18.3.3 Marine Uses of Stainless Steels 481 18.4 Nickel and Nickel Alloys 481 18.4.1 Corrosion Resistant Nickel and Nickel Alloys 483 18.4.2 High-temperature Nickel Alloys – Superalloys 486 18.5 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys 490 18.5.1 Aluminum Alloy Familites 490 18.5.2 Heat Treatment of Aluminum Alloys 494 18.5.3 Corrosion Behavior of Aluminum Alloys 496 18.6 Copper and Copper Alloys 497 18.6.1 General Corrosion and Mechanical Properties 497 18.6.2 Bronze Alloys 498 18.6.3 Brasses 502 18.6.4 Copper–Nickel Alloys 503 18.7 Titanium and Titanium Alloys 506 18.7.1 Chemistry and Metallurgy of Titanium Alloys 507 18.7.2 General Corrosion Behavior 510 18.8 Factors Affecting Alloy Corrosion Behavior in Marine Service 510 18.8.1 Surface Properties and Processes 510 18.8.1.1 Passivity 510 18.8.2 Material Bulk Properties 513 18.8.3 Joining Effects on Materials 514 18.8.4 Cathodic Protection 518 References 518 Additional Reading and References 525 19 Marine Coatings 527Charles G. Munger, Louis Vincent, and David A. Shifler 19.1 Introduction 527 19.2 Characteristics of a Ideal Marine Coating 528 19.3 Coating Degradation and Failures 532 19.4 Surface Preparation 532 19.5 Coating Inspection, Selection, and Application for Controlling Corrosion 536 19.6 Coatings for Marine Service 539 19.6.1 Metallized Coatings 539 19.6.1.1 Metal-Containing Primers 542 19.6.1.2 Cadmium Plating 543 19.6.1.3 Cadmium Options 543 19.6.2 Organic Coatings 544 19.6.2.1 Coating Thickness Measurements 544 19.7 Types of Coatings for Marine Vessels 545 19.7.1 Conversion Coatings 547 19.7.1.1 Hexavalent Chromate Conversion Coatings 547 19.7.1.2 Hexavalent Chromate Alternatives 547 19.7.1.3 Phosphate Coatings 548 19.7.2 Organic Coatings and Nanocomposites 548 19.7.3 Shop Primers 549 19.7.4 Universal Primers 550 19.7.5 Zinc-Rich Coatings 550 19.7.6 Organic Primers 551 19.7.7 Tie-Coats 552 19.7.8 Abrasion Resistant Coatings 552 19.7.9 Cargo Tank Linings 553 19.7.9.1 Tank Lining Chemical Resistance 554 19.7.10 Bilge Coatings 554 19.7.11 Ballast Tank Linings 555 19.7.12 Cofferdam and Void Coatings 558 19.7.13 Potable Water Tank Linings 558 19.7.14 Cosmetic Finishes – Topside Area and Interior Living and Working Spaces 559 19.7.15 Deck Coatings – Including Heli-Deck Surfaces 560 19.7.16 Hull Coatings – Freeboard Area 562 19.7.17 Maintenance Painting Programs 563 19.8 Offshore Structures 563 References 565 20 Biofouling Control 573David A. Shifler 20.1 The Nature of Biofouling 573 20.2 Fouling Effects on Ships 574 20.2.1 Control of Biofouling 576 20.2.1.1 Biocidal Antifoulant Coatings 576 20.3 Non-biocidal Antifoulant Methods and Coatings 579 20.4 Maintenance, Monitoring, and Testing 582 References 587 21 Cathodic Protection 593James A. Ellor, David A. Shifler, and Robert A. Bardsley 21.1 Theory 593 21.2 Reference Cells 596 21.3 Methods of Applying Cathodic Protection 597 21.3.1 Cathodic Protection Using Sacrificial Anodes 597 21.3.2 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) 600 21.3.2.1 Impressed Current Anodes Materials 601 21.3.2.2 Sacrificial Anodes 602 21.3.2.3 Impressed Current Cathodic Protection 604 21.4 Design Basics 604 21.4.1 Calcareous Deposits and Impacts on Protection Criteria 605 21.4.2 Polarization Characteristics Over Time 607 21.4.3 Design Using Physical Scale Modeling 608 21.4.4 Computer-Assisted Design 609 21.4.5 Protective (Dielectric) Shields 609 21.4.6 Protection Current Requirements 610 21.4.7 Polarization Potential Criteria of Protection 611 21.4.8 Automated Control Systems 611 21.5 Cathodic Protection in Marine Service 612 21.5.1 Small Boats and Large Commercial and Marine Vessels 612 21.5.2 Offshore Structures 615 21.5.3 Bridges, Wharves, and Jetties 617 21.5.4 Marine Pipelines 621 21.6 Concerns with the Use of Cathodic Protection 623 21.6.1 Corrosion/Cathodic Protection Monitoring 624 References 626 22 Corrosion Monitoring in Seawater 633Sean Brossia 22.1 Introduction 633 22.2 Electrochemical Methods 634 22.2.1 Linear Polarization Resistance 634 22.2.2 Potential Measurements 636 22.2.3 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy 637 22.2.4 Electrochemical Noise 641 22.2.5 Electrochemical Frequency Modulation 641 22.2.6 Wirebeam/Multielectrode Array Methods 641 22.3 Non-Electrochemical Methods 644 22.4 Challenges 647 22.5 Applications 648 22.6 Summary and Conclusions 649 References 650 23 Marine Fasteners 653David A. Shifler 23.1 Introduction 653 23.2 Failure Modes 654 23.3 General Fastener Design 655 23.4 Fastener Materials Selection 656 23.4.1 Standards and Specifications 656 23.4.2 Low-Alloy Steels 659 23.4.3 Stainless Steels 659 23.4.4 Aluminum Alloys 659 23.4.5 Copper Alloys 660 23.4.6 Nickel Alloys 660 23.4.7 Titanium Alloys 660 23.5 Fastener Behavior Above the Waterline 661 23.6 Fastener Behavior in Submerged, Below the Waterline 661 23.7 Corrosion Protection for Fasteners 662 References 663 Further Reading 666 24 Marine and Offshore Piping Systems 667David A. Shifler 24.1 Piping Systems 667 24.1.1 Bilge System 667 24.1.2 Ballast System 667 24.1.3 Firefighting Systems 668 24.1.4 Drainage Systems 668 24.1.5 Fresh-Water Systems 668 24.1.6 Fuel and Flammable Liquid Piping 668 24.1.7 Ventilation Systems – Ships 669 24.1.8 Hydrocarbon Piping (Oil and Gas) 669 24.1.9 Vent System – Offshore 669 24.1.10 Flare System 669 24.1.11 Firewater Utility Piping 669 24.1.12 Risers 670 24.1.13 Subsea Piping 670 24.2 Piping System Design 671 24.3 Materials Selection 672 24.4 Failure Modes of Piping Systems 674 24.4.1 Uniform Corrosion 674 24.4.2 Pitting and Crevice Corrosion 675 24.4.3 Galvanic Corrosion 677 24.4.4 Abrasion 681 24.4.5 Erosion and Erosion Corrosion 681 24.4.6 Variable Temperature Swings 684 24.4.7 Wear and Impact 684 24.4.8 Fatigue 685 24.4.9 Water Hammer 685 24.5 Corrosion Control Methods 686 References 686 Further Reading 689 25 Corrosion Control and Preservation of Historic Marine Artifacts 691David A. Shifler 25.1 Introduction 691 25.2 Basic Conservation Procedures 694 25.2.1 Laboratory Conservation Procedures 695 25.3 Degradation, Corrosion, and Conservation of Marine Artifacts 695 25.3.1 Corrosion and Conservation of Ferrous Alloys 696 25.3.2 Corrosion and Conservation of Other Metals and Alloys 700 25.3.2.1 Corrosion and Conservation of Copper Artifacts 701 25.3.2.2 Corrosion and Conservation of Silver Artifacts 701 25.3.3 Corrosion and Conservation of Lead, Tin, Pewter 702 References 703 Further Reading 705 Marine Archaeology Conservation 705 Index 707

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced Concrete Technology A thorough grounding in the science of concrete combined with the latest developments in the rapidly evolving field of concrete technology In the newly revised second edition of Advanced Concrete Technology, a distinguished team of academics and engineers delivers a state-of-the-art exploration of modern and advanced concrete technologies developed during the last decade. The book combines the essential concepts and theory of concrete with practical examples of material design, composition, processing, characterization, properties, and performance. The authors explain, in detail, the hardware and software of concrete, and offer readers discussions of the most recent advances in concrete technology, including, but not limited to, concrete recycling, nanotechnology, microstructural simulation, additive manufacturing, and non-destructive testing methods. This newest edition of Advanced Concrete Technology provides a suTable of ContentsPreface 1 Introduction to Concrete 1.1 Concrete Definition and Historical Development 1.2 Concrete as a Structural Material 1.3 Characteristics of Concrete 1.4 Types of Concrete 1.5 Factors Influencing Concrete Properties 1.6 Approaches to Study Concrete Discussion Topics References 2 Materials for Making Concrete 2.1 Aggregates for Concrete 2.2 Cementitious Binders 2.3 Admixtures 2.4 Water Discussion Topics Problems References 3 Fresh Concrete 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Workability and Rheology 3.3 Mix Design 3.4 Manufacture of Concrete 3.5 Delivery of Concrete 3.6 Concrete Placing 3.7 Curing of Concrete 3.8 Early-Age Properties of Concrete Discussion Topics Problems References 4 Materials Structure of Concrete 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Classification of Materials Structural Levels 4.3 Structure of Concrete at Nanometer Scale: The C–S–H Structure 4.4 Structure of Concrete at the Micro-Scale 4.5 The Transition Zone in Concrete 4.6 Nano- and Micro-Structural Engineering Discussion Topics References 5 Properties of Hardened Concrete 5.1 Strengths of Hardened Concrete 5.2 Stress–Strain Relationship and Constitutive Equations 5.3 Dimensional Stability—Shrinkage and Creep 5.4 Durability Discussion Topics Problems References 6 Advanced Cementitious Composites 6.1 Fiber-Reinforced Cementitious Composites 6.2 High-Strength Cementitious Composites 6.3 Ultra-High-Strength Concrete 6.4 Polymers in Concrete 6.5 Shrinkage-Compensating Concrete 6.6 Self-Compacting Concrete 6.7 Engineered Cementitious Composite 6.8 Confined Concrete 6.9 High-Volume Fly Ash Concrete 6.10 Structural Lightweight and Heavyweight Concrete 6.11 Sea Sand and Sea Water Concrete 6.12 The 3D Printed Concrete Discussion Topics Problems References 7 Concrete Fracture Mechanics 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics 7.3 The Crack Tip Plastic Zone 7.4 Crack Tip-Opening Displacement 7.5 Fracture Process in Concrete 7.6 Nonlinear Fracture Mechanics for Concrete 7.7 Two-Parameter Fracture Model 7.8 Size Effect Model 7.9 The Fictitious Model by Hillerborg 7.10 R-Curve Method for Quasi-Brittle Materials 7.11 Double-K Criterion 7.12 The Application of Fracture Mechanics in the Design Code of Concrete Structures Discussion Topics Problems References 8 Nondestructive Testing in Concrete Engineering 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Review of Wave Theory for a 1D Case 8.3 Reflected and Transmitted Waves 8.4 Attenuation and Scattering 8.5 Main Commonly Used NDT-CE Techniques 8.6 Noncontacting Resistivity Measurement Method 8.7 An Innovative Magnetic Corrosion Detection Transducer Discussion Topics Problems References 9 The Future and Development Trends of Concrete 9.1 Sustainability of Concrete 9.2 Deep Understanding of the Nature of Hydration 9.3 Integrated Materials and Structural Design 9.4 High-Tensile-Strength and High-Toughness Cement-Based Materials 9.5 Application of Nanotechnology in Concrete 9.6 Data Science and Artificial Intelligence in Concrete Technology References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xxi 1 Hot-Melt Adhesives: Fundamentals, Formulations, and Applications: A Critical Review 1Swaroop Gharde, Gaurav Sharma and Balasubramanian Kandasubramanian 1.1 Introduction to Hot-Melt Adhesives (HMAs) 2 1.2 Formulation of Hot-Melt Adhesives 4 1.2.1 Theories or Mechanisms of Adhesion 4 1.2.1.1 Mechanical Interlocking Theory 4 1.2.1.2 Electrostatic Theory 5 1.2.1.3 Diffusion Theory 5 1.2.1.4 Physical Adsorption or Wetting Theory 5 1.2.1.5 Chemical Bonding 5 1.2.2 Intermolecular Forces between Adhesives and Adherend 5 1.2.3 Thermodynamic Model of Adhesion 6 1.2.4 Bonded Joints 7 1.2.5 Surface Preparation for HMA Application 8 1.2.5.1 Solvent Degreasing 9 1.2.5.2 Chemically-Active Surface 9 1.3 Fundamental Aspects of Adhesive Behavior of HMAs 10 1.3.1 Mechanical and Physical Behaviors 10 1.3.2 Blending Behavior and the Effects of Other Ingredients 11 1.3.3 Polymeric Behavior 12 1.4 Preparation of HMAs Using Various Polymers 12 1.4.1 HMAs by Grafting Acrylic and Crotonic Acids on Metallocene Ethylene-Octene Polymers 12 1.4.1.1 Solution Grafting 13 1.4.1.2 Melt Grafting 14 1.4.1.3 Preparation of HMAs 14 1.4.2 Cross-Linked Polyurethane Hot-Melt Adhesives (PUR-HMAs) 14 1.4.3 Soybean Protein Isolate and Polycaprolactone Based HMAs (SPIP-HMAs) 15 1.5 Mechanical Analysis of Hot-Melt Adhesives 16 1.5.1 Fracture Mechanics of HMAs 16 1.5.1.1 Fracture Energy Measurement 18 1.5.2 Stress-Strain, and Frequency-Temperature Sweep Tests for Viscoelasticity 18 1.6 Industrial Applications of Hot-Melt Adhesives 20 1.6.1 Medical Applications 20 1.6.2 Electronic Applications 21 1.6.3 Anticorrosion Applications 21 1.6.4 Food Packaging Applications 21 1.6.5 Textile Applications 22 1.7 Current Challenges and Future Scope of HMAs 22 1.8 Summary 23 Acknowledgment 24 References 24 2 Optimization of Adhesively Bonded Spar-Wingskin Joints of Laminated FRP Composites Subjected to Pull-Off Load: A Critical Review 29S. Rakshe, S. V. Nimje and S. K. Panigrahi 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Finite Element Analysis of SWJ 31 2.2.1 Geometry and Configuration 31 2.2.2 Finite Element Modeling 32 2.2.3 Validation and Convergence Study 33 2.3 Taguchi Method of Optimization 34 2.3.1 Optimization of Material and Lamination Scheme 35 2.3.2 Geometrical Parameter 36 2.4 Results and Discussion 38 2.4.1 Material and Lamination Scheme 38 2.4.1.1 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) 39 2.4.2 Geometrical Parameter 41 2.4.2.1 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) 42 2.5 Conclusions 44 References 45 3 Contact Angle Hysteresis – Advantages and Disadvantages: A Critical Review 47Andrew Terhemen Tyowua and Stephen Gbaoron Yiase 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Contact Angle and Hysteresis Measurement 49 3.2.1 Theoretical Treatment of Static Contact Angles 51 3.2.2 Modeling of Dynamic Contact Angles 53 3.2.3 Modelling Contact Angle Hysteresis 57 3.3 Advantages of Contact Angle Hysteresis 59 3.4 Disadvantages of Contact Angle Hysteresis 59 3.5 Summary 61 3.6 Acknowledgements 62 References 62 4 Test Methods for Fibre/Matrix Adhesion in Cellulose Fibre-Reinforced Thermoplastic Composite Materials: A Critical Review 69J. Müssig and N. Graupner 4.1 Introduction 70 4.2 Terms and Definitions 70 4.2.1 Fibres 71 4.2.2 Fibre Bundle 71 4.2.3 Equivalent Diameter 72 4.2.4 Critical Length 72 4.2.5 Aspect Ratio and Critical Aspect Ratio 72 4.2.6 Single Element versus Collective 73 4.2.7 Interface and Interphase 75 4.2.8 Adhesion and Adherence 75 4.2.9 Practical & Theoretical Fibre/Matrix Adhesion 75 4.3 Test Methods for Fibre/Matrix Adhesion 76 4.3.1 Overview 76 4.3.2 Single Fibre/Single Fibre Bundle Tests 77 4.3.2.1 Pull-Out Test 77 4.3.2.2 Microbond Test 88 4.3.3 Test Procedures for Fibre/Matrix Adhesion 91 4.3.3.1 Pull-Out Test 92 4.3.3.2 Microbond Test 93 4.3.3.3 Evaluation of Characteristic Values from Pull-Out and Microbond Tests 94 4.3.3.4 Fragmentation Test 98 4.4 Comparison of IFSS Data 103 4.5 Influence of Fibre Treatment on the IFSS 107 4.6 Summary 118 Acknowledgements 119 References 119 5 Bioadhesives in Biomedical Applications: A Critical Review 131Aishee Dey, Proma Bhattacharya and Sudarsan Neogi 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 Theories of Bioadhesion 132 5.2.1 Factors Affecting Bioadhesion 134 5.3 Different Polymers Used as Bioadhesives 134 5.3.1 Collagen-Based Bioadhesives 135 5.3.2 Chitosan-Based Bioadhesives 137 5.3.3 Albumin-Based Bioadhesives 138 5.3.4 Dextran-Based Bioadhesives 139 5.3.5 Gelatin-Based Bioadhesives 140 5.3.6 Poly(ethylene glycol)-Based Bioadhesives 142 5.3.7 Poly(acrylic acid)-Based Bioadhesives 142 5.3.8 Poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA)-Based Bioadhesives 145 5.4 Summary 147 References 148 6 Mucoadhesive Pellets for Drug Delivery Applications: A Critical Review 155Inderbir Singh, Gayatri Devi, Bibhuti Ranjan Barik, Anju Sharma and Loveleen Kaur 6.1 Introduction 155 6.2 Mucoadhesive Polymers 157 6.3 Pellets 159 6.3.1 Preparation and Evaluation of Pellets 160 6.3.2 Mucoadhesive Pellets for Drug Delivery Applications 161 6.4 Summary and Prospects 166 Conflict of Interest 166 References 166 7 Bio-Inspired Icephobic Coatings for Aircraft Icing Mitigation: A Critical Review 171Liqun Ma, Zichen Zhang, Linyue Gao, Yang Liu and Hui Hu 7.1 Introduction 172 7.2 The State-of-the-Art Icephobic Coatings/Surfaces 174 7.2.1 Lotus-Leaf-Inspired Superhydrophobic Surfaces (SHS) with Micro-/Nano-Scale Surface Textures 176 7.2.2 Pitcher-Plant-Inspired Slippery Liquid-Infused Porous Surfaces (SLIPS) 177 7.3 Impact Icing Process Pertinent to Aircraft Inflight Icing Phenomena 179 7.4 Preparation of Typical SHS and SLIPS Coatings/Surfaces 181 7.5 Measurements of Ice Adhesion Strengths on Different Icephobic Coatings/Surfaces 182 7.6 Icing Tunnel Testing to Evaluate the Icephobic Coatings/Surfaces for Impact Icing Mitigation 184 7.7 Characterization of Rain Erosion Effects on the Icephobic Coatings 189 7.8 Summary and Conclusions 196 Acknowledgments 198 References 198 8 Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources: A Critical Review Part I. Protein-Based Adhesives 203Manfred Dunky List of Abbreviations 203 8.1 Overview and Challenges for Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 205 8.1.1 Definition of Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 205 8.1.2 Motivation to Use Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 207 8.1.3 Combined Use of Synthetic and Naturally-Based Wood Adhesives 208 8.1.4 Review Articles on Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 209 8.1.5 Motivation for this Review Article in Four Parts in the Journal “Reviews of Adhesion and Adhesives” 211 8.1.6 Overview on Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 212 8.1.7 Requirements, Limitations, and Opportunities for Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 214 8.1.8 Synthetic and Natural Crosslinkers 214 8.1.9 Future of Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 219 8.2 Protein-Based Adhesives 222 8.2.1 Introduction 222 8.2.1.1 Chemical Structure of Proteins 223 8.2.1.2 Proteinaceous Feedstock 224 8.2.1.3 Wood Bonding with Proteins 224 8.2.2 Plant-Based Proteins 228 8.2.2.1 Overview on Plant-Based Protein Sources and Types 228 8.2.2.2 Soy Proteins 228 8.2.2.3 Soy Protein as Wood Adhesive 239 8.2.2.4 Thermal Treatment of Soy Proteins 243 8.2.3 Animal-Based Proteins 246 8.2.3.1 Types and Sources of Animal-Based Proteins 246 8.2.3.2 Mussels (Marine) Proteins 246 8.2.3.3 Slaughterhouse Waste as Source of Proteins 257 8.2.3.4 Proteins from Specified Risk Materials (SRMs) 260 8.2.4 Properties of Protein-Based Adhesives 261 8.2.5 Denaturation and Modification of Proteins 261 8.2.5.1 Modification of Proteins 265 8.2.5.2 Crosslinking of Proteins 265 8.2.6 Proteins in Combination with Other Natural Adhesives and Natural Crosslinkers 286 8.2.7 Proteins in Combination with Synthetic Adhesive Resins and Crosslinkers 286 8.2.8 Application of Protein-Based Wood Adhesives 286 8.3 Summary 316 General Literature (Overview and Review Articles) for Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 316 Protein-Based Adhesives 317 Plant Proteins (including Soy) 318 Animal Proteins and Other Sources 318 References 318 9 Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources: A Critical Review Part II. Carbohydrate-Based Adhesives 337Manfred Dunky List of Abbreviations 337 9.1 Types and Sources of Carbohydrates Used as Wood Adhesives 338 9.2 Modification of Starch for Possible Use as Wood Adhesive 348 9.3 Citric Acid as Naturally-Based Modifier and Co-Reactant 348 9.4 Combination and Crosslinking of Carbohydrates with Natural and Synthetic Components 348 9.5 Degradation and Repolymerization of Carbohydrates 348 9.6 Summary 373 General Literature (Overview and Review Articles) for Carbohydrate-Based Adhesives 373 References 373 10 Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources: A Critical Review Part III. Tannin- and Lignin-Based Adhesives 383Manfred Dunky List of Abbreviations 384 10.1 Introduction 385 10.2 Tannin-Based Adhesives 385 10.2.1 Chemistry of Condensed Tannins 386 10.2.2 Types of Condensed Tannins 390 10.2.3 Extraction, Purification, and Modification Methods for Tannins 390 10.2.4 Hardening and Crosslinking of Tannins 400 10.2.5 Hardening of Tannins by Hexamethylenetetramine (Hexamine) 418 10.2.6 Autocondensation of Tannins 419 10.2.7 Combination of Tannins with Natural Components 421 10.2.8 Combination of Tannins with Synthetic Components and Crosslinkers 421 10.3 Lignin-Based Adhesives 421 10.3.1 Chemistry and Structure of Lignin 430 10.3.2 Lignin as Adhesive 432 10.3.3 Analysis of Molecular Structure 437 10.3.4 Modification of Lignin 437 10.3.5 Lignin as Sole Adhesive and Chemical Activation of the Wood Surface 452 10.3.6 Laccase Induced Activation of Lignin 452 10.3.7 Pre-Methylolation of Lignin 469 10.3.8 Incorporation of Lignin into PF Resins 481 10.3.9 Reactions of Lignin With Various Aldehydes and Other Naturally-Based Components 481 10.3.10 Reaction of Lignin With Synthetic Components and Crosslinkers 481 10.4 Summary 481 General Literature (Overview and Review Articles) for Tannin and Lignin 499 References 501 11 Adhesion in Biocomposites: A Critical Review 531Siji K. Mary, Merin Sara Thomas, Rekha Rose Koshy, Prasanth K.S. Pillai, Laly A. Pothan and SabuThomas 11.1 Introduction 531 11.2 Biocomposite Processing Methods 533 11.3 Factors Enhancing Adhesion Property in Biocomposites 536 11.3.1 Effect of Chemical Modification 537 11.3.2 Effect of Enzymatic Modification 539 11.3.3 Effect of Physical Modification 539 11.4 Physical and Chemical Characterization 542 11.5 Adhesion in Polymer Biocomposites with Specific Applications 545 11.5.1 Biomedical Applications 546 11.5.2 Dye Adsorption and Removal 547 11.5.3 Automotive Applications 548 11.6 Summary 549 References 549 12 Vacuum UV Surface Photo-Oxidation of Polymeric and Other Materials for Improving Adhesion: A Critical Review 559Gerald A. Takacs, Massoud J. Miri and Timothy Kovach 12.1 Introduction 559 12.2 Vacuum UV Photo-Oxidation Process 561 12.2.1 VUV Background 561 12.2.2 VUV Radiation 561 12.2.2.1 Emission from Excited Atoms 561 12.2.2.2 Emission from High Pressure Rare Gas Plasmas 563 12.2.2.3 Emission from Rare-Gas Halides and Halogen Dimers 564 12.2.3 VUV Optical Filters 564 12.2.4 Penetration Depths of VUV Radiation in Polymers 565 12.2.5 Analytical Methods for Surface Analysis 565 12.2.6 VUV Photochemistry of Oxygen 565 12.2.7 Reaction of O Atoms and Ozone with a Polymer Surface 566 12.3 Adhesion to VUV Surface Photo-Oxidized Polymers 567 12.3.1 Fluoropolymers 567 12.3.2 Nafion® 568 12.3.3 Polyimides 569 12.3.4 Metal-Containing Polymers 569 12.3.5 Polyethylene (PE) 570 12.3.6 Polystyrene 571 12.3.7 Other Polymers 571 12.3.7.1 Polypropylene (PP) 571 12.3.7.2 Poly(ethylene terephthalate) (PET) 571 12.3.7.3 Poly(ethylene 2,6-naphthalate) (PEN) 571 12.3.7.4 Cyclo-Olefin Polymers 572 12.3.7.5 Polybenzimidazole (PBI) 572 12.4 Applications of VUV Surface Photo-Oxidation to Other Materials 573 12.4.1 Carbon Nanotubes and Diamond 573 12.4.2 Metal Oxides 574 12.5 Prospects 575 12.5.1 Sustainable Polymers 575 12.6 Summary 576 References 576 13 Bio- and Water-Based Reversible Covalent Bonds Containing Polymers (Vitrimers) and Their Relevance to Adhesives – A Critical Review 587Natanel Jarach, Racheli Zuckerman, Naum Naveh, Hanna Dodiuk and Samuel Kenig List of Abbreviations 587 13.1 Introduction 588 13.1.1 RCBPs Classification 589 13.1.2 Reversible Bonds 590 13.1.2.1 General Reversible Covalent Bonds 590 13.1.2.2 Dynamic Reversible Covalent Bonds 590 13.1.3 RCBPs Applications 591 13.1.3.1 Recyclability 591 13.1.3.2 Self-Healing Materials 592 13.1.3.3 Shape-Memory Materials 592 13.1.3.4 Smart Composites 593 13.1.3.5 Adhesives 593 13.1.3.6 Dynamic Hydrogels and Biomedical Materials 594 13.2 Bio-Based RCBPs 595 13.2.1 Bio-Based Polymers 595 13.2.1.1 Classification of Bio-Based Polymers 596 13.2.1.2 Common Synthetic Bio-Based Polymers 596 13.2.2 Bio-Based RCBPs 599 13.2.2.1 Bio-Based DA RCBPs 600 13.2.2.2 Bio-Based Acylhydrazone-Containing RCBPs 601 13.2.2.3 Bio-Based Imine (Schiff-Base)-Containing RCBPs 601 13.2.2.4 Bio-Based β-Hydroxy Ester Containing RCBPs 604 13.2.2.5 Bio-Based Disulfide-Containing RCBPs 606 13.3 Water-Based RCBPs 607 13.3.1 Solvents in Polymer Industry 607 13.3.1.1 Organic and Inorganic Solvents Used in RCBPs Synthesis 608 13.3.1.2 Water-Based Polymers 608 13.3.2 Water-Based RCBPs 609 13.3.2.1 Acylhydrazone-Containing Water-Based RCBPs 609 13.3.2.2 Schiff-Base-Containing Water-Based RCBPs 609 13.4 Summary 611 13.5 Authors Contributions 611 13.6 Funding 611 13.7 Conflict of Interest 611 References 612 14 Superhydrophobic Surfaces by Microtexturing: A Critical Review 621Anustup Chakraborty, Alan T. Mulroney and Mool C. Gupta 14.1 Introduction 622 14.1.1 Background 622 14.1.2 State-of-the-Art 626 14.1.2.1 Microtexture Geometry 627 14.1.2.2 Ice Adhesion 627 14.1.2.3 Optical Transparency 628 14.1.2.4 Anti-Condensation Surfaces 628 14.2 Fabrication of Microtextured Surfaces 628 14.2.1 Surface Materials 628 14.2.2 Methods of Fabrication of Superhydrophobic Surfaces 630 14.2.2.1 Plasma Treatment 630 14.2.2.2 Laser Ablation 631 14.2.2.3 Chemical Etching 632 14.3 Properties of Microtextured Surfaces 634 14.3.1 Antifogging 634 14.3.2 Antibacterial 634 14.3.3 Antireflection 634 14.3.4 Self-Cleaning 636 14.3.5 Effect of Temperature on Surface Properties 636 14.4 Applications 639 14.4.1 Anti-Icing 639 14.4.2 Drag Reduction 640 14.4.3 Anti-Corrosion 641 14.4.4 Solar Cells 641 14.4.5 Water-Repellent Textiles 641 14.5 Future Outlook 643 Acknowledgments 644 References 644 15 Structural Acrylic Adhesives: A Critical Review 651D.A. Aronovich and L.B. Boinovich 15.1 Introduction 651 15.2 Compositions and Chemistries 653 15.2.1 Base Monomer 654 15.2.2 Thickeners and Elastomeric Components 656 15.2.3 Adhesive Additives 663 15.2.4 Initiators 665 15.2.5 Aerobically Curable Systems 670 15.2.6 Fillers 671 15.3 Physico-Mechanical Properties of SAAs 673 15.4 Adhesives for Low Surface Energy Materials 677 15.4.1 Initiators Based on Trialkylboranes 677 15.4.2 Alternative Types of Boron-Containing Initiators 686 15.4.3 Additives Modifying the Curing Stage 687 15.4.4 Hybrid SAAs 690 15.5 Comparison of the Properties of SAAs and Other Reactive Adhesives 693 15.6 Summary and Outlook 698 References 698 16 Current Progress in Mechanically Durable Water-Repellent Surfaces: A Critical Review 709Philip Brown and Prantik Mazumder 16.1 Introduction 709 16.2 Fundamentals of Superhydrophobicity and SLIPs 710 16.2.1 Intermolecular Forces and Wetting 710 16.2.2 Young’s Contact Angle and Surface Chemistry Limitation 712 16.2.3 Superhydrophobicity by Texturing 715 16.2.4 Hysteresis and Tilt Angle 717 16.2.5 Slippery Liquid-Infused Porous Surfaces (SLIPs) 719 16.3 Techniques to Achieve Water-Repellent Surfaces 720 16.3.1 Superhydrophobic Composite Coatings 720 16.3.2 Superhydrophobic Textured Surfaces 724 16.3.3 Liquid-Impregnated Surfaces/SLIPs 728 16.4 Durability Testing 729 16.5 Future Trends 732 16.6 Summary 734 References 734 17 Mussel-Inspired Underwater Adhesives- from Adhesion Mechanisms to Engineering Applications: A Critical Review 739Yanfei Ma, Bozhen Zhang, Imri Frenkel, Zhizhi Zhang, Xiaowei Pei, Feng Zhou and Ximin He 17.1 Introduction 740 17.2 Adhesion Mechanisms of Mussel and the Catechol Chemistry 741 17.2.1 Hydrogen Bonding and Metal Coordination 742 17.2.2 Hydrophobic Interaction 743 17.2.3 Cation/Anion/π-π Interactions 743 17.2.4 The Flexibility of the Molecular Chain 744 17.3 Catechol-Functionalized Adhesive Materials 744 17.3.1 Permanent/High-Strength Adhesives 745 17.3.2 Temporary/Smart Adhesives 748 17.3.2.1 pH-Responsive Adhesives 748 17.3.2.2 Electrically Responsive Adhesives 750 17.3.2.3 Thermally Responsive Adhesives 750 17.3.2.4 Photo-Responsive Adhesives 750 17.3.3 Applications 751 17.4 Summary and Outlook 753 References 754 18 Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources: A Critical Review Part IV. Special Topics 761Manfred Dunky List of Abbreviations 762 18.1 Liquified Wood 765 18.2 Pyrolysis of Wood 769 18.3 Replacement of Formaldehyde in Resins 772 18.4 Unsaturated Oil Adhesives 791 18.5 Natural Polymers 793 18.5.1 Poly(lactic acid) (PLA) 793 18.5.2 Natural Rubber 795 18.6 Poly(hydroxyalkanoate)s (PHAs) 796 18.7 Thermoplastic Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 797 18.7.1 Polyurethanes (PURs) 798 18.7.2 Polyamides (PAs) 806 18.7.3 Epoxies 808 18.8 Cellulose Nanocrystals (CNCs) and Cellulose Nanofibrils (CNFs) 808 18.8.1 Cellulose Nanofibrils (CNFs) as Sole Adhesives 810 18.8.2 Cellulose Nanofibrils as Components of Adhesives 812 18.9 Cashew Nut Shell Liquid (CNSL) 812 18.10 Summary 819 General Literature (Overview and Review Articles) for Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 820 References 820 19 Cold Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Technology for Modifying Polymers to Enhance Adhesion: A Critical Review 841Hom Bahadur Baniya, Rajesh Prakash Guragain and Deepak Prasad Subedi 19.1 Introduction 842 19.2 Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Discharge 844 19.2.1 Corona Discharge 844 19.2.2 Dielectric Barrier Discharge (DBD) 845 19.2.3 Cold Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Jet (CAPPJ) 845 19.2.4 Polymer Surface Modification by CAPPJ 845 19.3 Experimental Setup for the Generation of Cold Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Jet 846 19.4 Methods and Materials for Surface Modification of Polymers 847 19.5 Direct Method for the Determination of Temperature of Cold Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Jet (CAPPJ) 848 19.6 Results and Discussion 848 19.6.1 Temperature Determination of Cold Atmospheric Pressure Plasma Jet (CAPPJ) 848 19.6.2 Electrical Characterization of the CAPPJ 849 19.6.2.1 Power Balance Method 849 19.6.2.2 Current Density Method 850 19.6.2.3 Determination of Energy Dissipation in the Cold Plasma Discharge per Cycle by the Lissajous Figure Method 851 19.6.3 Optical Characterization of CAPPJ 852 19.6.3.1 Line Intensity Ratio Method 852 19.6.3.2 Stark Broadening Method 856 19.6.3.3 Boltzmann Plot Method 858 19.6.3.4 Determination of the Rotational Temperature 859 19.6.3.5 Determination of the Vibrational Temperature 860 19.7 Surface Characterization/Adhesion Property of Polymers 862 19.7.1 Contact Angle Measurements and Surface Free Energy Determination 862 19.7.1.1 Poly (ethylene terephthalate) (PET) 862 19.7.1.2 Polypropylene (PP) 864 19.7.1.3 Polyamide (PA) 867 19.7.1.4 Polycarbonate (PC) 869 19.7.2 FTIR Analysis 871 19.7.2.1 Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Analysis of PET 871 19.7.2.2 Fourier Transform Infrared (FTIR) Analysis of PP 872 19.7.3 SEM Analysis 872 19.7.3.1 SEM Images of the Control and APPJ Treated PET 872 19.7.3.2 SEM Images of the Control and APPJ Treated PP 872 19.8 Summary 873 Acknowledgements 874 Data Availability 874 Conflict of Interest 874 References 874

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface to the Second Edition xiii Preface to the First Edition xv Nomenclature xix About the Companion Website xxxi 1 Heat Exchangers: Semantics 1 1.1 Heat Transfer in a Heat Exchanger 1 1.2 Modeling a Heat Exchanger 5 1.3 Irreversibilities in Heat Exchangers 20 1.4 Thermodynamic Irreversibility and Temperature Cross Phenomena 27 1.5 Heuristic Approach to an Assessment of Heat Exchanger Effectiveness 35 1.6 Energy, Exergy, and Cost Balances in the Analysis of Heat Exchangers 39 1.7 Performance Evaluation Criteria Based on the Second Law of Thermodynamics 58 2 Overview of Heat Exchanger Design Methodology: The Art 63 2.1 Heat Exchanger Design Methodology 63 2.2 Interactions Among Design Considerations 77 2.3 Heat Exchanger Design for Manufacturing 78 3 Thermal Design for Recuperators 91 3.1 Heat Flow and Thermal Resistance 91 3.2 Heat Exchanger Design Variables/Parameters 93 3.3 The ε-NTU Method 105 3.4 Effectiveness-NTU Relationships 112 3.5 The P-NTU Method 128 3.6 P-NTU Relationships 131 3.7 The Mean Temperature Difference Method 157 3.8 F Factors for Various Flow Arrangements 161 3.9 Comparison of the ε-NTU, P-NTU, and MTD Methods 176 3.10 The υ-P and P1-P2 Methods 179 3.11 Solution Methods for Determining Exchanger Effectiveness 181 3.12 Heat Exchanger Design Problems 185 4 Relaxation of Design Assumptions. Extended Surfaces 189 4.1 Longitudinal Wall Heat Conduction Effects 189 4.2 Nonuniform Overall Heat Transfer Coefficients 200 4.3 Extended Surface Exchangers 213 4.4 Additional Considerations for Shell-and-Tube Exchangers 243 4.5 Flow Maldistribution 248 5 Thermal Design of Regenerators 283 5.1 Heat Transfer Analysis 283 5.2 The (ε-NTUo) Method 290 5.3 The Λ-Π Method 309 5.4 Influence of Longitudinal Wall Heat Conduction 319 5.5 Influence of Transverse Wall Heat Conduction 326 5.6 Influence of Pressure and Carryover Leakages 330 5.7 Influence of Matrix Material, Size, and Arrangement 336 6 Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop Analysis 341 6.1 Introduction 341 6.2 Extended Surface Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop 344 6.3 Regenerator Pressure Drop 354 6.4 Tubular Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop 354 6.5 Plate Heat Exchanger Pressure Drop 357 6.6 Pressure Drop Associated with Fluid Distribution Elements 359 6.7 Pressure Drop Presentation 371 6.8 Pressure Drop Dependence on Geometry and Fluid Properties 377 7 Surface Heat Transfer and Flow Friction Characteristics 379 7.1 Basic Concepts 379 7.2 Dimensionless Groups 394 7.3 Experimental Techniques for Determining Surface Characteristics 402 7.4 Analytical and Semiempirical Heat Transfer and Friction Factor Correlations for Simple Geometries 423 7.5 Experimental Heat Transfer and Friction Factor Correlations for Complex Geometries 458 7.6 Influence of Temperature-Dependent Fluid Properties 474 7.7 Influence of Superimposed Free Convection 477 7.8 Influence of Superimposed Radiation 482 8 Geometry of Heat Exchangers' Surfaces 489 8.1 Tubular Heat Exchangers 489 8.2 Tube-Fin Heat Exchangers 494 8.3 Plate-Fin Heat Exchangers 499 8.4 Regenerators With Continuous Cylindrical Passages 508 8.5 Shell-and-Tube Exchangers with Segmental Baffles 511 8.6 Gasketed Plate Heat Exchangers 519 9 Heat Exchanger Design Procedures 521 9.1 Fluid Mean Temperatures 521 9.2 Plate-Fin Heat Exchangers 524 9.3 Tube-Fin Heat Exchangers 547 9.4 Plate Heat Exchangers 548 9.5 Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers 560 9.6 Note on Heat Exchanger Optimization 578 10 Selection of Heat Exchangers and Their Components 581 10.1 Selection Criteria Based on Operating Parameters 581 10.2 General Selection Guidelines for Major Exchanger Types 587 10.3 Some Quantitative Considerations 606 Appendix A Classification of Heat Exchangers 631 Appendix B P-NTU Relationships 699 References 713 Index 725

Read more less

Book SynopsisPOROUS PLASTICS A unique book by a well-known polymer scientist on a subject that is trending in plastics/polymer engineering. Porous polymers are materials that are having pores in their design. Porous polymers are important for various fields of application and are used with pores of different sizes, i.e., from macropores to micropores. This book focuses on the issues of porous polymers as well as low molecular compounds that can be introduced in porous polymers. The book begins with a chapter about polymers that are used for porous materials. Here, among others, microporous polymer networks, hyper-crosslinked polymers, and rigid ladder-type porous polymers are detailed. Related issues are also detailed in the subsequent chapters. In the next chapter, the major synthesis methods for porous polymers are described. Then, the properties and material testing methods, such as standards, are described in a chapter. In the following chapters, special fields of applications of porous polymeTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Materials 1 1.1 Styropor 1 1.2 Porous Coordination Polymers 2 1.2.1 Multifunctional Pillared-Layer Material 2 1.2.2 Porous Coordination Polymer-Ionic Liquid Composite 3 1.3 Networks 7 1.3.1 Microporous Polymer Networks 7 1.3.2 Amorphous Microporous Polymer Networks 7 1.4 Rigid Ladder-Type Porous Polymers 19 1.5 Photocatalysts 20 1.5.1 Compounds for Photocatalytic Aerobic Oxidation 20 1.5.2 Floating Photocatalysts 22 1.5.3 Photocatalysts with Side Chains 24 References 26 2 Synthesis Methods 29 2.1 Porogens 29 2.1.1 Polymers and Organic Solvents 29 2.1.2 Water as Porogen 31 2.1.3 Solid Porogens 31 2.2 Living Radical Polymerization 32 2.3 Emulsion Polymerization 32 2.3.1 High Internal Phase Emulsion Polymerization 32 2.3.2 Microchannel Emulsification 40 2.4 Solvent-Free Polymerization 41 2.5 Suspension Polymerization 43 2.6 Multistage Polymerization Techniques 45 2.7 Azo Coupling 46 2.8 Precipitation Polymerization 46 2.9 Microfluidics 47 2.10 Photocatalysis 49 2.11 Thermal Drawing 50 2.12 Biodegradable Foam 53 2.13 Biocompatible Porous Three-Dimensional Polymer Matrices 53 2.14 Breath-Figure Method 54 2.14.1 Effects of the Chemical Structure of Polymers 55 2.14.2 Coating Layers with Selective Wettability on Filter Papers 56 2.15 Superabsorbent Polymers 57 2.16 Functionalization Methods 65 2.16.1 Thiol-Ene Click Chemistry 65 2.16.2 Ionic Bond Functionalization 66 2.16.3 Pore-Size-Specific Functionalization 67 References 67 3 Properties 73 3.1 Special Materials 73 3.1.1 Porous Polymer Pressure Sensors 73 3.1.2 Crack Propagation Behavior 74 3.2 Standard Test Methods 74 3.2.1 Polymeric Scaffolds 76 3.2.2 Leaks in Porous Medical Packaging 77 3.2.3 Pore Diameter and Permeability 77 3.2.4 Mercury Intrusion Porosimetry 78 3.2.5 Pore Size of a Membrane Filter 78 3.2.6 Computed Tomography 79 3.2.7 Water Absorption 79 3.2.8 Microbial Ranking of Porous Packaging Materials 80 3.2.9 Antibacterial Properties 81 3.2.10 Performance of Antimicrobials 81 3.2.11 Surgical Implants 81 3.2.12 Acoustical Properties 83 3.2.13 Detection of Leaks in Packaging 84 3.2.14 Sorbent Performance of Adsorbents 85 References 85 4 Medical Uses 89 4.1 Medical Diagnostics 89 4.1.1 Extracellular Vesicles 89 4.2 Medical Devices 94 4.2.1 Stent Grafts 96 4.2.2 Vascular Grafts 103 4.3 Medical Applications 106 4.3.1 Porous Polymer Microneedles 106 4.3.2 Flexible Pressure Sensors 107 4.3.3 Bone Regeneration 108 4.3.4 Release of Therapeutic Agents 111 4.3.5 Implant Dentistry 114 4.4 Biomedical Applications 130 4.4.1 Macroporous Hydrogels 131 4.4.2 Alginate Foams 132 4.4.3 Biodegradable Sponges 133 4.4.4 Biomedical Scaffolds 134 4.4.5 Biodegradable Electronic Materials 135 4.4.6 Optical Fibers 136 4.4.7 Bead Sorbent 137 References 146 5 Thermal Insulation 153 5.1 Prediction Models 154 5.2 Radiative and Conductive Heat Transfer 155 5.3 Studies of Thermal Conductivity 156 5.3.1 Macroporous Polymer-Derived SiOC Ceramics 156 5.4 Poly(ethylene) Foams 157 5.5 Rigid Foams 157 5.5.1 Aromatic Polymers 157 5.5.2 PVC 162 5.5.3 Poly(urethane) 169 5.6 Microporous Foams 174 5.6.1 Microporous Poly(styrene) 174 5.6.2 Conjugate Microporous Foams 175 5.7 Resilient Porous Polymer Foams 176 5.8 Electrically Conductive Networks 178 5.8.1 Poly(lactic acid) 178 5.8.2 Natural Rubber 178 5.9 Electroconducting Polymer Coatings 181 5.10 Foam Insulation Structure 182 5.11 Passive Cooling 185 5.11.1 Radiative Cooling 186 5.11.2 Passive Building Cooling 187 5.12 Sulfur-Containing Polymers 189 5.13 Nanocellular Polymers 189 5.13.1 Poly(methyl methacrylate) Thermoplastic Poly(urethane) Composites 189 5.13.2 Poly(methyl methacrylate) Multiwalled Carbon Nanotube Composites 190 5.14 Household Applications 191 5.14.1 Refrigerator 198 5.15 Fluid Storage Tank 199 5.16 Thermal Insulation for High Explosives 200 5.17 Aerogels 202 5.17.1 Polysaccharide-Based Aerogels 202 5.17.2 Silica Aerogels 203 5.17.3 Aerogel Fibers 206 References 207 6 Membranes 211 6.1 Cellulose Acetate 211 6.2 Poly(vinylidene fluoride) 215 6.2.1 Grafted Phosphonium Poly(vinylidene fluoride) 216 6.2.2 Hollow Fiber Poly(vinylidene fluoride) 218 6.2.3 Casting Methods 220 6.3 Poly(amino acid)s 221 6.4 Hyper-crosslinked Polymers 221 6.5 Membrane for Specific Molecular Separation 222 6.6 Treatment of Water 223 6.6.1 Ammonia Removal 223 6.6.2 Fine Pore Aeration 224 6.6.3 Water Contamination Treatment 224 6.7 Enzyme Reactors 240 6.7.1 Thermoresponsive Enzyme Reactor 240 6.7.2 Reversible pH-Control 242 6.7.3 UV-Responsive Enzyme Reactor 244 6.7.4 Kidney Mimicking 244 6.8 Electrolyte Membranes 246 6.8.1 Membranes for Fuel Cells 246 6.9 Membranes for Batteries 255 6.9.1 Membranes for Lithium-Ion Batteries 255 6.9.2 Membranes for Sodium-Ion Batteries 263 6.9.3 Vanadium Redox Flow Batteries 265 6.10 pH-Sensitive Gating in Membranes 266 References 268 7 Separation Methods 275 7.1 Chromatography 275 7.1.1 Solid Phase Extraction 275 7.1.2 Liquid Chromatography 276 7.1.3 Thin-Layer Chromatography 293 7.1.4 Gas Chromatography 294 7.1.5 Gel Permeation Chromatography 297 7.1.6 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography 299 7.2 Oil Spill Control 302 7.2.1 Polyolefins 302 7.2.2 Porphyrin 303 7.2.3 Poly(urethane) Sponge 304 7.2.4 Hierarchical Porous Membrane 305 7.2.5 Waste Polymers 307 7.3 Sorbents 309 7.3.1 Purification of Ethylene 309 7.3.2 Carbon Dioxide Capture 309 7.4 Recovery of Organic Materials 314 7.4.1 Adsorption of Acteoside 314 7.4.2 Toxic Organic Materials 316 7.4.3 Removal of Organic Micropollutants 319 7.4.4 Lysozyme Extraction 326 7.5 Metal Recovery 328 7.5.1 Rice Straw in Poly(urethane) Foams 328 7.5.2 Bonding of Metal-Containing Ions 329 7.5.3 Porous Porphyrin Polymer 331 7.5.4 Iminodiacetic Acid-Functionalized Polymer 340 7.5.5 Removal of Toxic Elements 341 7.5.6 Polyfunctional Sorbent Materials 342 References 348 8 Other Fields of Use 355 8.1 Ceramic Articles 355 8.2 Polymer-Modified Porous Cement 357 8.3 Flame Retardant Foams 357 8.3.1 Poly(urethane) Foam 357 8.4 Clay-Containing Composites 360 8.4.1 Tissue Engineering 360 8.4.2 Poly(methyl methacrylate) Composites 360 8.4.3 Hectorites 361 8.4.4 Catalyst Supports 362 8.5 Lubricant Additives 366 8.6 Cosmetic Compositions 366 8.7 Packaging Materials 367 8.7.1 Breathable Films 367 8.8 Char Layer 367 8.9 Batteries 368 8.9.1 Electrodes 368 8.9.2 Rechargeable Batteries 371 8.10 Light Emission 373 8.10.1 Porous Conjugated Polymer 373 8.10.2 Oxacalixarene Macrocycle 375 8.10.3 Tetraphenylcyclopentadiene 376 8.10.4 Porous Silicone 376 8.10.5 Light-Emitting Diodes 377 8.11 Sorbents 378 8.11.1 Porous Hyper-Crosslinked Polymers 378 References 378 Index 381 Acronyms 381 Chemicals 386 General Index 402

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Two-Dimensional MXenes: Fundamentals, Characteristics, Synthesis Methods, Processing, Compositions, Structure, and Applications 1Sudipta Goswami and Chandan Kumar Ghosh 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fundamentals 2 1.3 General Characteristics of the MXenes 6 1.4 Synthesis Methods 8 1.5 Applications 19 1.6 Conclusion and Future Scope 32 2 Chemical Exfoliation and Delamination Methods of MXenes 39Kaili Gong, Lian Yin and Keqing Zhou 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 HF Etching Method 40 2.3 In Situ HF-Forming Etching Method 43 2.4 Molten Salt Etching Method 49 2.5 Electrochemical Etching Method 52 2.6 Hydrothermal Etching Method 55 2.7 Alkali Etching Method 58 2.8 Other Etching Methods 59 2.9 Exfoliation Strategies of Multilayered MXene 62 2.10 Conclusion 65 3 Surface Terminations and Surface Functionalization Strategies of MXenes 71Lekshmi A. G., Rejithamol. R., Santhy A., Akhila Raman, Asok Aparna and Appukuttan Saritha 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Surface Termination Strategies in MXenes 72 3.3 Methods of Surface Functionalization in MXenes 77 3.4 Application of Surface Modified MXenes 83 3.5 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 96 4 Electronic, Electrical and Optical Properties of MXenes 107Deepthi Jayan K. and Ragin Ramdas M. 4.1 Introduction 108 4.2 Structure of MXenes 109 4.3 An Overview of Various Methods of Synthesis of MXenes 110 4.4 Electronic Properties 112 4.5 Electrical Properties 122 4.6 Optical Properties 130 4.7 Conclusion 138 5 Magnetic, Mechanical and Thermal Properties of MXenes 147R. Ghamsarizade, B. Ramezanzadeh, H. Eivaz Mohammadloo and N. Mehranshad 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Magnetic Characteristics of MXenes 150 5.3 Mechanical Characteristics of MXenes 162 5.4 Thermal Characteristics of MXenes 171 5.5 Conclusion 178 6 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites: Fabrication Methods, Processing, Properties and Applications 185Zhenting Yin, Pengfei Jia and Bibo Wang 6.1 Introduction 185 6.2 Fabrication Methods and Processing 187 6.3 Properties 193 6.4 Applications 203 6.5 Conclusion and Outlook 209 7 Structural, Morphological and Tribological Properties of Polymer/MXene Composites 221Humira Assad, Ishrat Fatma, Praveen Kumar Sharma and Ashish Kumar 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Overview of MXene 225 7.3 MXene/Polymer Nanocomposites 225 7.4 MXene/Polymer Nanocomposite Fabrication Methods 227 7.5 Characteristics of Polymer/MXene Composites 230 7.6 Novel Applications of Polymer/MXene Composites 244 7.7 Conclusion and Outlook 247 8 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites for Dielectric Applications 257Karuppasamy P., Sennappan M., Hemavathi B., Manjunath H. R. and Anjanpura V. Raghu 8.1 Introduction 257 8.2 Synthesis of MXene 258 8.3 Modification Strategies of MXene 263 8.4 Synthesis Methods and Fabrication of MXene-Based Polymer Composites 264 8.5 Properties of MXene/Polymer Composite 266 8.6 Dielectric Applications of MXene/Polymer Composite Materials 274 8.7 Conclusion 280 9 MXenes-Reinforced Polymer Composites for Microwave Absorption and Electromagnetic Interference Shielding Applications 287B. D. S. Deeraj, Jitha S. Jayan, Asok Aparna, Appukuttan Saritha and Kuruvilla Joseph 9.1 Introduction to MXenes 287 9.2 Materials for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 292 9.3 MXenes-Based Materials for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 294 9.4 EMI Shielding Mechanisms for MXene-Based Materials 296 9.5 MXenes/Polymer Composites for EMI Shielding and Microwave Absorption 297 9.6 Electrospun Fibers with MXenes as Additives 304 9.7 Conclusions and Future Outlook 311 10 Polymer/MXene Composites for Supercapacitor and Electrochemical Double Layer Capacitor Applications 321Anju C. 10.1 Introduction 321 10.2 MXene-Polymer Composites 323 10.3 Applications of MXene Polymer Composites for Supercapacitor Applications 327 10.4 Challenges and Future Perspectives 350 10.5 Conclusion 350 11 MXene-Based Polymer Composites for Hazardous Gas and Volatile Organic Compound Detection 359Sachin Karki, Rajashree Bhuyan, Sachin R. Geed and Pravin G. Ingole 11.1 Introduction 359 11.2 Synthesis of MXenes and MXene–Polymer Composites 361 11.3 Properties of MXenes and MXene–Polymer Composites 367 11.4 Mxene–Polymer Composites Applications 369 11.5 Future Directions 379 11.6 Conclusion 380 12 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composites as Flexible Wearable Sensors 389J. Aarthi, K. Selvaraju, S. Gowri, K. Kirubavathi and Ananthakumar Ramadoss 12.1 Introduction 389 12.2 Performance Parameter for Flexible Pressure and Strain Sensor 391 12.3 Design of MXenes/Polymer Composites as Flexible Pressure Sensors 393 12.4 Design of MXenes/Polymer Composites as Flexible Strain Sensors 401 12.5 Design of MXenes/Biopolymer Composites as a Flexible Pressure Sensor 411 12.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 416 13 MXene-Based Polymer Composites for Various Biomedical Applications 423Jamuna Bai Aswathanarayan, Subba Rao V. Madhunapantula and Ravishankar Rai Vittal 13.1 Introduction to MXenes 423 13.2 Synthesis of MXenes and Their Physicochemical Properties 424 13.3 Biomedical Applications of MXenes 426 13.4 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 450 14 MXene-Reinforced Polymer Composite Membranes for Water Desalination and Wastewater Treatment 459Anjana Sreekumar, Ajil R. Nair, Akhila Raman, Akhil Sivan, Mayank Pandey, Kalim Deshmukh and Saritha Appukuttan 14.1 Introduction 459 14.2 Preparation 461 14.3 Properties of MXene/Polymer Composites 467 14.4 MXene Composite Membranes: Potentiality in Wastewater Treatment and Water Desalination 472 14.5 Conclusion and Future Outlook 491 15 MXene-Based Polymer Composite Membranes for Pervaporation and Gas Separation 501S. Manobalan and T. P. Sumangala 15.1 Introduction 501 15.2 Development of MXene-Based Polymer Composite Membrane 503 15.3 Pervaporation 512 15.4 Gas Separation 529 15.5 Conclusion and Future Work 539 Acknowledgement 540 References 540 Index 547

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the entire evolutionary spectrum of biomass, from its genetic modification and harvesting, to conversion technologies, life cycle analysis, and its value to the current global economy This original textbook introduces readers to biomassa renewable resource derived from forest, agriculture, and organic-based materialswhich has attracted significant attention as a sustainable alternative to petrochemicals for large-scale production of fuels, materials, and chemicals. The current renaissance in the manipulation and uses of biomass has been so abrupt and focused, that very few educational textbooks actually cover these topics to any great extent. That's why this interdisciplinary text is a welcome resource for those seeking a better understanding of this new discipline. It combines the underpinning science of biomass with technology applications and sustainability considerations to provide a broad focus to its readers. Introduction to Renewable BiomaterialTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xv 1 Fundamental Biochemical and Biotechnological Principles of Biomass Growth and Use 1Manfred Kircher 1.1 Learning Objectives 1 1.2 Comparison of Fossil-Based versus Bio-Based Raw Materials 2 1.2.1 The Nature of Fossil Raw Materials 2 1.2.2 Industrial Use 3 1.2.2.1 Energy 3 1.2.2.2 Chemicals 4 1.2.3 Expectancy of Resources 8 1.2.4 Green House Gas (GHG) Emission 8 1.2.5 Regional Pillars of Competitiveness 9 1.2.6 Questions for Further Consideration 11 1.3 The Nature of Bio-Based RawMaterials 11 1.3.1 Oil Crops 11 1.3.2 Sugar Crops 13 1.3.3 Starch Crops 14 1.3.4 Lignocellulosic Plants 15 1.3.5 Lignocellulosic Biomass 16 1.3.6 Algae 16 1.3.7 Plant Breeding 17 1.3.8 Basic Transformation Principles 17 1.3.8.1 First Generation 17 1.3.8.2 Second Generation 18 1.3.8.3 Third Generation 18 1.3.9 Industrial Use 18 1.3.9.1 Energy 18 1.3.9.2 Chemicals 20 1.3.9.3 Biocatalysts 22 1.3.9.4 Pharmaceuticals 23 1.3.9.5 Nutrition 24 1.3.9.6 Polymers 24 1.3.10 Expectancy of Resources 26 1.3.11 Green House Gas Emission 26 1.3.12 Regional Pillars of Competitiveness 27 1.3.13 Questions for Further Consideration 29 1.4 General Considerations Surrounding Bio-Based Raw Materials 29 1.4.1 Economical Challenges 29 1.4.2 Feedstock Demand Challenges 30 1.4.3 Ecological Considerations 31 1.4.4 Societal Considerations 31 1.4.4.1 Food Security 31 1.4.4.2 Public Acceptance 32 1.5 Research Advances Made Recently 32 1.5.1 First-Generation Processes and Products 32 1.5.2 Second-Generation Processes and Products 33 1.5.3 Third-Generation Processes and Products 33 1.6 Prominent ScientistsWorking in this Arena 34 1.7 Summary 35 1.8 Study Problems 35 1.9 Key References 36 References 36 2 Fundamental Science and Applications for Biomaterials 39Ali S. Ayoub and Lucian A. Lucia 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 What are the Biopolymers that Encompass the Structure and Function of Lignocellulosics? 39 2.2.1 Cellulose 40 2.2.2 Heteropolysaccharides 43 2.2.3 Lignin 45 2.2.4 The Discovery of Cellulose and Lignin 47 2.3 Chemical Reactivity of Cellulose, Heteropolysaccharides, and Lignin 48 2.3.1 Cellulose Reactivity 48 2.3.1.1 ReactivityMeasurements 50 2.3.1.2 Dissolving-Grade Pulps 51 2.3.1.3 Converting Paper-Grade Pulps into Dissolving-Grade Pulps 51 2.3.2 Hemicellulose Reactivity 51 2.3.2.1 Structural Characterization of Hemicellulose 52 2.3.3 Lignin Reactivity 53 2.4 Composite as a Unique Application for Renewable Materials 53 2.4.1 Rationale and Significance 54 2.4.2 Starch-Based Materials 55 2.4.3 Starch-Based Plastics 56 2.4.3.1 Novamont 57 2.4.3.2 Cereplast 58 2.4.3.3 Ecobras 58 2.4.3.4 Biotec 58 2.4.3.5 Plantic 59 2.4.3.6 Biolice 59 2.4.3.7 KTM Industries 59 2.4.3.8 Cerestech, Inc. 59 2.4.3.9 Teknor Apex 60 2.5 Question for Further Consideration 60 References 60 3 Conversion Technologies 63Maurycy Daroch 3.1 Learning Objectives 63 3.2 Energy Scenario at Global Level 63 3.2.1 Why Our Energy is so Important? 63 3.2.2 Black Treasure Chest 64 3.2.3 Conventional Fossil Resources and their Alternatives 66 3.2.3.1 Light Crude Oil (Conventional Oil) 66 3.2.3.2 Coal 66 3.2.3.3 Natural Gas 66 3.2.3.4 Shale Oil (Tight Oil) 67 3.2.3.5 Oil Sands, Bitumen Extra Heavy Oil 67 3.2.3.6 Shale Gas 67 3.2.3.7 Methane (Gas) Hydrates 67 3.2.3.8 EROI – How Much Fuel in Fuel? 68 3.2.3.9 Environmental Effects of Fossil Resource Utilisation 69 3.3 Biomass 71 3.3.1 Renewable Energy and Renewable Carbon 71 3.3.2 Why Different Types of Biomass have the Properties they Have? 73 3.4 Biomass Conversion Methods 75 3.4.1 Conversion of Biochemical Energy Perspective 75 3.4.2 Overview of Biomass Conversion Technologies 78 3.4.3 Thermochemical Conversion of Biomass 78 3.4.4 Biomass Combustion 80 3.4.5 Gasification 81 3.4.6 Pyrolysis 84 3.4.7 Conversion of Oily Feedstocks 86 3.4.8 Biochemical Conversion of Biomass 88 3.4.8.1 Aerobic and Anaerobic Metabolisms 88 3.4.8.2 Central Metabolic Pathway under Anaerobic Conditions 89 3.4.9 Harvesting Energy from Biochemical Processes 91 3.4.9.1 Ethanol Fermentation 91 3.4.9.2 ABE Fermentation 92 3.4.9.3 Biohydrogen 93 3.4.9.4 Biomethane 94 3.5 Metrics to Assist the Transition Towards Sustainable Production of Bioenergy and Biomaterials 95 3.5.1 EROI – PrimaryMetrics of Energy Carrier Efficiency 95 3.5.2 LCA – Sustainability Determinant 96 3.5.3 Environmental Assessment of Bioenergy Production Processes 97 3.5.3.1 Impacts Related to Land-Use Change 97 3.5.3.2 Impacts of Feedstock Cultivation 98 3.5.3.3 Impacts of Conversion Process 98 3.5.3.4 Impacts of Product Use 98 3.5.4 SustainabilityMetrics in Biomass and Bioenergy Policies 99 3.5.5 Renewable and Non-Renewable Carbon – Taxation and Subsidies 99 3.6 Summary 102 3.7 Key References 102 References 103 4 Characterization Methods and Techniques 107Noppadon Sathitsuksanoh and Scott Renneckar 4.1 Philosophy Statement 107 4.2 Understanding the Characteristics of Biomass 107 4.3 Taking Precautions Prior to Setting Up Experiments for Biomass Analysis 108 4.4 Classifying Biomass Sizes for Proper Analysis 109 4.5 Moisture Content of Biomass and Importance of Drying Samples Prior to Analysis 110 4.6 When the Carbon is Burned 111 4.7 Structural CellWall Analysis, What To Look For 112 4.8 Hydrolyzing Biomass and Determining Its Composition 114 4.8.1 Analyzing Filtrate by HPLC for Monosaccharide Contents 115 4.8.2 Choosing the HPLC Column and Its Operating Conditions 115 4.9 Determining CellWall Structures Through Spectroscopy and Scattering 116 4.9.1 Probing the Chemical Structure of Biomass 116 4.9.1.1 X-Ray Diffraction (XRD) 118 4.9.1.2 Cross-polarization/Magic Angle Spinning (CP/MAS) 13CNMR 119 4.9.1.3 Fourier-Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FTIR) 121 4.9.1.4 Raman Analysis 122 4.10 Examining the Size of the Biopolymers: MolecularWeight Analysis 123 4.11 Intricacies of Understanding Lignin Structure 125 4.11.1 13CNMR 126 4.11.2 31P NMR 126 4.11.3 2D HSQC 128 4.11.4 Methoxyl Content Determination 132 4.11.4.1 1HNMR 132 4.11.4.2 Hydriodic Acid 132 4.11.4.3 Direct Methanol 132 4.12 Questions for Further Consideration 132 References 132 5 Introduction to Life-Cycle Assessment and Decision Making Applied to Forest Biomaterials 141Jesse Daystar and Richard Venditti 5.1 Introduction 141 5.1.1 What is LCA? 141 5.1.1.1 History 142 5.1.2 LCA for Decision Making 142 5.1.2.1 Eco-labels 143 5.2 LCA Components Overview 144 5.2.1 Goal and Scope Definition 145 5.2.2 Inventory Analysis 145 5.2.3 Life-Cycle Impact Assessment 146 5.2.4 Interpretation 146 5.3 Life-Cycle Assessment Steps 146 5.3.1 Goal, Scope, System Boundaries 146 5.3.1.1 Goal Definition 146 5.3.1.2 Scope Definition 147 5.3.1.3 Functional Unit 148 5.3.1.4 Cutoff Criteria 148 5.3.1.5 Problems Set – Goal and Scope Definition 148 5.3.2 Life-Cycle Inventory 150 5.3.2.1 Preparation of Data Collection Based on Goal and Scope 151 5.3.2.2 Data Collection 152 5.3.2.3 Data Quality 155 5.3.2.4 Coproduct Treatment – Allocation 157 5.3.2.5 Relating Data to the Unit Process 158 5.3.2.6 Relating Data to the Functional Unit 159 5.3.2.7 Data Aggregation 159 5.3.2.8 LCI Data Interpretation 159 5.3.2.9 Problems Set – Life-Cycle Inventory 160 5.3.2.10 Mandatory Elements 166 5.3.2.11 Classification 168 5.3.2.12 Characterization 169 5.3.2.13 Optional Elements 170 5.3.2.14 Life Cycle Impact Assessment Interpretation 173 5.3.2.15 Problems Set –Life-Cycle Impact Assessment 173 5.4 LCA Tools for Forest Biomaterials 177 5.4.1 FICAT 177 5.4.2 GREET Model 178 References 178 6 First Principles of Pretreatment and Cracking Biomass to Fundamental Building Blocks 181Amir Daraei Garmakhany and Somayeh Sheykhnazari 6.1 Introduction 181 6.1.1 What Is Lignocellulosic Material? 183 6.1.1.1 Lignocellulosic Materials 183 6.1.1.2 Cellulose 183 6.1.1.3 Hemicellulose 185 6.1.1.4 Lignin 187 6.2 What Difference Should Be Considered BetweenWood and Agricultural Biomass? 189 6.2.1 Intrapolymeric Bonds 190 6.2.2 Polymeric Inter Bonds 190 6.2.3 Functional Groups and Chemical Characteristics of Lignocellulosic Biomass Components 191 6.2.4 Aromatic Ring 191 6.2.5 Hydroxyl Group 192 6.2.6 Ether Bond 192 6.2.7 Ester Bond 192 6.2.8 Hydrogen Bond 194 6.3 Define Pretreatment 194 6.3.1 What Is the Purpose of Pretreatment? 194 6.4 Steps of Production of Cellulosic Ethanol 195 6.4.1 Pretreatment 195 6.4.2 Hydrolysis 195 6.4.3 What Are the Inhibitors for Biomass Carbohydrate Hydrolysis? 195 6.4.4 Fermentation 196 6.4.5 Formation of Fermentation Inhibitors 196 6.4.6 Sugars Degradation Products 196 6.4.7 Lignin Degradation Products 197 6.4.8 Acetic Acid 197 6.4.9 Inhibitory Extractives 197 6.4.10 Heavy Metal Ions 197 6.4.11 Separation 197 6.5 What Are the Key Considerations for Making a Successful Pretreatment Technology? 198 6.5.1 Effect of Pretreatment on Hydrolysis Process 199 6.6 What Are the GeneralMethods Used in Pretreatment? 199 6.7 What Is Currently Being Done and What Are the Advances? 200 6.7.1 Steam Explosion 201 6.7.2 Hydrothermolysis 204 6.7.3 High-Energy Irradiations 205 6.7.4 Acid Pretreatment 207 6.7.5 Mechanism of Acid Hydrolysis 208 6.7.6 Alkaline Pretreatment 208 6.7.7 Ammonia Pretreatment 210 6.7.8 Ammonia Recycle Percolation (ARP) 210 6.7.9 Ammonia Fiber Expansion (AFEX) 210 6.7.10 Defects of AFEX Process 210 6.7.11 Enzymatic Pretreatment 210 6.7.12 Advantages of Biological Pretreatment 211 6.7.13 Defects of Biological Pretreatment 211 6.8 Summary 211 References 212 7 Green Route to Prepare Renewable Polyesters fromMonomers: Enzymatic Polymerization 219Toufik Naolou 7.1 Philosophic Statement 219 7.2 Introduction 219 7.3 Lipase-Catalyzed Ring-Opening Polymerizations of Cyclic Monomeric Esters (Lactones and Lactides) 220 7.4 Lipase-Catalyzed Polycondensation 223 7.4.1 Dicarboxylic Acid or Its Esters with Diols 224 7.4.2 Dicarboxylic Acid or Its Esters with Polyols 225 7.4.3 Polyesters from Fatty Acid-Based Monomers 226 7.4.3.1 Lipase-Catalyzed Polycondensation of α, ω-Dicarboxylic Acids and Diols 226 7.4.3.2 Lipase-Catalyzed Polycondensation of Hydroxy Fatty Acids 227 7.4.3.3 Fatty Acids as Side Chains to Modify Functional Polyesters 228 7.4.4 Polyester Using Furan as Building Block 229 7.4.5 Conclusions and Remarks 230 7.4.6 Questions for Further Consideration 230 List of Abbreviations 230 References 231 8 Oil-Based and Bio-Derived Thermoplastic Polymer Blends and Composites 239Alessia Quitadamo, ValerieMassardier and Marco Valente 8.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Oil-Based and Bio-Derived Thermoplastic Polymer Blends 240 8.2.1 Comparison Between Oil-Based and Bio-DerivedThermoplastic Polymers 240 8.2.2 Thermoplastics Blends 246 8.3 Thermoplastic Composites with Natural Fillers 252 8.3.1 Wood–Plastic Composites 254 8.3.2 Waste Paper as Filler inThermoplastic Composites 260 8.4 Conclusion 263 8.5 Questions for Further Consideration 264 References 264 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisBiobased Adhesives Unique and comprehensive book edited by acknowledged leaders on biobased adhesives that will replace petroleum-based adhesives. This book contains 23 chapters covering the various ramifications of biobased adhesives. The chapters are written by world-class scientists and technologists actively involved in the arena of biobased adhesives. The book is divided into three parts: Part 1: Fundamental Aspects; Part 2: Classes of Biobased Adhesives; and Part 3: Applications of Biobased Adhesives. Topics covered include: an introduction to biobased adhesives; adhesion theories and adhesion and surface issues with biobased adhesives; chemistry of adhesives; biorefinery products as biobased raw materials for adhesives; naturally aldehyde-based thermosetting resins; natural crosslinkers; curing and adhesive bond strength development in biobased adhesives; mimicking nature; bio-inspired adhesives; protein adhesives; carbohydrates as adhesives; natural polymer-based adhesives; epoTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1: Fundamental Aspects 1 1 Introduction to Naturally-Based (Bio-) Adhesives 3 Manfred Dunky 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Overview and Challenges For Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 6 1.2.1 Combined Use of Synthetic and Naturally-Based Adhesives 8 1.2.2 Overview on Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 9 1.2.3 Requirements, Limitations, and Opportunities for Wood Adhesives Based on Natural Resources 11 1.3 Biorefinery and Platform Chemicals 11 1.4 Lignin as Raw Material for Platform Chemicals 20 1.5 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural (5-HMF) as Platform Chemical 23 1.6 Mimicking Nature 27 1.7 Special Topics and Latest Developments 29 1.8 Prospects 30 1.9 Summary 30 General Literature on Biobased Adhesives 30 List of Abbreviations 34 References 35 2 Adhesion Theories in Naturally-Based Bonding: Adhesion and Surface Issues with Naturally-Based Adhesives 45 Douglas J. Gardner, Geeta Pokhrel and Alexander Collins 2.1 Introduction 45 2.2 Adhesion Theories 46 2.2.1 Mechanical Interlocking 47 2.2.2 Electrostatic Mechanism 48 2.2.3 Adsorption (Thermodynamic) or Wetting Mechanism 49 2.2.4 Diffusion Mechanism 50 2.2.5 Chemical (Covalent) Bonding Mechanism 50 2.2.5.1 Hydrogen Bonding 51 2.2.6 Acid-Base Theory 51 2.2.7 Weak Boundary Layers 52 2.2.8 Stickiness or Tackiness 53 2.3 Protein Adhesives 54 2.3.1 Animal-Sourced Proteins 55 2.3.2 Plant Proteins 57 2.4 Carbohydrate-Based Adhesives 59 2.5 Plant or Wood-Based Extractives 60 2.5.1 Rubber 60 2.5.2 Resins 61 2.5.2.1 Rosin 62 2.5.2.2 Terpene Resins 63 2.5.2.3 Tannins 64 2.5.2.4 Gums 65 2.6 Fats or Oils 66 2.6.1 Tung Oil 67 2.6.2 Linseed Oil 68 2.6.3 Soybean Oil 69 2.6.4 Castor Oil 70 2.6.5 Miscellaneous Oils 71 2.7 Summary 72 Acknowledgements 72 List of Abbreviations 72 References 74 3 The Chemistry of Bioadhesives 85 A. Pizzi 3.1 Introduction 85 3.2 Carbohydrate Bioadhesives 86 3.3 Protein Bioadhesives 91 3.4 Lignin-Based Bioadhesives 93 3.5 Tannin-Based Bioadhesives 95 3.5.1 Hydrolysable Tannins 96 3.5.1.1 Gallo-Tannins 96 3.5.1.2 Ellagi-Tannins 96 3.5.2 Condensed Polyflavonoid Tannins 96 3.5.3 Reactions of Condensed Flavonoid Tannins 99 3.6 Other Bio-Adhesives for Wood Composites 106 3.7 Summary 108 List of Abbreviations 109 References 110 4 Biorefinery Products as Naturally-Based Key Raw Materials for Adhesives 119 Johannes Karl Fink 4.1 Biorefinery Systems 119 4.1.1 History of Biomaterials 119 4.1.2 Classification of Biorefinery Systems 120 4.1.3 Biorefinery Processes 123 4.1.3.1 Hydrothermal Processes 123 4.1.3.2 Thermochemical Processes 123 4.1.3.3 Chemical Processes 124 4.1.3.4 Biochemical Processes 124 4.1.3.5 Bacterial Processes 124 4.1.4 Renewable Materials for Biorefinery 126 4.1.4.1 Carbohydrates 126 4.1.4.2 Lignin 126 4.1.4.3 Triglycerides 127 4.1.4.4 Mixed Organic Residues 127 4.2 Biobased Materials 128 4.2.1 Biobased Monomers 128 4.2.2 Synthesis Methods 129 4.2.2.1 L-3,4-Dihydroxyphenylalanine 135 4.2.2.2 2-Pyrone-4,6-dicarboxylic acid 136 4.3 Biobased Materials Suitable for Adhesives 137 4.3.1 Additives 137 4.3.2 Wood Adhesives 138 4.3.3 Lignin-Based Adhesives 139 4.3.4 Biorefinery Process of Kash 139 4.3.5 Lignin-Phenol Adhesives 140 4.3.5.1 Enzymatic Hydrolysis of Lignin 141 4.3.5.2 Biorefinery Residues 142 4.3.5.3 Phenol Replacement by Lignins 142 4.3.6 Lignin-Epoxy Adhesives 143 4.3.7 Lignosulfonates 145 4.3.8 Tannins 145 4.3.9 Protein-Based Adhesives 146 4.4 Synthesis Methods for Biobased Adhesives 147 4.4.1 Methylolated Wood-Derived Bio-Oil 147 4.4.2 Biosynthesis of Lignin 148 4.4.3 Soy-Based Adhesives 149 4.4.4 Bisphenol A-Glycidyl Methacrylate Replacement 149 4.5 Modification of Lignin for Better Performance 150 4.5.1 Functionalization with Aromatic Compounds 152 4.5.1.1 Functionalization of Lignin 153 4.5.1.2 Phenolation of Lignin 154 4.5.2 Organosolv Lignin-Based Materials 155 4.6 Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 155 4.6.1 Lignin as Filler 156 4.6.2 Biobased Acrylic Compounds 156 4.6.3 UV-Tunable Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 157 4.7 Summary 158 References 158 5 Natural Aldehyde-Based Thermosetting Resins 167 Manfred Dunky 5.1 Introduction 167 5.2 Aliphatic Aldehydes 168 5.2.1 Acetaldehyde 168 5.2.2 Glyoxal 169 5.2.2.1 Glyoxalation of Lignin 171 5.2.2.2 Glyoxylic Acid and Glyoxal 176 5.2.2.3 Glyoxal and Glutaraldehyde 176 5.2.2.4 Glyoxal and 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural (5-HMF) 177 5.2.3 Dimethoxy-Ethanal (Dimethoxy-Acetaldehyde, DME) 177 5.2.4 Propanal (Propionaldehyde) 178 5.2.5 Butyraldehyde 178 5.2.6 Isobutyraldehyde (Isobutanal) 179 5.2.7 Succinaldehyde (Butandial) 179 5.2.8 Glutar(di)aldehyde (GA) (Pentandial) 180 5.3 Aldehydes Based on Cyclic Structures 180 5.3.1 Furfural (Furfurylaldehyde) 180 5.3.2 Furfuryl Alcohol (FA) 184 5.3.3 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural (5-HMF) (see also Chapters 1 and 17) 185 5.3.4 2,5-Diformylfuran (2,5-Furan-Dicarbaldehyde) 192 5.3.5 Aromatic Aldehyde Precursors 193 5.3.6 Polymers with Pendent Aldehyde Groups 194 5.4 Summary 195 List of Abbreviations 195 References 198 6 Natural Crosslinkers for Naturally-Based Adhesives 207 Manfred Dunky 6.1 Introduction 207 6.2 Crosslinking Reactions 208 6.2.1 Proteins 208 6.2.2 Tannins 211 6.2.3 Carbohydrates 214 6.2.4 Lignins 217 6.3 Aliphatic Aldehydes as Crosslinkers 219 6.3.1 Formaldehyde 219 6.3.2 Higher Aldehydes 221 6.3.3 Glyoxal 221 6.3.4 Glutaraldehyde 223 6.3.5 Higher Aliphatic Aldehydes 226 6.4 Cyclic and Aromatic Aldehydes as Crosslinkers 226 6.4.1 Furfural 226 6.4.2 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural (5-HMF) 228 6.4.3 Non-Volatile Aldehydes from Carbohydrates 230 6.5 Crosslinkers Prepared from Biomass 231 6.5.1 Furfuryl Alcohol 231 6.5.2 Extracts as Crosslinkers 234 6.5.3 Glycerol Diglycidyl Ether (GDE), Glycerol Polyglycidyl Ether (GPE), and Ethylene Glycol Diglycidyl Ether (EGDE) 234 6.5.4 Triglycidylamine (TGA) 236 6.5.5 Diethylene-Triamine (DETA) 237 6.5.6 Citric Acid 237 6.6 Synthetic Crosslinkers 240 6.6.1 Polyamidoamine–Epichlorohydrin (PAE) Resins 240 6.6.2 Epoxy Resins 241 6.6.3 Polyethylenimine (PEI) 242 6.6.4 Polyamidoamine (PADA) 243 List of Abbreviations 243 References 245 7 Curing and Adhesive Bond Strength Development in Naturally-Based Adhesives 255 Milan Šernek and Jure Žigon 7.1 Introduction 255 7.2 Curing Monitoring Techniques 256 7.2.1 Gel Time Test 256 7.2.2 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 257 7.2.3 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 258 7.2.4 Dielectric Analysis (DEA) 259 7.3 Bond Strength Development Monitoring Techniques 260 7.3.1 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis (DMA) 260 7.3.2 Thermomechanical Analysis (TMA) 261 7.3.3 Automated Bonding Evaluation System (ABES) 262 7.3.4 Tensile-Shear Strength 263 7.4 Curing Mechanisms in Naturally-Based Adhesives 263 7.4.1 Tannin-Based Adhesives 263 7.4.2 Lignin-Based Adhesives 265 7.4.3 Soy-Based Adhesives 267 7.4.4 Sucrose-Based Adhesives 269 7.4.5 Starch-Based Adhesives 270 7.4.6 Liquefied Wood (LW)-Based Adhesives 271 7.5 Summary 272 Acknowledgements 273 List of Abbreviations 273 References 274 8 Mimicking Nature: Bio-Inspired Adhesives 279 Manfred Dunky 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Improvement of Adhesive Performance 282 8.3 Underwater Adhesives (Wet Application Adhesives) 286 8.4 Detechable Bonding and Self-Healing Polymers 289 8.5 Medical Applications 292 8.6 Summary 294 List of Abbreviations 294 References 295 Part 2: Classes of Biobased Adhesives 305 9 Protein Adhesives – Composition, Structure and Performance 307 Charles R. Frihart 9.1 Introduction 307 9.2 Composition of Proteins 308 9.3 Types, Sources, Processing, and Properties of Proteins 309 9.3.1 Collagen (Animal) 309 9.3.2 Globular (Plant) 311 9.3.3 Globular (Milk) 315 9.3.4 Globular (Egg) 316 9.3.5 Globular (Blood) 317 9.3.6 Other Protein Sources 317 9.4 Conclusion (Future of Protein Adhesives) and Summary 317 List of Abbreviations 318 References 319 10 Carbohydrates (Polysaccharides) as Adhesives 325 Lee Seng Hua and Lum Wei Chen 10.1 Introduction 325 10.2 Cellulose Derivatives 326 10.3 Starch-Based Adhesives 330 10.4 Dextrin 331 10.5 Natural Gums 333 10.6 Chitosan 335 10.7 Summary and Prospects 339 Acknowledgements 340 List of Abbreviations 340 References 341 11 Natural Polymer-Based Adhesives 345 A.A. Shybi, Siby Varghese, Hanna J. Maria and Sabu Thomas 11.1 Introduction 345 11.2 Natural Rubber (NR)-Based Adhesives 346 11.2.1 Introduction to NR-Based Adhesives 346 11.2.2 NR-Based Wood Adhesives 350 11.2.3 NR-Based Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 352 11.2.4 NR-Based Adhesives in Leather, Rubber, Textile and Metal Bonding Applications 353 11.3 Poly(lactic acid) (PLA)-Based Wood Adhesives 354 11.3.1 Introduction to PLA-Based Adhesives 354 11.3.2 PLA-Based Wood Adhesives 355 11.3.3 PLA-Based Hot-Melt Adhesives 356 11.3.4 PLA-Based Adhesives for Metal Bonding 357 11.4 Chitosan-Based Adhesives 357 11.4.1 Introduction to Chitosan-Based Adhesives 357 11.4.2 Chitosan-Based Wood Adhesives 358 11.5 Summary 359 List of Abbreviations 360 References 361 12 Epoxy Adhesives from Natural Materials 367 Charles R. Frihart 12.1 Introduction and Morphology 367 12.2 Basic Properties of Epoxies 369 12.3 Epoxy Synthesis 370 12.4 Epoxy Curing 373 12.4.1 One-Component Epoxies 375 12.4.2 Two-Component Epoxies 376 12.5 Aromatic Epoxies 376 12.5.1 Aromatic Bis-Phenol Epoxies 376 12.5.2 Aromatic Novolac Epoxies 377 12.5.3 Biobased Aromatic Epoxies from Polyphenols, Tannins, Cardanol, and Lignin 378 12.5.4 Aromatic Epoxies from Lignin and Woody Biomass 378 12.6 Aliphatic Epoxies 379 12.6.1 Aliphatic Epoxies from Vegetable Oils 380 12.6.2 Aliphatic Epoxies from Sugars 381 12.6.3 Aliphatic Epoxies from Terpenoids 382 12.6.4 Other Aliphatic Epoxies 382 12.7 Hardeners 383 12.7.1 Amines 383 12.7.1.1 Aliphatic Amines 383 12.7.1.2 Biobased Aliphatic Amines 384 12.7.1.3 Aromatic Amines 385 12.7.2 Anhydrides of Organic Acids 386 12.8 Other Curing Mechanisms 386 12.9 Other Additives 386 12.9.1 Tougheners 386 12.9.2 Modifiers 387 12.10 Status of Biobased Epoxy Adhesives 387 12.11 Summary 388 List of Abbreviations 389 References 389 13 Naturally-Based Polyurethane Bioadhesives 395 A. Pizzi 13.1 Introduction 395 13.2 Biopolyols-Isocyanate Polyurethanes 396 13.3 Non-Isocyanate Polyurethanes (NIPUs) 399 13.4 NIPUs as Adhesives 402 13.5 Summary 408 References 408 14 Nanocellulose-Modified Wood Adhesives 415 Stefan Veigel, Stefan Pinkl and Wolfgang Gindl-Altmutter 14.1 Introduction 415 14.2 Nanocellulose as Additive for Conventional and Biobased Wood Adhesives 416 14.3 Nanocellulose-Derived Wood Adhesives 420 14.4 Prospects 421 14.5 Summary 421 Note 422 List of Abbreviations 422 References 423 15 Debondable, Recyclable and/or Biodegradable Naturally-Based Adhesives 427 Natanel Jarach and Hanna Dodiuk 15.1 Introduction 427 15.2 Debondable Adhesives 428 15.2.1 Types of Debonding Adhesives 428 15.2.2 Reversible Covalent Bonds Containing Adhesives 429 15.3 Biobased Debondable and Recyclable Adhesives 431 15.3.1 Biodegradable Adhesives 431 15.3.2 Biobased Reversible Covalent Bonds Containing Adhesives 438 15.4 Summary 453 List of Abbreviations 453 References 454 16 Fungal Mycelia as Bioadhesives 463 Wenjing Sun, Mehdi Tajvidi and Christopher G. Hunt 16.1 Introduction 463 16.2 Basics of Fungal Mycelia 464 16.2.1 Fungal Species 464 16.2.2 Fungal Cell Wall 464 16.2.3 Effects of Fungal Mycelia on Lignocellulosic Substrates 465 16.3 Production Procedure 465 16.4 Adhesive Performance 467 16.4.1 As-Grown Foams 467 16.4.2 Hot-Pressed Panels 470 16.4.3 Engineered Living Materials 470 16.5 Improvement Strategies 470 16.5.1 Incorporating Natural Fibers 471 16.5.2 Infusing Bio-Resin 471 16.5.3 Incorporating Natural Reinforcement Particles 471 16.6 Prospects 471 16.7 Summary 471 Acknowledgements 472 List of Abbreviations 472 References 472 17 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural-Based Adhesives: Challenges and Opportunities 477 Wilfried Sailer-Kronlachner, Catherine Rosenfeld, Johannes Konnerth and Hendrikus van Herwijnen 17.1 Introduction 477 17.2 5-Hydroxymethylfurfural as Biobased Platform Chemical 479 17.2.1 Potential as Chemical Building Block 479 17.2.2 Challenges in the Implementation of an Industrial 5-HMF Production 480 17.3 5-HMF-Based Adhesive Systems 483 17.3.1 Wood Adhesives 484 17.3.2 Non-Wood Applications of 5-HMF-Based Adhesives 487 17.3.3 Examples of Adhesives Produced from 5-HMF Derivatives 488 17.4 Prospects 490 17.5 Summary 491 Acknowledgements 491 List of Abbreviations 492 References 492 18 Adhesive Precursors from Tree-Derived Naval Stores 499 Charles R. Frihart 18.1 Introduction 499 18.2 Sources and Structures 500 18.2.1 Rosins 500 18.2.2 Fatty Acids 502 18.2.3 Terpenes 503 18.3 Pressure-Sensitive Adhesives 503 18.4 Chemistry and Products 505 18.4.1 Rosins 505 18.4.2 Modification of the Carboxylic Acid 506 18.4.3 Modification of the Olefinic Portion 508 18.4.4 Ink Pigment Binders 509 18.4.5 Tall Oil Fatty Acids 510 18.4.6 Terpenes 512 18.5 Summary 513 List of Abbreviations 513 References 513 Part 3: Applications of Biobased Adhesives 517 19 Naturally-Based Adhesives for Wood and Wood-Based Panels 519 Manfred Dunky 19.1 Introduction 519 19.2 Protein-Based Wood Adhesives 521 19.2.1 Wood Bonding with Proteins 522 19.2.2 Plant-Based Proteins (for Soy Proteins see Section 19.2.3) 524 19.2.3 Soy Proteins 525 19.2.4 Animal-Based Proteins 528 19.2.5 Denaturation and Modification of Proteins 531 19.2.6 Crosslinking of Proteins 534 19.3 Wood Adhesives Based on Carbohydrates 535 19.3.1 Types and Sources of Carbohydrates for Use as Wood Adhesives 535 19.3.2 Modification of Starch for Possible Use as Wood Adhesive 537 19.3.3 Combination and Crosslinking of Carbohydrates with Natural and Synthetic Components 539 19.3.4 Degradation and Repolymerization of Carbohydrates 539 19.4 Tannin-Based Wood Adhesives 539 19.4.1 Types and Chemistry of Condensed Tannins 540 19.4.2 Hardening and Crosslinking of Tannins 542 19.4.3 Combination of Tannins with Other Components 546 19.5 Wood Adhesives Based on Lignin 547 19.5.1 Chemistry and Structure of Lignin 547 19.5.2 Modification of Lignin 548 19.5.3 Lignin as Adhesive 552 19.5.4 Lignin as Sole Adhesive 554 19.5.5 Reactions of Lignin with Various Aldehydes and Other Naturally-Based Components 557 19.6 Summary 558 List of Abbreviations 558 References 559 20 Activation of Wood Surfaces and “Binderless” Wood Composites 579 Manfred Dunky 20.1 Introduction 579 20.2 Self-Adhesion and “Binderless” Boards 584 20.2.1 Wood and Non-Wood Components for “Binderless” Boards 586 20.2.2 Thermal and Physical Pretreatments of Wood Material and the Wood Surface 589 20.2.3 Chemical Treatments of the Wood Surface 591 20.2.4 Enzymatic Pretreatment of the Wood Surface 595 20.2.5 Degradation and Re-Polymerization of Carbohydrates 598 20.2.6 Citric Acid 601 20.2.6.1 Sugars and Starch in Combination with Citric Acid 601 20.2.6.2 Wood in Combination with Citric Acid 602 20.2.7 Hardboards (Wet Fiber Process) 605 20.2.8 Wood Welding 607 20.3 Summary 611 List of Abbreviations 611 References 612 21 Bonding of Solid Wood-Based Materials for Timber Construction 621 Peter Niemz and Manfred Dunky 21.1 Introduction 621 21.2 Brief Overview of Solid Wood-Based Materials 622 21.3 Adhesives Used for Materials in Structural Timber Engineering 625 21.3.1 Adhesives for the Production of Glued-Laminated Timber (Surface Bonding) 625 21.3.2 Casein Adhesives 628 21.4 Factors Influencing the Quality of Adhesively-Bonded Wood 631 21.4.1 Short Overview 631 21.4.2 Influence of the Wood Substrate (Structure and Wood Species) 631 21.4.3 Influence of Adhesives 636 21.4.4 Influence of Wood Machining 643 21.4.5 Quality Control of Bonded Wood Joints 644 21.4.6 Influence of Service Conditions 644 21.4.7 Aging of Bonded Wood 646 21.5 Trends in the Use of Biobased Adhesives 649 21.6 Summary 650 List of Abbreviations 651 References 652 22 Applications and Industrial Implementations of Naturally-Based Adhesives 659 Manfred Dunky 22.1 Introduction 659 22.2 Wood-Based Panels 660 22.3 Shoe Fabrication (Footwear Industry) 664 22.4 Bonding of Metals 666 22.5 Composites in Automotive, Aircraft, and Aeronautical Industries 667 22.6 Natural Composites with Matrices Based on Natural Resources 673 22.7 Mineral Wool 679 22.8 Packaging and Other Applications 679 22.9 Biomedical Applications 680 22.10 Biodegradability and Recycling 681 22.11 Life Cycle Analysis (LCA) 683 22.12 Summary 686 List of Abbreviations 686 References 688 23 Bioadhesives for the Advancement of Controlled Drug Delivery and Wearable Bioelectronics 705 Monalisha Ghosh Dastidar, Sharmili Roy and Sudarsan Neogi 23.1 Introduction 705 23.1.1 History of Bioadhesives and their Evolution 706 23.1.2 Classification of Bioadhesives 706 23.1.2.1 Natural Bioadhesives 707 23.1.2.2 Biological and Biocompatible Bioadhesives 707 23.1.2.3 Biomimetic and Bioinspired Bioadhesives 707 23.1.3 Mechanism of Bioadhesives 708 23.2 Bioadhesives in Controlled Drug Delivery 708 23.3 Bioadhesives in Bioelectronics 710 23.4 Limitations of Bioadhesives for Biomedical Applications 717 23.5 Summary and Future Prospects 718 List of Abbreviations 719 References 720 Index 727

Read more less

Book SynopsisPROGRESS IN ADHESION AND ADHESIVES Keep up-to-date with the latest on adhesion and adhesives from an expert group of worldwide authors. The book series Progress in Adhesion and Adhesives was conceived as an annual publication and the premier volume made its debut in 2015. The series has been well-received as it is unique in providing substantive and curated review chapters on subjects that touch many disciplines. Peer-reviewed and edited by Dr. Mittal, the individual chapter reviews have become a trusted source of quality information. The current book contains eight commissioned chapters and cover topics including stress distribution and design analysis of adhesively bonded tubular composite joints; durability of structural adhesive joints; mechanical surface treatment of adherends for adhesive bonding; surface modification of polymer materials by excimer UV light; corona discharge treatment of materials to enhance adhesion; adhesion activation of aramid fibers; dual-cured hydrogelsTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Stress Distribution and Design Analysis of Adhesively Bonded Tubular Composite Joints: A Review 1Mohammad Shishesaz 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 A Brief Review of Stress Analysis in Tubular Composite Joints 4 1.3 Governing Equations Based on Linear Elasticity 10 1.3.1 Typical Assumptions in a Tubular Lap Joint Under Torsion 10 1.3.2 Stress Distribution in a Defect-Free Tubular Lap Joint Under Torsion 19 1.3.3 Stress Distribution in Defect-Free Joints Under Bending Moment 23 1.3.4 Stress Distribution in Defect-Free Joints Under Axial Load 24 1.3.5 Design Aspects Related to Adhesive Layer 28 1.3.6 Stress Distribution in Damaged Joints Due to Voids, Debonds, or Delaminations 32 1.3.7 Stress Distribution in Hybrid Joints Under Torsion 40 1.4 Nonlinear Analysis and Stress Distribution in Tubular Composite Joints 45 1.5 Failure Analysis of Adhesive Layer 47 1.6 Summary 50 2 Durability of Structural Adhesive Joints: Factors Affecting Durability, Durability Assessment and Ways to Improve Durability 57H. S. Panda, Srujan Sapkal and S. K. Panigrahi 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Factors Affecting Durability 60 2.2.1 Materials 61 2.2.1.1 Adhesives 61 2.2.2 Effects of Glass Transition Temperature (Tg) 68 2.2.2.1 Elastic Modulus 68 2.2.2.2 Lap-Shear Strength 69 2.2.3 Effects of Adherends 70 2.2.3.1 Aluminium 71 2.2.3.2 Steel 77 2.2.3.3 Titanium 81 2.2.4 Effects of Environment 82 2.2.4.1 Moisture 82 2.2.4.2 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (CTE) 84 2.2.4.3 Stress 85 2.2.4.4 Temperature 86 2.2.5 Other Factors Affecting the Durability of Adhesive Joints 87 2.3 Durability Assessment 87 2.4 Methods to Improve Durability 90 2.4.1 Addition of Nano-Fillers 91 2.4.1.1 Carbon Nanofillers 92 2.4.1.2 Alumina-Based Nano-Fillers 94 2.4.1.3 Silica-Based Nano-Fillers 95 2.4.1.4 Other Nanofillers 99 2.5 Summary 102 3 Mechanical Surface Treatment of Adherends for Adhesive Bonding 113Anna Rudawska 3.1 Introduction 114 3.2 Characteristics of Mechanical Surface Treatment Methods 116 3.2.1 Introduction 116 3.2.2 Processing with Coated Abrasive Tools 117 3.2.3 Abrasive Blasting 122 3.2.4 Shot Peening 125 3.2.5 Brushing 126 3.2.6 Milling 127 3.2.7 Grinding 127 3.3 Types of Abrasive Blasting Operations 128 3.3.1 Sandblasting 129 3.3.2 Shot Blasting 132 3.3.3 Grit-Blasting 134 3.3.4 Corundumizing 134 3.3.5 Glazing 134 3.3.6 Dry Ice Blasting 134 3.3.7 Soda Blasting 135 3.4 Influence of Mechanical Treatment on the Strength of Adhesive Joints 136 3.4.1 Processing with Abrasive Coated Tools 136 3.4.1.1 Mechanical Treatment Using Single and Multiple Abrasive Coated Tools 136 3.4.1.2 Surface Treatment with a Single Type of Abrasive Paper 143 3.4.2 Abrasive Blasting - Sandblasting 145 3.4.2.1 Influence of the Type of Abrasive Blasting on the Strength of Adhesive Joints: Sandblasting and Grit-Blasting 145 3.4.2.2 Influence of Abrasive Blasting Parameters on the Strength of Adhesive Joints 147 3.4.3 Abrasive Blasting – Shot Peening 158 3.4.3.1 Influence of Different Variants of Surface Treatment Methods Including Shot Peening on the Strength of Adhesive Joints 158 3.5 Summary 161 4 Surface Modification of Polymer Materials by Excimer 172 nm UV Light: A Review 171Keiko Gotoh 4.1 Introduction 172 4.2 Wettability Measurements by Conventional Sessile Drop Technique 173 4.3 Preference for the Wilhelmy Technique in Wettability Analyses 176 4.4 UV Lithography Technique for Preparation of Mosaic Wettability Pattern 180 4.5 Chemical and Topographical Changes on Polymer Surfaces Due to UV Treatment 182 4.6 Determination of Surface Free Energy by Contact Angle Measurements 184 4.7 Effect of UV Treatment on Particle Adhesion 186 4.8 Improvement in Textile Performance by UV Treatment 188 4.9 Summary and Prospects 195 5 Corona Discharge Treatment for Surface Modification and Adhesion Improvement 203Thomas Schuman 5.1 Introduction 203 5.2 Historical Development of Corona Treatment Technique and Various Set-Ups Available 204 5.3 Factors Affecting the Outcome of Corona Treatment 207 5.3.1 Corona Dosage 207 5.3.2 Electrode Gap 208 5.4 Effects Produced by Corona Treatment 208 5.5 Surface Analysis of Corona-Treated Materials 209 5.5.1 Contact Angle Measurements 209 5.5.2 Surface Free Energy Determination 210 5.5.3 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) Analysis 214 5.5.4 Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) Analysis 217 5.5.5 Adhesion Property 218 5.6 Summary 219 6 Adhesion Activation of Aramid Fibers for Industrial Use 225Pieter J. de Lange, Peter G. Akker, Tony Mathew and Michel H.J. van den Tweel 6.1 Introduction 226 6.2 Adhesion Between Aramid Fibers and Rubber 228 6.2.1 Adhesion Activation Process 230 6.2.1.1 "Maturation" of the Adhesion Active Finish 230 6.2.1.2 Application and Curing 231 6.2.1.3 Resulting Chemical Surface Structure 232 6.2.1.4 Resulting Physical Surface Structure 234 6.2.2 RFL Dipping Process 234 6.2.2.1 Fiber-RFL Interface 234 6.2.2.2 RFL-Rubber Interface 236 6.3 Adhesion Between Aramid Fibers and Other Matrices 237 6.3.1 Thermoset Matrix 237 6.3.1.1 Micromechanical Testing 237 6.3.1.2 Macroscopic Adhesion and Composite Testing 238 6.3.2 Thermoplastic Matrix 239 6.4 Effect of Processing Oil on Adhesion 240 6.4.1 XPS Analysis 241 6.4.2 Adhesion to a Rubber Matrix 243 6.4.3 Adhesion to an Epoxy Matrix 243 6.5 Plasma Activation of Aramid Fibers 245 6.5.1 Experimental Details 247 6.5.2 Adhesion Results 248 6.5.2.1 Optimization Experiments 248 6.5.2.2 Adhesion of Plasma Activated Fiber Bundles 248 6.5.2.3 Adhesion of Plasma Activated Cords 250 6.5.2.4 Explanation of the Difference in Adhesion Between Fiber Bundles and Cords 251 6.5.3 Conclusions Regarding Plasma Activation for Industrial Use 253 6.5.3.1 Fiber Bundle Treatment 253 6.5.3.2 Cord Treatment 254 6.5.3.3 Matrices Other Than Rubber 254 6.6 Short-Cut Fibers 254 6.6.1 Applications in Rubber Matrix 255 6.6.2 Applications in Engineering Plastics 257 6.7 Summary and Prospects 257 7 Dual-Cured Hydrogels for Bioadhesives and Various Biomedical Applications 265Achiad Zilberfarb, Gali Cohen, Hanna Dodiuk and Elizabeth Amir 7.1 Introduction 267 7.2 Discussion 269 7.2.1 Curing Mechanisms 269 7.2.1.1 Free Radical and Coordination Mechanisms 269 7.2.1.2 Free Radical and Condensation Mechanisms 297 7.2.1.3 Coordination and Condensation Mechanisms 306 7.2.1.4 Free Radical and Ring Opening Mechanisms 314 7.2.1.5 Free Radical and Cycloaddition Mechanisms 315 7.2.1.6 Free Radical and Nucleophilic Addition Mechanisms 317 7.2.1.7 Nucleophilic Addition and Coordination Mechanisms 317 7.2.1.8 Condensation and Cycloaddition Mechanisms 319 7.2.1.9 Cycloaddition and Coordination Mechanisms 320 7.2.1.10 Coordination and Ring Opening Mechanisms 323 7.2.2 Processing 325 7.2.2.1 Photopatterning 327 7.2.2.2 3D Bioprinting 327 7.2.2.3 Injectable Hydrogels 328 7.2.3 Properties 331 7.2.4 Applications 333 7.3 Summary 335 8 Non-Adhesive SLIPS-Like Surfaces: Fabrication and Applications 347Swithin Hanosh and Sajan D. George List of Abbreviations 348 8.1 Introduction 348 8.2 Role of Contact Angle Hysteresis in Repelling Liquids 351 8.3 Non-Adhesive SLIPS-Like Surfaces 355 8.4 Applications 362 8.4.1 Anti-Biofouling/Anti-Fouling 362 8.4.2 Anti-Scaling 365 8.4.3 Liquid Transportation 366 8.4.4 Anti-Icing 368 8.4.5 Other Applications 370 8.5 Summary and Outlook 372 Acknowledgments 373 References 373 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisADHESIVES IN BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS Uniquely provides up-to-date and comprehensive information on adhesives in biomedical applications in an easily accessible form. Adhesives are gaining popularity in many and varied biomedical applications as they are being used as a replacement for sutures and staples, which have the disadvantages such as scarring, infection, keloid formation, poor skin healing, or hernia in the case of abdominal sutures. On the other hand, adhesives dramatically reduce healthcare costs, significantly reduce time spent in surgery, curb the risks of bleeding, and are generally easy to use. Adhesives also find their use in diagnostic imaging, various biomedical devices, dental adhesives, dermal adhesives, etc. Adhesives in Biomedical Applications contains eleven chapters and is divided into two parts: Part 1: General Topics; and Part 2: Specific Adhesives, Characteristics, and Applications. Topics covered include: historical developments of various adhesives for biomTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: General Topics 1 1 Historical Developments of Various Adhesives for Biomedical Applications 3Nagavendra Kommineni, Raju Saka, Vaskuri G. S. Sainaga Jyothi, Arun Butreddy, Jyotsna G. Vitore and Wahid Khan 1.1 Origin of Adhesives 4 1.2 Prominence of Biomedical Adhesives in Wound Healing and Drug Delivery 5 1.3 Generations of Bioadhesives 8 1.4 Timeline of Developments and Advances 11 1.5 Current and Future Applications 12 1.6 Summary 16 2 Global Industry Development and Analysis of Adhesives for Biomedical Applications 25Muhammed Yusuf Kandur, R. Hemamalini and Ebru Toksoy Öner 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Research Landscape of Bioadhesives 27 2.3 Sources of Bioadhesives for Biomedical Applications 29 2.4 Biomedical Applications of Bioadhesives 35 2.5 Latest Industrial Developments 38 2.6 Summary 42 3 Biomedical Adhesives 47Jaehun Mun and Sungbaek Seo 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Types of Biomedical Adhesives and their Components 50 3.3 Advances in Adhesives Development for Biomedical Uses 64 3.4 Summary 66 3.5 Acknowledgements 66 4 Bioadhesion: Fundamentals and Mechanisms 71Amit Porwal and Kamla Pathak 4.1 Introduction 71 4.2 Bioadhesion in Biological Systems 72 4.3 Bioadhesion/Mucoadhesion 73 4.4 The Mucosal Layer and Barriers to Drug Delivery 74 4.5 Barriers to Mucosal Drug Delivery 75 4.6 Factors Affecting Mucoadhesion 76 4.7 Mechanisms of Bioadhesion 79 4.8 Theories of Bioadhesion 81 4.9 Stages of Mucoadhesion 87 4.10 Modulation of Mucoadhesion 88 4.11 Molecular Biology in Bioadhesion 89 4.12 Administration of Bio- and Mucoadhesive Drug Delivery Systems 90 4.13 Prospects 93 4.14 Summary 93 Part 2: Specific Adhesives, Characteristics and Applications 99 5 Fibrin Glue: Sources, Characteristics and Applications 101Anindya Karmaker and Shoeb Ahmed 5.1 Introduction 102 5.2 Evolution of Fibrin Glue 103 5.3 Types of Fibrin Adhesives and their Working Mechanisms 106 5.4 Production Methods of Commercial Fibrin Adhesives 109 5.5 Comparison of Some Commercial Fibrin Adhesives 111 5.6 Recent Developments and Future Trend of Fibrin Adhesives 114 5.7 Summary 115 6 Herbal Bioactives-Based Mucoadhesive Drug Delivery Systems 121Shristhi Sohan Rawat, Arya Rai, Deepika Raina and Inderbir Singh 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Mucous Membrane 122 6.3 Theories of Adhesion 124 6.4 Mucoadhesive Polymers 128 6.5 Mucoadhesive-Based Drug Delivery Systems (DDS): Administration Routes 130 6.6 Clinical Studies 140 6.7 Patents on Herbal Bioactive--Based Mucoadhesive Drug Delivery Systems 141 6.8 Summary 143 7 Adhesive Hydrogels 151Proma Bhattacharya and Sudarsan Neogi 7.1 Introduction 151 7.2 Mechanisms of Adhesion 156 7.3 Design Principles for Adhesive Hydrogels 160 7.4 Commonly Used Adhesive Hydrogels 161 7.5 Prospective Applications of Adhesive Hydrogels 166 7.6 Summary 167 8 Adhesives in Dermal Patches 177Niharika Lal, Praveen Kumar Gaur and Navneet Verma 8.1 Introduction 178 8.2 Types of Dermal Patches 180 8.3 Evolution of Adhesives in Medical Applications 182 8.4 Types of Adhesives Used in Dermal Patches 184 8.5 Testing Physical Properties of PSAs 192 8.6 Prediction of Patch In Vivo Adhesive Performances 202 8.7 Adhesive Properties and Formulation Studies 203 8.8 Summary 204 9 Medical Adhesives from Extracted Mussel Adhesive Proteins 213Yuvaraj Dinakarkumar, Annushrie Arravind and Niranjana Murali Mohan 9.1 Introduction 213 9.2 The Mussel Byssus 215 9.3 Mussel-Inspired Adhesion 219 9.4 Mussel-Inspired Tissue Adhesives 228 9.5 Summary 239 10 Dental Adhesives: State-of-the-Art, Current Perspectives, and Promising Applications 253Lamia Sami Mokeem, Isadora Martini Garcia, Abdulrahman A. Balhaddad, Kevin Cline, Gabriel Rakovsky, Fabricio Mezzomo Collares and Mary Anne S. Melo 10.1 Introduction 254 10.2 Brief History of Dental Adhesive Systems 256 10.3 Classification and Composition of Adhesive Systems 258 10.4 Understanding the Challenges of Dental Adhesives Inside the Mouth 265 10.5 New Approaches Targeting Longevity of Adhesive-Dentin Interfaces 267 10.6 Dental Adhesives Endowed With Antibacterial Properties 268 10.7 Summary 270 10.8 Acknowledgments 270 11 Role of Adhesive-Based Systems for Diagnostic Imaging and Theranostic Applications 279Aishee Dey and Sudarsan Neogi 11.1 Introduction 279 11.2 Role of Adhesives in Diagnostic Imaging 280 11.3 Theranostics 290 11.4 Summary 302 References 303 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book sets out the basic principles of composite construction with reference to beams, slabs, columns and frames, and their applications to building structures. It deals with the problems likely to arise in the design of composite members in buildings, and relates basic theory to the design approach of Eurocodes 2, 3 and 4. The new edition is based for the first time on the finalised Eurocode for steel/concrete composite structures.Trade Review'A very useful book written by an acknowledged authority on its subject....Professor Johnson has been heavily involved in the drafting of the composite Eurocode...so one can have confidence that this book provides authorative guidance.' The Structural Engineer April 2005. 'This book gives a clear and concise explanation of the theories and practical application of stell/ concrete composite construction for the budding and practising structural engineer.' Building Engineer August 2005Table of ContentsDesign philosophy and the Eurocodes: materials, loadings, analysis, design; Shear connection in beams and columns; partial interaction; Simply-supported composite slabs and beams; Continuous beams and slabs, and beams in framed structures; Composite columns, beam-to-column joints, and frames; Worked examples to the Eurocodes: slab, beams, joint, columns, frame, including fire resistance

Read more less